Sharp MX-2610N User Manual Download Page 98

Page: 98 / 1312

OPERATION GUIDE - REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE

file:///G|/Documents/Products/MX2610_3110_3610N/Operation%20Manual/MX3610OP_0122A1/mx3610_ex_ope/contents/01-051b.htm[24/03/2011 2:56:39 PM]

Index

Contents

Overview

and shake it horizontally
five or six times.

Slowly insert the new toner

cartridge on the level.

A toner cartridge of a different

colour cannot be installed. Be

sure to install a toner cartridge of

the same colour.

Push the cartridge in until it

locks securely in place.

Keep pushing in the cartridge until it

clicks into place.

Close the front cover.

After the toner cartridge is replaced, the

machine automatically enters image

adjustment mode. Do not open the front

cover while this is occurring.

Summary of Contents for MX-2610N

Page 1: ...or peripheral devices TOUCH PANEL TURNING ON THE POWER This section describes how to turn on off the machine s power and how to restart the machine CHANGING MODES STOPPING DELETING A JOB PRIORITY PROCESSING AND CHECKING THE STATUS A job is a discrete unit of action such as copy fax and image send This section explains how to stop a job and how to perform priority processing USER AUTHENTICATION Thi...

Page 2: ...SS TRAY Use the bypass tray for printing on plain paper envelopes label sheets tab paper and other special media HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL ADDRESS BOOK Register fax e mail and Internet fax addresses in the address book beforehand so that you can easily retrieve them in fax or image send mode REMOTE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE You can remotely operate the machine from the same panel as the machine s o...

Page 3: ...10OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 001 htm 24 03 2011 2 55 59 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N EXTERIOR Index Contents OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts on the exterior of the machine Tap the name to make its details pop up Optional ...

Page 4: ...anual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 002 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 00 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N INTERIOR Index Contents OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts inside the machine Tap the name to make its details pop up ...

Page 5: ...MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 003 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 01 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N TOP Index Contents OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts on the upper side of the machine Tap the name to make its details pop up ...

Page 6: ...0OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 004 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 01 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N SIDE AND BACK Index Contents OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts on the side and back of the machine Tap the name to make its details pop up ...

Page 7: ...NEL Index Contents OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts of the operation panel Tap the name to make its details pop up You can change the angle of the touch panel Adjust the angle for ease of viewing by pushing the movable part of the touch panel to the left The indicators of the operation panel may differ depending on the country an...

Page 8: ...g Tab tapping Operation types Tapping Touch the panel with your finger and then lift it quickly Use this method to select a key tab or check box Long touching Touch the panel with your finger and hold it for a while Double tapping Lightly tap the touch panel twice Use this function to switch a preview mode or to enlarge a preview image Flicking Flick the panel to scroll a preview image quickly Sli...

Page 9: ...eric keys to enter numbers C Tap to increase or decrease the value Long touching causes the value to be increased or decreased until you stop touching D Activate to enable the setting E Tapping finalizes the setting and then closes the screen A Tap to select an item The selected item changes to a different colour B Drag the bar up and down It appears when the item does not fit in the screen C Flic...

Page 10: ...E TOUCH TYPES file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 006 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 03 PM Index Contents Tab tapping A Tap a tab to switch what is displayed ...

Page 11: ...ach favourite operation group list In Setting mode Web version select User Control Favourite Operation Group List Home Screen List Perform this setting when user authentication is used Icon indicating the status of the machine The icon shows the status of the machine such as connecting to a USB device Storing Image Send data in the machine s memory When there is data to send When there is data to ...

Page 12: ...ing shortcut keys Deleting shortcut keys Renaming shortcut keys Resetting the shortcut key status to the factory default setting Tap the Register Key key Tap a function you want to add The shortcut key for the added function appears on the Home screen Adding shortcut keys 3 steps in all Tap the Edit Home key on the action panel If user authentication is not provided enter the Administrator Passwor...

Page 13: ... 2 56 04 PM Tap the Delete Key key Switch the displayed contents and tap the key you want to delete A confirmation screen appears Tap the Yes key The selected shortcut key is deleted from the Home screen Tap the Change Key Name key Tap the Edit Home key on the action panel Renaming shortcut keys 4 steps in all Tap the Edit Home key on the action panel ...

Page 14: ...the displayed contents and tap the key you want to rename The soft keyboard is displayed Tap the Return Layout to Factory Default key The shortcut key status is reset to the factory default setting Enter a new name and then tap the OK key The selected shortcut key is renamed Resetting the shortcut key status to the factory default setting 2 steps in all Tap the Edit Home key on the action panel ...

Page 15: ...N TO ALL MODES This screen displays the scanned original as an image Check the scanned original here You can also check the finish settings and edit the original by replacing rotating or deleting pages in it as required The preview screen is available in four patterns which you can switch from one to another You can edit a scanned original in edit mode Dividing an original and combining originals ...

Page 16: ... describes how to turn on off the machine s power and how to restart the machine Operate two power switches the main power switch inside the front cover located in the lower left corner and the Power button on the operation panel When turning off the main power switch press the Power button on the operation panel and then turn the main power switch to the position In a sudden case of main power ou...

Page 17: ...1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 011 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 06 PM Index Contents In order for some settings to take effect the machine must be restarted In some states of the machine restarting with the Power button may not make the settings take effect In this case turn off the main power switch and then turn it on again ...

Page 18: ...consumption state Preheat mode will activate when the set duration of time elapses in waiting status without executing a job Compared to Auto Power Shut Off Timer the amount of energy saved is less and the wakeup time is shorter In the preheat mode the Home Screen button is lit and the light goes off for the touch panel and the Power Save Mode button The touch panel remains displayed The touch pan...

Page 19: ...en print data is being received or when the Power Save button is pressed while it is blinking This mode turns off the power to the operation panel and the fusing unit and makes the machine wait in the lowest power consumption state Auto Power Shut Off Timer will activate when the set duration of time elapses in waiting status without executing a job Compared to preheat mode the power saving rate i...

Page 20: ... REMOTE JOB IS FINISHED ENTER AUTO POWER SHUT OFF MODE Index Contents OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Printing in Auto Power Shut Off Timer turns on the power and then the machine returns to Auto Power Shut Off Timer immediately after completing the print job To set As soon as the remote job is finished enter Auto power shut off mode In Setting mode select Energy Save Power Management Setting As so...

Page 21: ...0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 015 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 08 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N ECO SCAN Index Contents OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Non print jobs such as sending a scanned original are performed with the fusing unit turned off To set Eco scan In Setting mode select Energy Save Eco Scan Setting ...

Page 22: ... 016 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 09 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N POWER ON OFF SCHEDULING FUNCTION Index Contents OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Use this function to set the times for turning the power on and off for the machine to reduce power consumption Setting Power ON OFF Scheduling Function In Setting mode select Energy Save Power ON OFF Schedule Setting ...

Page 23: ...24 03 2011 2 56 09 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N POWER MANAGEMENT SETTING Index Contents OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES This function performs optimal power management for the use frequency by analyzing the usage of the machine during a certain time period To enable the power management setting In Setting mode select Energy Save Power Management Setting ...

Page 24: ... following procedure is used to log in using a user number received from the administrator of the machine When starting the machine the login screen appears When controlled by user number If an incorrect user number is entered three times in a row If A Warning when Login Fails is enabled in the system settings the operation panel will be locked for five minutes if an incorrect user number is enter...

Page 25: ...r scan is displayed When a limitation is set for the number of pages that a user can use the use count for the user that has logged in is displayed To limit the number of pages that a user can use In Setting mode select User Control Page Limit Group List To hide the number of pages that can be used after login In Setting mode disable User Control Default Settings Display Usage Status after Login T...

Page 26: ...DAP authentication is used If an incorrect login name or an incorrect password is entered three times in a row If A Warning when Login Fails is enabled in the system settings the operation panel will be locked for five minutes if an incorrect login name or password is entered three times in a row Contact the machine administrator to check the login name password assigned to you To release the oper...

Page 27: ...0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 021a htm 24 03 2011 2 56 11 PM Index Contents Operation To store a user name In Setting mode select User Control User List Also register detailed information such as the login name user number and password Ask the administrator of the machine for the information that you need to use the machine ...

Page 28: ...the server provides LDAP service on the LAN local area network Enter the password Enter the password from the soft keyboard If you are logging in to an LDAP server enter the password that is stored with your LDAP server login name Each entered character will be displayed as After entering the password tap the OK key When authentication is by LDAP server and you have different passwords stored in U...

Page 29: ...hat the user can copy or scan is displayed When a limitation is set for the number of pages that a user can use the use count for the user that has logged in is displayed To limit the number of pages that a user can use In Setting mode select User Control Page Limit Group List To hide the number of pages that can be used after login In Setting mode disable User Control Default Settings Display Usa...

Page 30: ...RAYS file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 024 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 13 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS Index Contents OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES ...

Page 31: ...NS COMMON TO ALL MODES To indicate the landscape setting R is added to the end of the name of a paper size enabled for both landscape and portrait settings Paper that can be set either in the portrait or landscape orientation Paper that can only be set in the landscape orientation A4 B5 8 1 2 x 11 A3W A3 B4 12 x 18 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 Paper set in the landscape orientation Paper set in t...

Page 32: ...to that of Sharp standard paper Before using any paper consult the dealer or authorised service representative The use of non recommended or non usable paper may result in skewed feeding misfeeds poor toner fusing the toner does not adhere to the paper well and can be rubbed off or machine failure The use of non recommended paper may result in misfeeds or poor image quality Before using non recomm...

Page 33: ...itted Heavy paper 1 Permitted Permitted Heavy paper 2 Permitted Thin paper Permitted Pre printed Permitted Permitted Permitted Recycle Paper Permitted Permitted Permitted Letter head Permitted Permitted Permitted Pre punched Permitted Permitted Permitted Colour Permitted Permitted Permitted Labels Permitted Glossy paper Permitted Transparency film S4BG68 Permitted Tab Paper Permitted Envelope Perm...

Page 34: ...bs Heavy paper as thick as 257 g m2 69 lbs or more Irregularly shaped paper Stapled paper Damp paper Curled paper Paper whose print side or reverse side has been already printed on by another printer or multifunction device Paper with a wave like pattern due to moisture absorption When Disabling of Duplex is set for Letter Head or Pre Printed set the print side in the same orientation as for the o...

Page 35: ...aper from size A5R to A3 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 R to 11 x 17 can be loaded into trays 1 and 4 If you loaded paper of a different type or size from the paper previously loaded be sure to check the settings in Setting mode Incorrect setting affects automatic paper selection action It may cause print failure printing on paper of a wrong size or type or paper misfeeds Do not place heavy objects on the tray or ...

Page 36: ...p Keep holding the handle until the lock is released Adjust guide plates A and B by squeezing their lock levers and sliding them to match the longitudinal and transversal dimensions of the paper to be loaded The guide plates A and B are slidable Slide each guide plate while squeezing its lock lever to adjust to the paper size Insert the paper into the tray Load the paper with the print side facing...

Page 37: ...O A TRAY file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 027b htm 24 03 2011 2 56 15 PM Index Contents Overview into the machine Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine ...

Page 38: ... tray for outputting massive prints that cannot be processed using the regular tray The tray can hold up to 3500 sheets of A4 size paper 80 g m2 or 21 lbs When changing the paper size contact your dealer or authorised service representative Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray If you loaded paper of a different type or size from the paper previously loaded be sure to ch...

Page 39: ...RATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES 3 steps in all Pull out the paper tray Gently pull the tray out until it stops Place the paper in the centre of the paper table Load the paper with the print side facing down The stack must not be higher than the indicator line maximum of 3500 sheets Fan the paper well before loading it If the paper is not fanned multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed Gent...

Page 40: ...place the original Loading tab paper Inserting transparency film Loading envelopes When using plain paper other than Sharp standard paper or special media other than SHARP recommended transparency film or when printing on the reverse side of previously used paper load paper one sheet at a time Loading more than one sheet at a time will cause misfeeds Before loading paper straighten any curling in ...

Page 41: ...m the machine Allowing sheets to stack in the output tray may result in curling Loading envelopes When inserting envelopes in the bypass tray place them aligned to the left side in the orientation shown below Loading envelopes Only the front side of envelopes can be printed or copied on Place the front side facing down Important points when using envelopes Do not print on both sides of an envelope...

Page 42: ... inside Those damaged with a crease fold mark or tear Envelopes with the corner gluing position on the back not aligned with the corner edge should not be used as it may cause creasing Print quality is not guaranteed in the area 10 mm 13 32 around the edges of the envelope Print quality is not guaranteed on parts of envelopes where there is a large step like change of thickness such as on four lay...

Page 43: ... place heavy objects on the bypass tray or press down on the tray When loading paper larger than A4R or 8 1 2 x 11 R pull out the extension guide Pull the extension guide all the way out Set the bypass tray guides to the width of the paper Load the paper with the print side facing down Insert the paper along the bypass tray guides all the way into the bypass tray until it stops For Letter Head and...

Page 44: ... contents 01 029b htm 24 03 2011 2 56 18 PM Index Contents Overview orientation as in the regular mode facing down Do not force the paper in If the bypass tray guides are set wider than the paper move the bypass tray guides in until they correctly fit the width of the paper If the bypass guides are set too wide the paper may skew or be creased ...

Page 45: ...tion original misfeeds and smudges may result Transparency film or other transparent material for backup copy tracing paper carbon paper thermal paper or originals printed with thermal transfer ink ribbon should not be fed through the document feeder Originals to be fed through the feeder should not be damaged crumpled folded loosely pasted together or have cut out holes Originals with multiple pu...

Page 46: ...l 11 longitudinal x 39 3 8 transversal When the original is a non standard size see the appropriate explanation below for the mode you are using COPIER SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE FAX SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES IMAGE SEND SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES Allowed original weights 1 sided scanning 35 g m2 to 128 g m2 9 lbs to 34 lbs 2 sided scanning...

Page 47: ...htm 24 03 2011 2 56 19 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Index Contents Overview OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES 2 steps in all Place the original Up to 100 sheets can be inserted After scanning is finished on the automatic document feeder remove originals from the original exit tray Make sure that there is no original on the document glass ...

Page 48: ...document feeder When scanning a thick book or other thick original push up the back of the automatic document feeder and then place the original When closing open the automatic document feeder all the way and then close it Allowed original sizes Maximum original size Standard size 297 mm longitudinal x 420 mm transversal or A3 11 longitudinal x 17 transversal Non standard size 297 mm longitudinal ...

Page 49: ...Do not place any objects under the original size detector Closing the automatic document feeder with an object underneath may damage the original size detector or disable correct detection of the original size Open the automatic document feeder When placing a non standard size original on the document glass the size can be detected easily if a blank sheet of A4 8 1 2 x 11 B5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 or other...

Page 50: ...heet paper drawer MX DE14 Additional tray A maximum of 500 sheets of paper can be loaded into each tray Large capacity tray MX LC11 Additional tray A maximum of 3500 sheets of paper can be loaded into the tray To install a stand 1x500 2x500 3x500 sheet paper drawer is required Exit tray unit for a 26 31 paper machine MX TR12 This can be added to the right side of the machine Exit tray unit for a 3...

Page 51: ...s a Fax function Mirroring kit MX EB12 Stores a copy of data in a separate place Application Integration Module MX AMX1 The application integration module can be combined with the network scanner function to append a metadata file to a scanned image file Application Communication Module MX AMX2 This links the machine to an external application over a network External Account Module MX AMX3 This is...

Page 52: ..._ope contents 01 036 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 21 PM Index Contents Web browsing expansion kit MX AM10 pages Stamp unit AR SU1 This stamps each original page after it is scanned in image send mode Stamp cartridge AR SV1 Two stamp cartridges are included in a package Some options may not be available in some countries and regions ...

Page 53: ...enance Function names The following describes the parts that appear when the finisher is open Tap the name to make its details pop up A finisher cannot be installed simultaneously with a saddle finisher Exercise caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place as the output tray may move up and down Supplies The finisher requires the following staple cartridge Staple cartridge ...

Page 54: ...OPERATION GUIDE FINISHER file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 037a htm 24 03 2011 2 56 22 PM Index Contents Operation ...

Page 55: ...3610N FINISHER OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES 8 steps in all Open the cover While pressing the lever over to the left slide the finisher to the left until it stops Gently slide the finisher until it stops Lower the staple case release lever and remove the staple case Pull the staple case out to the right Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case Replacing the cartridge ...

Page 56: ... Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place Replace the staple case Push the staple case in until it clicks into place Slide the finisher back to the right Gently slide the finisher back to the right until it locks into its original position Close the cover Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly Make a proof copy in staple sort function...

Page 57: ...s in half and the paper folding function that folds paper in half To punch holes in printed paper install an optional hole punch module Function names Supplies Saddle finisher maintenance Function names Tap the name to make its details pop up A paper pass unit is required to install a saddle finisher as well as a stand 1x500 2x500 3x500 sheet paper drawer Do not place heavy objects on the saddle f...

Page 58: ...ts Operation Finisher unit Staple cartridge approx 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges MX SCX1 Saddle stitch unit Staple cartridge approx 2000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges AR SC3 Saddle finisher maintenance When the staple cartridge runs out of staples a message will appear in the operation panel Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge ...

Page 59: ...n the front cover While pulling the lever slide the saddle finisher to the left until it stops Gently slide the finisher until it stops Lower the staple case release lever and remove the staple case Pull the staple case out to the right Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case Replacing the staple cartridge finisher unit Replacing the staple cartridge saddle stitch unit Replacing the...

Page 60: ...le case in until it clicks into place Push the saddle finisher back and latch it to the machine Gently slide the finisher back to the right until it locks into its original position Close the front cover Open the side cover Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly Replacing the staple cartridge saddle stitch unit Before starting this procedure remove ...

Page 61: ...0N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 038b htm 24 03 2011 2 56 24 PM Index Contents Overview Remove the empty staple cartridge Load new staple cartridges Remove the cover from each staple cartridge and then install the cartridge Close the side cover ...

Page 62: ...11 2 56 25 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N PUNCH MODULE Index Contents Operation OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES This device can be installed on a finisher or saddle finisher to punch holes in paper to be output Discarding punch waste Punch waste from punched holes is collected in the punch waste box Follow the operation procedure to replace punch waste ...

Page 63: ...N TO ALL MODES Open the cover While pressing the lever over to the left slide the finisher to the left until it stops Gently slide the finisher until it stops Grasp the punch waste box handle gently pull out the box and discard the punch waste Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container taking care not to let the waste scatter Finisher installed Saddle finisher installed Finisher i...

Page 64: ...he box back in While pressing the lever over to the left slide the finisher to the left until it stops Gently slide the finisher until it stops Close the cover Open the front cover Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container taking care not to let the waste scatter Saddle finisher installed 4 steps in all ...

Page 65: ...NCH MODULE file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 039b htm 24 03 2011 2 56 26 PM Index Contents Overview Replace the punch waste box Close the front cover ...

Page 66: ...N MX 3110N MX 3610N REMOTE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE Index Contents Operation OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Remotely operate the machine on your computer You can operate the machine from the same panel as the machine s operation panel that is displayed on your PC with the same feel as operating in front of the machine The remote operation function can only be used on one computer at a time ...

Page 67: ...work Install a VNC application software recommended VNC software RealIVNC in your computer After the preparation is completed follow the operation described below to set up the function Example RealVNC 4 steps in all Enter the IP address of the machine in the Server entry box Check with the administrator of the machine for its IP address Click the OK button Follow the prompts on the operation pane...

Page 68: ...10_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 040b htm 24 03 2011 2 56 27 PM Index Contents Overview To set the operational authority for the remote operation function In Setting mode select System Settings Operation Settings Remote Operation Settings ...

Page 69: ...ex Contents Operation OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES The application communication module is required to use a standard application on the machine This module enables you to link the machine with a scanner application and other standard applications Set a standard application in Setting mode and Sharp OSA To set a standard application in Setting mode In Setting mode select Application Settings Ext...

Page 70: ...d applications have been stored the key cannot be tapped Select a standard application If two or more standard applications have been stored the screen for selecting a standard application will appear Tap the standard application that you wish to use If only one standard application has been stored connection to the standard application will begin Connect the machine to the standard application Th...

Page 71: ...otification is sent to the application User authentication by the external account application cannot be used However the external account application can be used in combination with the internal account function External account application setup After setting an external application in Setting Mode restart the machine to enable the setting To restart the machine see TURNING ON THE POWER To set u...

Page 72: ...mode forcibly To forcibly terminate external account mode In Setting mode Web version select System Settings Sharp OSA Settings External Account Setting If termination in Setting mode Web version fails terminate it forcibly on the operation panel of the machine In Setting mode select System Settings Sharp OSA Settings and change the setting for External Account Setting and then restart the machine...

Page 73: ...HE MAIN CHARGER OF THE PHOTOCONDUCTIVE DRUM CLEANING THE PT CHARGER OF THE FIRST TRANSFER BELT When paper misfeed occurs in the bypass tray CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER When lines or other dirty spots appear on the scanned original when using the automatic document feeder CLEANING THE ORIGINAL FEED ROLLER When coloured lines appear CLEANING THE LASER UNIT Do not use a flammable spray to clean t...

Page 74: ...OVERVIEW OF CLEANING file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 044 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 30 PM Index Contents The area with a mirror like finish is shown as ...

Page 75: ...10N MX 3110N MX 3610N CLEANING OF THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Index Contents CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT When dirty spots or coloured white lines are left on scanned images clean the following parts Keep these parts clean at all times When using the document glass the document glass the document backplate sheet When using the automatic document feeder the scanning area Examples o...

Page 76: ...tents 01 045 1 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 31 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N DOCUMENT GLASS Index Contents CLEANING OF THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER To clean this part select a soft cloth for wiping If necessary moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent After that wipe with a clean dry cloth ...

Page 77: ...tents 01 045 2 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 32 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N DOCUMENT BACKPLATE SHEET Index Contents CLEANING OF THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER To clean this part select a soft cloth for wiping If necessary moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent After that wipe with a clean dry cloth ...

Page 78: ...contents 01 045 3 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 32 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N SCANNING AREA Index Contents CLEANING OF THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER To clean this part use the glass cleaner that is stored in the automatic document feeder After using the glass cleaner be sure to return it to its storage position ...

Page 79: ...Contents Operation CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT If black lines or coloured lines appear even after you have cleaned the document glass and automatic document feeder use the charger cleaner to clean the main charger that charges the photoconductive drum If cleaning the main charger of the photoconductive drum does not solve the problem pull the knob out and push it back three more times When pulling an...

Page 80: ... htm 24 03 2011 2 56 33 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N CLEANING THE MAIN CHARGER OF THE PHOTOCONDUCTIVE DRUM CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT 10 steps in all Open the front cover Move the lock of the waste toner box to the release position push it down until the waste toner box stops and then slowly lift it up to remove it Remove the charger cleaner The charger cleaner is attached to the ...

Page 81: ... to put it off the hook 2 Bring it over the hook to place it near side 3 Around boss A rotate the charger cleaner to put it off the hook on the left Clean the main charger Gently push the charger cleaner all the way in and gently pull it out Insert it so that label A on the cleaning target side and label B on the charger cleaner side are oriented as shown Repeat step 4 with all other main chargers...

Page 82: ...then put the tip the side without a handle on the hook on the left 2 Put the right hand side of the charger cleaner over the hook to place it in the back 3 Put the charger cleaner on the hook Install a waste toner box Insert the box from above at a slant In the direction opposite to the direction you removed it in Push the waste toner box into the machine Push the box in until it clicks into place...

Page 83: ...E CLEANING THE MAIN CHARGER OF THE PHOTOCONDUCTIVE DRUM file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 046b htm 24 03 2011 2 56 33 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 84: ...0_ex_ope contents 01 047a htm 24 03 2011 2 56 34 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N CLEANING THE PT CHARGER OF THE FIRST TRANSFER BELT Index Contents Operation CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT If black or coloured lines appear even after you have cleaned the document glass automatic document feeder and main charger clean the PT charger using the PT charger cleaner ...

Page 85: ...3610N CLEANING THE PT CHARGER OF THE FIRST TRANSFER BELT CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT 6 steps in all Open the front cover Move the lock of the waste toner box to the release position push it down until the waste toner box stops and then slowly lift it up to remove it Clean the PT charger Gently pull out the PT charger cleaner to the position you feel appropriate and then push it all the way in Repeat ...

Page 86: ..._3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 047b htm 24 03 2011 2 56 35 PM Index Contents Overview Push the waste toner box into the machine Push the box in until it clicks into place Lock the waste toner box Move the waste toner box lock to the lock position Close the front cover ...

Page 87: ... 56 36 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER Index Contents CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT If paper misfeeds frequently occur when feeding paper in the bypass tray remove the maintenance cover and wipe the surface of the feed roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent After cleaning mount the maintenance cover back in place ...

Page 88: ...pe contents 01 049 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 36 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N CLEANING THE ORIGINAL FEED ROLLER Index Contents CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT If lines or other dirt appear on the scanned original when the automatic document feeder is used wipe the surface of the roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent ...

Page 89: ...inside the machine becomes dirty line patterns coloured lines may form in the printed image If line patterns coloured lines appear clean the laser unit Identifying lines coloured lines caused by a dirty laser unit Coloured lines always appear in the same place The lines are never black Coloured lines appear in parallel with the direction of paper feeding Coloured lines appear not only on output fr...

Page 90: ... 2 56 38 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N CLEANING THE LASER UNIT CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT 15 steps in all Open the front cover Move the lock of the waste toner box to the release position push it down until the waste toner box stops and then slowly lift it up to remove it Take out the cleaning tool for the laser unit The cleaning tool is attached to the front cover ...

Page 91: ...p of the cleaning tool is not dirty If the cleaner is dirty remove the cleaner from the cleaning tool and replace it with a clean one For the procedure for replacing the cleaner see steps 5 through 7 If the cleaner is not dirty go to step 8 Open the inner cover and take out a replacement cleaner Replacement cleaners are stored on the inner cover Grasp the end of the cleaner and pull it out of the ...

Page 92: ...e cleaner firmly and push the cleaning tool in Point the cleaner down and slowly insert the tool into the hole that you wish to clean Be sure to point the cleaner down Labels similar to A are attached to areas that require cleaning Insert the cleaning tool all the way into the hole and then pull it back out Pull the cleaning tool out until you feel the tip of the tool leave the cleaning Put the re...

Page 93: ...g tool Repeat steps 8 to 10 to clean all holes 4 holes in the laser unit There are a total of four holes to be cleaned in the laser unit Clean all holes Replace the cleaning tool 1 Engage the cleaning tool onto the boss and turn it around it and then put the edge the cleaner side on the left hand hook 2 Put the right hand side of the cleaning tool over the hook to place it on the near side 3 Turn ...

Page 94: ...610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 050b htm 24 03 2011 2 56 38 PM Index Contents Overview Push the box in until it clicks into place Lock the waste toner box Move the waste toner box lock to the lock position Close the front cover ...

Page 95: ...children If a toner cartridge is stored on end the toner may harden and become unusable Always store toner cartridges on their side If a toner cartridge other than a SHARP recommended toner cartridge is used the machine may not attain full quality and performance and there is a risk of damage to the machine Be sure to use a SHARP recommended toner cartridge If any one of the toner colours runs out...

Page 96: ...ERATION GUIDE REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 051a htm 24 03 2011 2 56 39 PM Index Contents Operation ...

Page 97: ...LACEMENT OF TONER CARTRIDGE CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT 6 steps in all Open the front cover Pull the toner cartridge toward you Gently pull out the toner cartridge horizontally If the cartridge is pulled out abruptly toner may spill out Example Replacing the yellow toner cartridge Hold the toner cartridge with both hands as shown and slowly pull it out of the machine Take out a new toner cartridge fr...

Page 98: ...es Slowly insert the new toner cartridge on the level A toner cartridge of a different colour cannot be installed Be sure to install a toner cartridge of the same colour Push the cartridge in until it locks securely in place Keep pushing in the cartridge until it clicks into place Close the front cover After the toner cartridge is replaced the machine automatically enters image adjustment mode Do ...

Page 99: ...0N MX 3110N MX 3610N REPLACING THE WASTE TONER BOX Index Contents Operation CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT The waste toner box collects excess toner that is produced during printing When the waste toner box becomes full Replace used toner container will appear Do not throw the waste toner box into a fire Toner may fly and cause burns Store the waste toner box out of the reach of small children ...

Page 100: ...in all Open the front cover Move the waste toner box lock to the release position to have the waste toner box fall forward until it stops Keep the replacement cleaner that has not been used Store it at the left of the new waste toner box Remove the waste toner box Hold the waste toner box by both hands and lift it up slowly If the waste toner box falls too far forward it will not be possible to re...

Page 101: ...waste toner box Install a new waste toner box Insert the box from above at a slant In the direction opposite to the direction you removed it in Push the waste toner box into the machine Push the box in until it clicks into place Lock the waste toner box Move the waste toner box lock to the lock position Close the front cover Do not point the holes down as used toner will spill out Keep waste toner...

Page 102: ...ERATION GUIDE REPLACING THE WASTE TONER BOX file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 052b htm 24 03 2011 2 56 41 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 103: ...x_ope contents 01 053a htm 24 03 2011 2 56 41 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE Index Contents Operation CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT If a stamp unit AR SU1 is installed on the automatic document feeder and the stamp has become light replace the stamp cartridge AR SV1 Supplies Stamp cartridge 2 in package AR SV1 ...

Page 104: ...on 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 053b htm 24 03 2011 2 56 42 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT 4 steps in all Open the document feeder tray Remove the stamp cartridge Install a new stamp cartridge Close the document feeder tray ...

Page 105: ...ERATION GUIDE REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 053b htm 24 03 2011 2 56 42 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 106: ...NCTIONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYS Index Contents OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Display the soft keyboard to register the name of a file program folder or user The soft keyboard shown here is an image for your reference Different keys may be enabled depending on the actual situation and condition under which you enter characters To register words In Setting mode select System Settings Operation Settin...

Page 107: ...4 03 2011 2 56 44 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N CHANGING MODES Index Contents OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Changing mode from the Home screen Home Screen button Tap the mode icon Operate for each mode Changing mode from the mode display Tap on the mode display Tap for any mode desired Operate for each mode In image send mode tap to change mode ...

Page 108: ...Slow Scan Mode in Others For this type 2 sided scanning is disabled Original with two or three filing holes Place the original so that the punched edge does not fall on the feed slot of the document feeder tray Specify the orientation of the original using Original Setting Place the original in the automatic document feeder Depending the type and status of the original use the document glass Follo...

Page 109: ...the those listed below To place an original on the document glass see DOCUMENT GLASS Pamphlet Transparency film Transparent material for backup copy Tracing paper Carbon paper Thermal paper Original having major creases or distortion Original with a tear Original with a folded part Original having pasted parts or cut outs Original with a large number of punch holes for filing Use the automatic doc...

Page 110: ...tap the C key In fax mode you can enter characters other than numbers and a different key layout is provided Tap to perform a print or send job In copy mode B W Start and Colour Start keys are displayed Tap to cancel all settings and restore the initial status in each mode Numeric keys Start key B W Start key and Colour Start key STOP key Cancel Copy key CA key Numeric keys Start key B W Start key...

Page 111: ...OPERATION GUIDE OPERATION OF FREQUENTLY USED KEYS file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 060 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 45 PM Index Contents ...

Page 112: ...Lists fax send jobs using a telephone line The background of the job status display changes as follows Green Job in progress Yellow Warming up waiting Red Waiting for error clearing Grey No job On each tab jobs are classified into three groups Jobs move among the lists according to the processing status from Spool Job Queue and Complete in that order To switch the job list display to the display b...

Page 113: ...Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 061 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 45 PM Index Contents list after printing or sending is completed Complete list Lists jobs through with copying printing or sending ...

Page 114: ...ish to stop or delete Tap the Job Queue key When you wish to stop a print job being sent from the computer tap the Spool key Tap the job that you wish to stop or delete and then tap the Stop Delete key on the action panel When a screen appears that allows you to confirm that you do want to stop the job tap the Cancel key To delete more than one job operate the check box for Enter Plural Selection ...

Page 115: ...peration OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES This function gives priority to processing of copied faxed or image send jobs arising later to jobs already in a queue for printing or sending Priority processing operation varies as follows depending on the job type Job on the print tab The job currently in progress is suspended to let the priority job make interruption Job on the scanner fax Internet fax t...

Page 116: ...e Job Queue key This function gives priority to processing of copied faxed or image send jobs arising later to jobs already in a queue for printing or sending Tap the job for priority processing and then tap the Raise Priority key on the action panel If a job in progress is a broadcast transmission job or a serial polling job the selected job will be preferentially transmitted between destinations...

Page 117: ...N PROGRESS Index Contents OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES 3 steps in all Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job whose contents you wish to check Tap the Job Queue key Tap the job whose contents you wish to check and then tap the Check Details of Selected Job key on the action panel Different job contents appear in different modes For information on the icons displayed on the job key...

Page 118: ...he tab for the job whose contents you wish to check Tap the Complete key To check completed jobs you need to be using document filing DOCUMENT FILING SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES Tap the job whose contents you wish to check and then tap the Check Details of Selected Job key on the action panel Jobs you can check are displayed as keys so that you can tap them Different job contents appear in differ...

Page 119: ...can to E mail job Scan to FTP job Scan to Network Folder job Scan to Desktop job Fax transmission job Fax reception job PC Fax transmission job Internet fax transmission job Including Direct SMTP PC I Fax transmission job Scan to HDD file print job Internet fax reception job Including Direct SMTP Broadcast job Inbound routing job Tandem copy print job Reprinting of multiple files as grouped into a...

Page 120: ...he job was being executed Reserved job Display Status Waiting The job is waiting to be executed Retry Mode The job is being retried due to a communication error or other problem Waiting for confirmation of the transmission Waiting for confirmation of Internet fax transmission A day and time is displayed Timer transmission job the specified time is displayed Completed job Display Status OK Normal t...

Page 121: ...g or inbound routing operation If transmission to 3 destinations was successful out of a total of 5 003 005 OK will appear No response An error occurred because there was no response from the destination Busy An error occurred because the other party was busy OK REPORT A Successful reception reply received NG REPORT A Delivery error reply received NO REPORT Delivery Confirmation Receive Timeout E ...

Page 122: ... modes using the following functions in conjunction helps reduce even more power consumption Function Description AS SOON AS THE REMOTE JOB IS FINISHED ENTER AUTO POWER SHUT OFF MODE The machine only returns from Auto Power Shut Off for printing and enters Auto Power Shut Off mode as soon as printing is completed ECO SCAN The machine is operated with the fusing unit turned off for non printing ope...

Page 123: ...01 067 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 50 PM Index Contents Time On 1min As soon as the remote job is finished enter Auto power shut off mode Off On Power Management Settings On Off Preheat Mode Setting 1min 1min Panel display during pre heat mode On On Each Energy Save settings in the System Settings is not applyed when Nomal Eco mode is used ...

Page 124: ... MX 3110N MX 3610N ACTION PANEL Index Contents OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES This panel displays up to six shortcut keys for recommended functions that enable you to use the machine even more conveniently Recommended functions displayed vary according to the operation on the panel You can select either display or hide mode by tapping the relevant tab on the action panel ...

Page 125: ...ctions readily under the same conditions as for the latest operations Set up frequently used functions and tap the Register This Function in Favourite key on the action panel Tap the key to view a list of the functions with the setting conditions maintained Subsequently you can use the familiar settings simply by tapping this key On the base screen in each mode tap the to check the settings for co...

Page 126: ...ddress book For a contact more than one address can be stored including fax e mail Internet fax and direct SMTP addresses Registering addresses stored as Contacts as well as directly entered addresses as Group enables you to easily send messages to multiple destinations simply by specifying a group Up to 2000 entries in all can be stored for Contacts and Group The address book can store up to 6000...

Page 127: ...k tap the Address Book key on the base screen in image send mode such as fax e mail or Internet fax You can also display it by tapping the Address Book icon on the Home screen Contacts and Group registered are enabled for alphabetical search and selected condition based advanced search When the Address Book key is tapped on the e mail base screen groups and contacts having e mail addresses are dis...

Page 128: ...acts and Group for the selected job appear on a list that Contacts or Group is displayed If more than one address is stored you can select the address you want to use by checking detailed information Narrowing by category Narrowing by job type Narrowing by index Search by alphabet to narrow down addresses For example tap A on the index bar to display Contacts stored with search text starting with ...

Page 129: ...OPERATION GUIDE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 072 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 52 PM Index Contents ...

Page 130: ...ontacts either by directly entering names and addresses or by using global address search results Global address search requires an LDAP server In the address book you can also register addresses entered via fax or image send operations STORING ADDRESSES FROM FAX OR IMAGE SEND LOGS Direct entry Storing global address search results Direct entry 6 steps in all In the address book screen tap the Reg...

Page 131: ...ne from a category list that appears when the entry box is tapped If user authentication is enabled the tab for address publication setting appears Setting address publication enables stored Contacts and Group to be shared within a specified group or stored as personal contacts that only you are allowed to access SETTING THE SCOPE FOR PUBLICIZING CONTACTS AND GROUPS Tap the Enter Address Directly ...

Page 132: ...ld to enter the search condition and then tap the Start Search key To change the search target tap for Item You can select Name or Address Number To register a category name In Setting mode select Address Book Category Settings If user authentication is enabled the tab for address publication setting appears Setting address publication enables stored Contacts and Group to be shared within a specif...

Page 133: ...73 htm 24 03 2011 2 56 53 PM Index Contents Select one address from the search result list and tap the Enter key on the action panel To check address information select the address and tap the Confirm Address Information key on the action panel Check to see that the selected address is displayed and then tap the Register Address Below key ...

Page 134: ...nter Address Directly key on the action panel On the contact list tap the Register Group by selecting addresses from those already stored as Contacts In this case of registration only reference to addresses already stored takes place and so the total number of registered addresses maximum 6000 in the address book does not increase You can also directly enter a new address for a Group 6 steps in al...

Page 135: ...ng the address to be registered and then tap the Display Details key on the action panel If you have selected more than one address tap the Show Details of Address Selected Next key on the action panel Tap the address to be registered in the Group and then tap the OK key You can select more than one address The selection is cleared and the screen closes if you tap the before tapping the OK key ...

Page 136: ...al contacts that only you are allowed to access If no publicity scope is specified stored Contacts and Group are publicized to all users User authentication is required to set the scope for publicizing Contacts and Group Scope for publicizing addresses Description Publicized to all Contacts and Group are published to all users of the machine User Contacts and Group are published only to the user R...

Page 137: ...n screen tap the Address Public Setting tab and then tap the Designate Public Address key Check that the User List is checked and your user name is selected After the settings are completed tap If you have logged in as the administrator select any user name desired from the user list To register a user In Setting mode select User Control User List Register User Limiting the scope to the specified ...

Page 138: ...NTACTS AND GROUPS file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01 075b htm 24 03 2011 2 56 55 PM Index Contents Overview To register a user group In Setting mode select User Control User Group List ...

Page 139: ...you can add addresses STORING CONTACTS STORING GROUPS You can edit or delete Contacts or Group information stored in the address book as well as addresses listed under Contacts and Group Editing deleting contacts and groups Editing deleting addresses Editing deleting contacts and groups 3 steps in all In the address book screen tap the Register Edit Address key on the action panel or tap the Regis...

Page 140: ...he action panel Only one contact or group can be selected If more than one is selected the Edit key does not appear Tap the Registered Address Review key on the action panel Select an address from the list of registered addresses and tap the Edit key on the action panel To delete an address tap the Delete The address type cannot be changed Editing deleting addresses 5 steps in all In the address b...

Page 141: ...ts key on the action panel To edit or delete you can only select one address at a time To check address information tap the Confirm Registered Information key Edit an address After editing tap the Enter and Return key on the action panel You cannot edit or delete an address for a job in a job queue You can only edit addresses in the network folder on the edit screen The Add New screen cannot be di...

Page 142: ...n the action panel If more than one send log is selected or a log for broadcasting to multiple addresses is selected the New Add in Address Book key does not appear As a new registration add an address you have entered via fax or image send operations to the address book 3 steps in all In fax or image send mode tap the Select among addresses recently sent to key on the action panel Set basic infor...

Page 143: ...L LOADING PAPER The following provides information you should know before loading paper LOADING PAPER INTO A TRAY LOADING PAPER INTO A LARGE CAPACITY TRAY Use the large capacity tray for outputting massive prints that cannot be processed using the regular tray with a maximum capacity of 500 sheets Up to 3500 sheets can be stored LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY Use the bypass tray for printing o...

Page 144: ...mx3610_ex_ope contents 01b htm 24 03 2011 2 56 58 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N Index ADDRESS BOOK ADDRESS BOOK Register fax e mail and Internet fax addresses in the address book beforehand so that you can easily retrieve them in fax or image send mode NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYS ...

Page 145: ...T OFF TIMER This mode turns off the power to the operation panel and the fusing unit and makes the machine wait in the lowest power consumption state Compared to preheat mode considerably more power is saved but the wakeup time is longer AS SOON AS THE REMOTE JOB IS FINISHED ENTER AUTO POWER SHUT OFF MODE Printing in Auto Power Shut Off Timer turns on the power and then the machine returns to Auto...

Page 146: ...N Index CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT OVERVIEW OF CLEANING CLEANING OF THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER CLEANING THE MAIN CHARGER OF THE PHOTOCONDUCTIVE DRUM CLEANING THE PT CHARGER OF THE FIRST TRANSFER BELT CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER CLEANING THE ORIGINAL FEED ROLLER CLEANING THE LASER UNIT REPLACEMENT OF TONER CARTRIDGE REPLACING THE WASTE TONER BOX REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE...

Page 147: ...dex APPENDIX HOW TO USE THE OPERATION GUIDE BUILT IN OPERATION GUIDE PC DOWNLOAD WHEN REQUESTING MAINTENANCE SERVICES IF YOUR ADDRESS CHANGES MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SERVICE SYSTEM MINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF PERFORMANCE PARTS FOR REPAIR PURPOSES MINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF SUPPLIES We will retain supplies of this product for seven 7 years after it has been discontinued LICENCE INFORMATION ...

Page 148: ...REEN file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 01f htm 24 03 2011 2 57 03 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N Index HOME SCREEN AND PREVIEW SCREEN HOME SCREEN PREVIEW SCREEN ...

Page 149: ...ATUS SCREENS Jobs are listed by status being spooled in progress reserved or completed STOPPING DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS A job is a discrete unit of action such as copy fax and image send This section explains how to stop a job and how to perform priority processing ...

Page 150: ...ING This section explains how to manually change the paper tray to be used COPYING This section explains the basic procedure for copying 2 SIDED COPY This section explains how to make a 2 sided copy of 1 sided originals using the automatic document feeder or document glass INTERRUPT COPY This function suspends a job in progress and preferentially prints the original specified with interrupt copy S...

Page 151: ...e frequently MAKING COPIES USING BYPASS TRAY This section explains how to make a copy on plain paper transparency films postcards envelopes tab paper and other special media using the bypass tray OUTPUT This section explains the easy and helpful functions such as sort and staple which can be combined with standard copy functions BATCH COPY FUNCTIONS This section explains 2in1 Dual Page Copy Card S...

Page 152: ... and Resolution features TEXT AND IMAGE ADDITION FUNCTIONS This section explains the Stamp and Custom Image features FUNCTIONS TO ADD A COVER AND AN INSERTION SHEET This section explains the Covers Inserts Page Layout and Transparency Inserts features SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS This section explains the Tab Copy Multi Page Enlargement and Mirror Image features OUTPUT COLOUR AND DENSITY ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION...

Page 153: ...X2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 001 htm 24 03 2011 2 57 06 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N BASE SCREEN OF COPY MODE Index Contents COPYING The displayed contents of the above screen will vary depending on the devices installed ...

Page 154: ... ORIGINAL DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND STATUS OF THE ORIGINAL Tap the Preview key to scan the original To make 2 sided copies configure the 2 sided copy settings before scanning the original When not checking the preview image tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying Display the preview image of the scanned original in the preview screen check the settings such as colour 2 sided copy or...

Page 155: ...copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies To cancel all settings tap the CA key When the CA key is tapped all settings selected to that point are cleared and you will return to the base screen To cancel copying Tap the STOP key Before starting copying tap the File key or Quick File key on the...

Page 156: ...u can check the status of the scanned image in the preview screen While viewing the preview screen you can adjust the exposure or colour and configure the preview in your image COPY COLOUR MODES MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE If you configure the preview you can check the status of the configured preview such as the staple position or page layout You can also drag the preview imag...

Page 157: ...List of original size detector settings Selections Standard sizes detected original sizes Document Glass Document feeder tray automatic document feeder AB 1 A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B5R A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B5R 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 14 11 x 17 AB 2 A3 A4 A4R A5 B5 B5R 216 mm x 330 mm 8 1 2 x 13 A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B5R 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 13 216 mm x 330 mm AB 3 A4 A4R A5 B4 8K 16K 16KR A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 ...

Page 158: ...the vertical and horizontal orientations is set horizontally Even when Original is set to Auto some original sizes may be detected as other one that is near the standard size In this case manually set the original size SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE When placing a non standard size original on the document glass you can make it easier for the size to be detected by placing a blank sheet of A4 8 1 2 ...

Page 159: ...on 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 004 htm 24 03 2011 2 57 08 PM Index Contents Setting The rotation copy function is available in the automatic paper selection or automatic ratio selection mode or when the original or paper size is the same while the orientation is different ...

Page 160: ...ay key SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING You can also call the Paper Select screen by tapping the machine image on the base screen Tap the Type and Size key and tap the key that meets the type of the loaded paper Auto AB key Automatically detects the appropriate AB paper size when loading paper such as A4 or B5 Auto Inch key Automatically detects the appropriate inch paper size when loading pap...

Page 161: ..._3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 005 01 htm 24 03 2011 2 57 09 PM Index Contents To directly enter a paper size Tap the AB key to set it in millimeters or tap the Inch key to set a paper size in inches After you have entered the paper size using the key tap the OK key ...

Page 162: ...er as the size of the placed original automatic paper tray selection If the original size cannot be detected correctly because it is a non standard size or when you want to change the paper size for copying you can select the paper tray manually If the selected tray runs out of paper during a copy job and there is another tray that has the same size and type of paper that tray will be automaticall...

Page 163: ...PYING Index Contents Overview COPYING 1 step in all Tap the Paper Select key and tap the required tray key When selecting the bypass tray Specify the paper type and size based on the paper loaded into the bypass tray SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY You can also call the Paper Select screen by tapping the machine image on the base screen After the settings are completed ta...

Page 164: ...er Select key SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING To change the colour mode tap the Colour Mode key COPY COLOUR MODES Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder and tap the Preview key AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Depending on the size of the placed original there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not selected automatically In this even...

Page 165: ...OPERATION GUIDE USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR COPYING file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 006 htm 24 03 2011 2 57 11 PM ...

Page 166: ...p the Paper Select key SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING To change the colour mode tap the Colour Mode key COPY COLOUR MODES Place the original on the document glass and tap the Preview key DOCUMENT GLASS Set the next original and tap the Additionally Scan key to scan the original Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When ...

Page 167: ...OPERATION GUIDE USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR COPYING file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 007 htm 24 03 2011 2 57 12 PM Index Contents ...

Page 168: ...ion 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 008a htm 24 03 2011 2 57 12 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR 2 SIDED COPYING Index Contents Operation COPYING To make 2 sided copies configure the 2 sided copy settings before scanning the original Dual side copy helps to save paper ...

Page 169: ...ed copy settings before scanning the original After the settings are completed tap Make sure that the desired paper tray and colour mode are selected To change the paper tray tap the Paper Select key SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING To change the colour mode tap the Colour Mode key COPY COLOUR MODES To make 2 sided copies of a 1 sided portrait original placed horizontally or to invert the reve...

Page 170: ...Overview Depending on the size of the placed original there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not selected automatically In this event change the paper size manually Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to spec...

Page 171: ..._0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 009a htm 24 03 2011 2 57 14 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR 2 SIDED COPYING Index Contents Operation COPYING Dual side copy helps to save paper To change the default 2 sided copy mode In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Initial Status Settings 2 Sided Copy ...

Page 172: ...fter the settings are completed tap Make sure that the desired paper tray and colour mode are selected To change the paper tray tap the Paper Select key SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING To change the colour mode tap the Colour Mode key Place the original on the document glass and tap the Preview key DOCUMENT GLASS The 2 Side to 2 Side key and 2 Side to 1 Side key cannot be used when copying fr...

Page 173: ...COLOUR MODES Depending on the size of the placed original there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not selected automatically In this event change the paper size manually Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to ...

Page 174: ... original Select the colour mode from Auto Full Colour Black White 2 Colour and Single Colour If any colour mode is selected copying takes place in black and white when you tap the B W Start key To change the default colour mode In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Initial Status Settings Colour Mode To change the standard to detect Black White and Colour In Setting mode select Sys...

Page 175: ...ur or black white and switches the mode appropriately full colour for a colour original or black white for a black white original 2 steps in all Tap the Colour Mode key Tap the Auto key After the settings are completed tap Check that the specified colour mode is selected When auto mode is used there may be some originals for which switching between colour and black white does not take place correc...

Page 176: ...cify the extract colour Except Black Extracts black parts in an original and changes non black parts to the specified colour Reddish Colour Extracts reddish parts in an original and changes them to the specified colour 2 steps in all Tap the Colour Mode key Tap the B W key After the settings are completed tap Check that the specified colour mode is selected Copying in two colours The original is c...

Page 177: ...ur screen and check that the changed setting is displayed at the side of Single Colour key on the colour mode screen After you have checked it tap on the Colour Mode screen Specify the colour to change the extracted colour to After the settings are completed tap the key on the 2 Colour screen and check that the changed setting is displayed at the side of 2 Colour key on the colour mode screen Afte...

Page 178: ...default to automatically adjust the exposure level and original type as appropriate for the original being copied Auto is displayed This function automatically adjusts the image during black white copying and full colour copying to obtain the most suitable copy To change the default exposure In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Initial Status Settings Exposure Type To adjust the ex...

Page 179: ...he original type depending on the original to be copied or manually adjust the exposure If the image seems too light or too dark when Auto is selected select System Settings in Setting mode Copy Settings Copy Setting Copy Exposure Adjustment to change the exposure To change the default exposure In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Initial Status Settings Exposure Type To adjust the...

Page 180: ...d photographs such as a magazine or catalogue Text Photo This mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and photographs such as a text document with a photo pasted on Printed Photo This mode is best for copying printed photographs such as photos in a magazine or catalogue Photo Use this mode to copy photos Map This mode is best for copying the light colour sha...

Page 181: ...djustment tap Tap the Colour Tone Enhancement checkbox so that appears Set the Colour Tone Enhancement when you select an original type Copy of Copy and Colour Tone Enhancement cannot be specified together Copy of Copy and Colour Tone Enhancement cannot be combined with Intensity in Others Guidelines for the exposure level when Text is selected for Original Image Type 1 to 2 Dark originals such as...

Page 182: ...ents Operation COPYING This section explains how to automatically select the appropriate ratio to meet the paper size when manually changing the paper tray to make a copy on paper that has a size different from the original For a non standard size original the size must be entered in order to use Auto Magnification Selection To change the default ratio In Setting mode select System Settings Copy S...

Page 183: ...ected based on the original size and the selected paper size The automatically selected ratio will appear in the ratio display Manually select the paper tray and place the original Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS To cancel the Auto Ratio Selection s...

Page 184: ...o when making a copy on paper that has a size different from the original or changing the image size for copying The following three methods can be used to specify the ratio Using the preset ratio key Specify any ratio by combination of preset ratio key for which the enlargement and reduction ratio values are pre registered between the frequently used standard sizes with the zoom key which allows ...

Page 185: ...G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 014a htm 24 03 2011 2 57 20 PM Index Contents Operation Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios To select the added preset ratio tap the Other Ratio key ...

Page 186: ...ying the paper size Specifying the image dimensions Using the preset ratio key 2 steps in all Tap the Copy Ratio key There are two setting screens Use the Other Ratio key to switch between the screens To quickly set the area first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys then adjust it with Up to two frequently used ratio values can be added to the preset ratio key respective...

Page 187: ... key of the Zoom tab Specify the original size paper size of the loaded original and the copy size paper size of the output result After the settings are completed tap In the preview screen check whether or not settings produce the required results Tap the by Size key of the Zoom tab To cancel all settings Tap the CA key Specifying the image dimensions 3 steps in all Tap the Copy Ratio key ...

Page 188: ...age to be enlarged or reduced and the output size dimensions of the enlarged and reduced image and then tap the OK key Tap the area of image size and output size and enter the sizes using the numeric keys After the settings are completed tap In the preview screen check whether or not settings produce the required results If you have entered an incorrect size Tap the C key and then enter the correc...

Page 189: ...zontal ratio and 70 is selected for the vertical ratio The following two methods can be used to specify the ratio Using the preset ratio key Specify any ratio by combination of preset ratio key which is pre registered with the zoom key which allows you to adjust the ratio in 1 units Specifying the image dimensions Specify the image sizes of the original and output to automatically obtain the appro...

Page 190: ...ose to the desired one then adjust it with Tap each area of the X horizontal and Y vertical directions and enter the sizes using the numeric keys Using the preset ratio key Specifying the image dimensions Using the preset ratio key 3 steps in all Tap the Copy Ratio key and then tap the XY Zoom key Tap the Y key and set the Y vertical ratio in the same way as the X key After the settings are comple...

Page 191: ...ts Overview Specify the X and Y dimensions of the image size and those of the output size and then tap the OK key Tap the area of image size and output size and enter the sizes using the numeric keys Check that a paper size suitable for the ratio is selected After the settings are completed tap If you have entered an incorrect size Tap the C key and then enter the correct size To cancel all settin...

Page 192: ...OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 017a htm 24 03 2011 2 57 22 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE Index Contents Operation COPYING When the original size is a non standard size or is not detected correctly manually specify the original size Set an original size before scanning the original ...

Page 193: ...SIZE COPYING Tap the AB tab Tap the appropriate original size key After the settings are completed tap Tap the Inch tab Tap the appropriate original size key After the settings are completed tap Specifying an AB original size Specifying an inch original size Specifying a non standard original size Specifying an AB original size 3 steps in all Tap the Original key Specifying an inch original size 3...

Page 194: ...Direct Entry tab Specify the original size Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively and enter the sizes using the numeric keys It is convenient to use to finely adjust the entered size Specifying a non standard original size 4 steps in all Tap the Original key Tap the OK key On the base screen check that the specified size is displayed on the Original key After the settings are...

Page 195: ... 57 24 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES Index Contents Operation COPYING Store the frequently used non standard original sizes This section explains how to store retrieve change and delete non standard original sizes The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off Up to 12 non standard original sizes can be stored ...

Page 196: ...UENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES COPYING Tap the Custom Size tab Tap the Store Delete key Tap a key for storing a custom original size Tap a key that does not show a size Storing original sizes editing clearing Retrieving a stored original size Storing original sizes editing clearing 6 steps in all Tap the Original key To edit or clear a previously stored key Tap the key that you want to edit or clear T...

Page 197: ...e original size that you wish to retrieve After selecting the key of the original size tap the key On the base screen check that the specified size is displayed on the Original key To edit the key tap the Amend key and go to the next step To clear the key tap the Delete key Make sure that the original size has been cleared and tap the key Tap the OK key After the settings are completed tap the key...

Page 198: ...EQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 018b htm 24 03 2011 2 57 24 PM Index Contents Overview To cancel the operation Tap the CA key ...

Page 199: ...ndex Contents Operation COPYING This section explains how to select the sorting method when outputting the scanned original Auto Enables the sort mode when the original is placed in the automatic document feeder and enables the group mode when the original is placed on the document glass Sort Sorts the scanned original on a set basis and outputs them Group Groups the scanned original on a page bas...

Page 200: ...w COPYING 2 steps in all Tap the Sort Group key If an inner finisher or saddle finisher is installed tap the Sort Group key in Others Select the sorting method After the settings are completed tap Selecting the Offset check box outputs the sorted paper sheets while shifting them set by set to enable the user to easily remove each set from the output tray To change the output tray tap the Output Tr...

Page 201: ... MX 3610N MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY Index Contents Operation COPYING In addition to plain paper the bypass tray allows you to make copies on transparency film envelopes tab paper and other special media For detailed information on paper that can be loaded into the bypass tray see APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES For precautions on loading paper into the bypass tray see LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPAS...

Page 202: ...e bypass tray LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY Tap the Paper Select key and tap the bypass tray key Each tray key displays the size and type of the loaded paper SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Tap the Col...

Page 203: ...TION GUIDE MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 021b htm 24 03 2011 2 57 27 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 204: ...sing the Margin Shift This function shifts the copy image right left or down to adjust the margin This is convenient when you wish to bind the copies with a string or in a binder Shifting the image to the right so the copies can be bound at the left edge Staple positions Rotation copy cannot be used in combination with the margin shift function To change the default margin shift setting In Setting...

Page 205: ...ea using the numeric keys To quickly set the area first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys then adjust it with If you set the Adjust 2nd pg value to 1st checkbox to goes out and you can set sides 1 and 2 separately Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC...

Page 206: ...w Tap the CA key Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results To cancel all settings Tap the CA key Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies ...

Page 207: ...h will change according to the selected ratio This function erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows When a thick book is copied Erase modes If a ratio setting is used in combination with an erase setting the erase width will change according to the selected ratio If the erase width setting is 20 mm 1 and the image is reduced t...

Page 208: ..._3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 024a htm 24 03 2011 2 57 29 PM Index Contents Operation changed setting is also applied to the Setting mode selection of System Settings Image Send Settings Operation Settings Default Settings Erase Width Adjustment ...

Page 209: ...he Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Tap the Others key and tap the Erase key Specify the erase edge on the reverse side when erasing edges of one to three sides of Up Down Left and Right on the front side to scan a 2 sided original If the Reverse erase position of back face ...

Page 210: ...ys then adjust it with After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence To cancel the erase setting Tap the Clear key Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results To cancel all settings Tap the CA key Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the numb...

Page 211: ...page copy Index Contents Operation COPYING This function copies the left and right half of an original successively This function is useful when making copies of the facing pages of a book or other bound document Copying the facing pages of a book or bound document Specify dual page copy before scanning the original To erase shadows caused by the binding of a book or other bound document use the e...

Page 212: ...l with the appropriate size mark DOCUMENT GLASS Tap the Others key and tap the Dual Page Copy key A checkmark appears on the icon After the settings are completed tap the Back key To cancel dual page copy Tap the Dual Page Copy key to clear the checkmark Selects A4 8 1 2 x 11 size paper SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings...

Page 213: ...MENT file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 025b htm 24 03 2011 2 57 31 PM Index Contents Overview To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies ...

Page 214: ...sided copying mode is automatically selected When settings are selected that prevent 2 sided copying the pamphlet copy function cannot be used Scan the originals in order from the first page to the last page The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by the machine Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper Blank pages will be automatically produced at the end of pamphlet...

Page 215: ...6a htm 24 03 2011 2 57 32 PM Index Contents Operation This is used to activate Saddle Stitch automatically when Pamphlet Copy is enabled when a saddle finisher is installed To make pamphlet copies without stapling when the Automatic Saddle Stitch option is ON tap the Staple Sort key Then select Pamphlet Copy and tap the OFF key on the saddle stitch screen ...

Page 216: ...e original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS If the originals are 2 sided place them in the document feeder tray Tap the Others key and tap the Pamphlet Copy key When inserting a cover tap the Cover Setting key and tap the On key To change the cover input tray Tap...

Page 217: ...tings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results To cancel all settings Tap the CA key Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to spec...

Page 218: ...opy paper This function is convenient for arranging minimum number of copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet format The following paper sizes and number of sheets are available for pamphlet copy 2in1 or 4in1 Paper size A3 B4 A4R 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 R 8K 16KR Number of stapled sheets Max 15 sheets Scan the originals in order from the first page to the last page The order of copying...

Page 219: ... cover go to step 6 Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS If the originals are 2 sided place them in the document feeder tray Tap the Others key and tap the Pamphlet Copy key When inserting a cover tap the Cover Setting key and tap the On key To cha...

Page 220: ...can be inserted between pages arranged on a sheet After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence If the cover will be copied on label sheets transparency film and tab paper cannot be used Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results To cancel all settings Tap the CA key Tap the Multi Shot key on the action panel Check the ...

Page 221: ..._3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 027b htm 24 03 2011 2 57 34 PM Index Contents Overview When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies ...

Page 222: ...wish to sort copies of a large number of originals into multiple sets Because all originals are copied as a single job you are saved the trouble of sorting the copies that would be required if the originals were divided into separate copy jobs When scanning originals in sets divide the sheets so that no set has more than the number of paper that can be loaded and then scan from the set with the fi...

Page 223: ... Originals can be stacked up to the indicator line AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Copying in job build mode Changing the copy settings for each set of originals Copying in job build mode 6 steps in all Tap the Others key and tap the Job Build key A checkmark appears on the icon To cancel the job build mode Tap the Off key to uncheck it After the settings are completed tap the Back key Change copy setti...

Page 224: ...int Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies You cannot set a number of copies for each set Changing the copy settings for each set of originals As necessary change copy settings for each set of originals Perform the steps below before s...

Page 225: ...ted to the network this function can only be used to have one other machine share a job To use Tandem Copy select Tandem Connection Setting in Setting mode To configure the tandem connection setting register IP address information of the slave machine in the master machine For the port number it is best to use the initial setting 50001 Unless you experience difficulty with this setting do not chan...

Page 226: ...aper If either the master machine or the slave machine run out of paper the machine that ran out of paper will hold the job while the machine that still has paper continues the job When paper is added to the machine that ran out the job resumes If user authentication is specified Tandem Copy is enabled when user authentication is specified in the master machine Tandem Copy is disabled when user au...

Page 227: ...dd the master machine makes more copies than the slave machine Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages change the original and tap the Additionally Scan key AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Tap the Others key and tap the T...

Page 228: ...29b htm 24 03 2011 2 57 37 PM Index Contents Overview Check whether or not settings produce the required results To cancel all settings Tap the CA key Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel Tandem Copy Tap the STOP keys on both the master and slave machines ...

Page 229: ...of 1 sided originals 1 sided copying of 2 sided originals 2 sided copying of 2 sided originals This function inserts a different type of paper into the pages corresponding to the front and back covers of a copy job It is helpful when you want to change cover paper to make resources look better Configure insertion sheet settings if needed When inserting insertion sheets see INSERTING INSERTION SHEE...

Page 230: ...cover at the beginning of copies and makes a 2 sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover 1 sided copy 1 sided copy Makes a 1 sided copy on the first original page for front cover and also makes a 1 sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover 1 sided copy 2 SIDED COPY Makes a 1 sided copy on the first original page for front cover and also makes a 2 sided copy on the ...

Page 231: ... cover at the end of copies Not copied 1 sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies and makes a 1 sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover A 1 sided copy is made on the fifth original page Not copied 2 SIDED COPY Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies and makes a 2 sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover 1 sided copy 1 sided copy Makes...

Page 232: ...er sheets at the beginning and end of copies 1 sided copy Not copied Makes a 1 sided copy on the first original page for front cover and inserts a back cover at the end of copies 2 SIDED COPY Not copied Makes a 2 sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover and inserts a back cover at the end of copies Not copied 1 sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies an...

Page 233: ...t cover and also makes a 2 sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover 2 sided copying of 2 sided originals Setting conditions for each cover Resulting copies Front cover Back cover Not copied Not copied Inserts cover sheets at the beginning and end of copies 1 sided copy Not copied Makes a 1 sided copy on the first original page for front cover and inserts a back cover at the ...

Page 234: ...ont cover and also makes a 1 sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover The fifth original page is not copied 2 SIDED COPY 2 SIDED COPY Makes a 2 sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover and also makes a 2 sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover Before using the covers inserts function load insertion sheets in the tray When selecting the c...

Page 235: ...PERATION GUIDE INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 030a htm 24 03 2011 2 57 38 PM Index Contents Operation ...

Page 236: ...then tap the On key Tap the Change key and configure copy setting of a front cover sheet When only inserting a cover tap the Do not copy key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder and tap the Preview key AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Tap the Others key and then tap the Covers Inserts key To change the cover input tray Tap the Paper Tray Settings key to display ...

Page 237: ... tab paper can be inserted After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence To cancel cover sheet insertion Tap the Off key Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results To cancel all settings Tap the CA key Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify th...

Page 238: ...w Copy modes 1 sided original copying 2 sided original copying This function inserts a sheet of paper into a specific page as an insertion sheet There are two types of insertion sheets Insertion positions can be specified Insert covers if needed When inserting covers see INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES Example Insert A after page 3 and insert B after page 5 Sheet inserting examples 1 sided original cop...

Page 239: ...ed copy of the third and fourth original pages on an insertion sheet Before using the covers inserts function load insertion sheets in the tray When selecting the covers inserts function place the originals in the document feeder tray select 1 sided or 2 sided copying and select the number of copies and any other desired copy settings When these settings have been completed perform the procedure t...

Page 240: ...ION GUIDE INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 031a htm 24 03 2011 2 57 40 PM Index Contents Operation ...

Page 241: ...Type B settings are the same as the Insertion Type A settings When only inserting insertion sheet A tap the Make No Copy key When making a copy on insertion sheet A tap the Simplex or 2 Sided Copy key To change an insertion sheet Tap the Paper Tray key and select the tray with insertion sheets loaded Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder and tap the Previe...

Page 242: ... or tab paper for insertion If not copied on tab paper can be inserted After the settings are completed tap If you have entered an incorrect insert page number Tap the Page Layout key and change the page CHECKING EDITING AND DELETING THE PAGE LAYOUT OF COVERS AND INSERTION SHEETS After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence To cancel inserting insertion sheets Tap the CA key Chec...

Page 243: ... file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 031b htm 24 03 2011 2 57 41 PM Index Contents Overview To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies ...

Page 244: ...n sheets are not configured the Page Layout key is disabled Check the page layout To exit this job after checking the page layout tap the key To edit or delete tap the required key When deleting tap the Delete key When editing tap the Amend key The editing contents are different between the registered covers and insertion sheets as shown below For the cover you can change settings such as the pape...

Page 245: ...0N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 032 htm 24 03 2011 2 57 41 PM Index Contents For the cover you can change the copy mode You can change the page number you want to insert an insert sheet into After the settings are completed tap the key multiple times to return to the Others screen Then tap the Back key ...

Page 246: ...ts Index Contents Operation COPYING When copying on transparency film the sheets may stick together due to static electricity The transparency inserts function can be used to automatically insert a sheet of paper between each sheet of transparency film making the sheets easy to handle It is also possible to copy on insertion sheets When performing 2 sided copying only 2 side to 1 side mode can be ...

Page 247: ...transparency film sheets After loading the transparency film configure the bypass tray settings MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY Tap the On key When making a copy on insertion sheets tap the Also Make Copy on Inserts checkbox to set to After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence To cancel the transparency inserts setting Tap the Off key Place the original and tap the Preview ...

Page 248: ...43 PM Index Contents Overview Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results To cancel all settings Tap the CA key Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of co...

Page 249: ...pying This function copies multiple original pages onto a single sheet of paper in a uniform layout Select 2in1 to copy two original pages onto one sheet 4in1 to copy four original pages onto one sheet or 8in1 to copy eight original pages onto one sheet This function is convenient when you wish to present multiple pages in a compact format or show a view of all pages in a document When inserting a...

Page 250: ...A line can be inserted between pages arranged on a sheet After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages change the original and tap t...

Page 251: ...0_ex_ope contents 02 034b htm 24 03 2011 2 57 44 PM Index Contents Overview To cancel all settings Tap the CA key Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies ...

Page 252: ...ooklet This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet How to place the original Book Copy must be specified before scanning the original Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper Blank pages will be automatically added at the end if the total number of original pages is not a multiple of four This function can be combined with saddle stitc...

Page 253: ... Then go to step 5 To cancel book copy Tap the Off key When inserting a cover tap the Cover Setting key and tap the On key To make a copy on the inserted cover sheet check the Make Copy on Cover Duplex box so that appears Tap the Others key and tap the Book Copy key To change the cover input tray Tap the Paper Tray key to display the tray selection screen Tap the cover input tray on the tray selec...

Page 254: ...s have been scanned Scan the remaining original pages in the following order 1 Inside of the front cover and the 1st page facing pages 2 Inside of the 2nd and 3rd pages facing pages 3 4 Inside of the last page and back cover facing pages Copy settings cannot be changed when scanning additional pages Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required re...

Page 255: ...0N MX 3110N MX 3610N COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER Tab copy COPYING Load a tab sheet in the bypass tray and make a copy on a tab Prepare appropriate originals for tab captions Relation between the originals and the tab paper Tab copying with a left binding Originals Placing the originals Loading tab paper Tab copying with a right binding Originals Placing the originals Loading tab paper ...

Page 256: ...m 24 03 2011 2 57 46 PM Index Contents Operation Tab Copy must be specified before scanning the original To change the default image shift width for tab copying In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Copy Setting Initial Tab Copy Setting The default image shift width can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm 0 to 5 8 The factory default setting is 10 mm 1 2 ...

Page 257: ...To quickly set the area first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys then adjust it with Load the tab paper When using the bypass tray place the paper with the print side down Place the paper so that the sides with the tabs enter the machine last After loading tab paper into the bypass tray configure the bypass tray settings as explained in MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TR...

Page 258: ...in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results To cancel all settings Tap the CA key Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of...

Page 259: ...610N COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE Card shot Index Contents Operation COPYING This function copies the front and reverse sides of a card on one sheet not on separate sheets This function is convenient for making copies for identification purposes and helps save paper To change the default original size during Card Shot In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Copy Setti...

Page 260: ...ly and enter the sizes using the numeric keys To quickly set the size first specify a value close to the desired ratio value by the numeric keys then adjust it by tapping Place a card face down on the document glass and Select the paper to be used for card shot Set a paper by referring to the SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING Tap the Others key and tap the Card Shot key After the settings are c...

Page 261: ...ment glass and tap the Additionally Scan key to scan the reverse side Copy settings cannot be changed when scanning additional pages Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results To cancel all settings Tap the CA key Tap the Read End key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To ...

Page 262: ...p content of one position overlaps the stamp content of another position priority will be given in the following order watermark right side left side centre Content that is hidden due to overlapping will not be printed Text will be printed at the preset size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size setting Text will be printed at the preset exposure regardless of the exposure setting Depending o...

Page 263: ...3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 038a htm 24 03 2011 2 57 49 PM Index Contents Operation Book Copy Stamp items are printed for each page when compiling Covers Inserts Use the stamp settings to select whether or not the item is printed on inserted covers and inserts ...

Page 264: ...ft keyboard Setting using the Text tab When you tap the tab the display tab is switched Tap a key of the desired print position Tap any of 1 to 6 keys Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Tap the Others key and tap the Stamp key Tapping the Detail ...

Page 265: ... formats for printing Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results To cancel all settings Tap the CA key Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies If ...

Page 266: ...ts Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 038b htm 24 03 2011 2 57 50 PM Index Contents Overview Tapping the Store Delete key allows you to edit delete or store pre set text To edit or store pre set text use the soft keyboard ...

Page 267: ...riginal image on multiple sheets Multi Page Enlargement must be specified before scanning the original Place an original on the document glass Overlap of sections of image There will be a margin around the edges of each copy Areas for overlapping the copies will be created at the leading and trailing edges of each copy The paper size number of sheets required for the enlarged image and the ratio a...

Page 268: ...how the available enlargement size copy paper size and number of sheets Tap the key of the size you want to enlarge the original to The original orientation appears After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence Tap the Others key and tap the Multi Page Enlargement key When printing the copy image and margin border set the Print Paste Position Mark checkbox to To cancel the multi p...

Page 269: ...he document glass based on the orientation displayed on the screen and tap the Preview key Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to s...

Page 270: ...nual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 047a htm 24 03 2011 2 57 52 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N COPYING WITH MIRROR IMAGE Mirror image Index Contents Operation COPYING This function makes copies by inverting the original into a mirror image Specify the Mirror Image before scanning an original ...

Page 271: ...ck key To cancel the mirror image setting Tap the Mirror Image key to clear the checkmark Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results Tap the Colour S...

Page 272: ... full bleed copy Index Contents Operation COPYING This feature lets you copy an entire A3 11 x 17 size original at full size with no image cut off at the edges A3W 12 x 18 size paper is used which is slightly larger than A3 11 x 17 size The A3 12 x 18 full bleed copy must be specified before scanning the original Place an original on the document glass The copy ratio is 100 when this function is u...

Page 273: ...er and place the paper on the bypass tray After loading A3W 12 x 18 paper into the bypass tray configure the bypass tray settings as explained in MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY Tap the Others key and tap the A3 12 x 18 full bleed copy key A checkmark appears on the icon After the settings are completed tap the Back key To cancel A3 12 x 18 full bleed copy setting Tap the A3 12 x 18 full bleed...

Page 274: ... MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 048b htm 24 03 2011 2 57 54 PM Index Contents Overview Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies ...

Page 275: ...Centring Index Contents Operation COPYING This function centres the copied image on the paper This lets you place the image in the centre of the paper when the original size is smaller than the paper size or when the image is reduced Not using the centring function Using the centring function Centring must be specified before scanning the original When the original size or the paper size is displa...

Page 276: ...cancel the centring setting Tap the Centring key to clear the checkmark Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results To cancel all settings Tap the CA ...

Page 277: ...OPERATION GUIDE COPYING IN THE CENTER OF THE PAPER file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 049b htm 24 03 2011 2 57 55 PM ...

Page 278: ...nction reverses black and white in a copy to create a negative image This function can only be used for black and white copying Originals with large black areas which use a large amount of toner can be copied using Black White Reverse to reduce toner consumption B W Reverse must be specified before scanning the original When this function is selected the Original Image Type setting for exposure ad...

Page 279: ... key To cancel B W reverse Tap the B W Reverse key to uncheck it Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results To cancel all settings Tap the CA key Tap...

Page 280: ...TION GUIDE REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPY file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 050b htm 24 03 2011 2 57 56 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 281: ...610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 051a htm 24 03 2011 2 57 57 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N ADJUSTING RED GREEN BLUE IN COPIES RGB Index Contents Operation COPYING This function heightens or lightens any one of the three colour components R red G green and B blue RGB must be specified before scanning the original ...

Page 282: ...mpleted tap and Back keys in sequence Only one colour can be adjusted If you adjust one colour and then adjust another colour the adjustment of the first colour is cancelled Tap the Others key and tap the RGB key To cancel the RGB adjust setting Tap the Cancel key Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the do...

Page 283: ...MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 051b htm 24 03 2011 2 57 58 PM Index Contents Overview Tap the Colour Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies ...

Page 284: ...anual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 052a htm 24 03 2011 2 57 58 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE Sharpness Index Contents Operation COPYING This function adjusts the sharpness to make a sharper or softer image Sharpness must be specified before scanning the original ...

Page 285: ...ap and Back keys in sequence To cancel the sharpness setting Tap the Off key Tap the Others key and tap the Sharpness key Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS To cancel all settings Tap the CA key Tap the Colour Start key to start copying When maki...

Page 286: ...TION GUIDE ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 052b htm 24 03 2011 2 57 59 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 287: ...Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 053a htm 24 03 2011 2 58 00 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N WHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN THE IMAGE Suppress background Index Contents Operation COPYING Suppresses light background areas of originals Suppress Background must be specified before scanning the original ...

Page 288: ...fter the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence Tap the Others key and tap the Suppress Background key Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the requir...

Page 289: ...LORS IN THE IMAGE file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 053b htm 24 03 2011 2 58 00 PM Index Contents Overview Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies ...

Page 290: ...his function divides each of colours yellow magenta cyan and black into eight gradations from light to dark and adjusts the average density of each gradation As necessary it collectively adjusts all eight gradations This function adjusts the colour tone and density Colour Balance must be specified before scanning the original To change the default colour balance setting In Setting mode select Syst...

Page 291: ...s tap the required slider and tap the key As necessary tap the tab of each colour and repeat this step Colour Balance Setting Tap the Others key and tap the Colour Balance key To return the current colour balance to the default Tap the Size Reset key To return all colour balances to defaults Tap the Cancel All key The values of all eight gradations will return to the default colour balance values ...

Page 292: ...P_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 054b htm 24 03 2011 2 58 02 PM Index Contents Overview Tap the Colour Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies ...

Page 293: ... 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 055a htm 24 03 2011 2 58 02 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OF A COPY Brightness Index Contents Operation COPYING This function adjusts the brightness of a colour copy image Brightness must be specified before scanning the original ...

Page 294: ...ghtness setting Tap the Off key Tap the Others key and tap the Brightness key Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results To cancel all settings Tap t...

Page 295: ...N GUIDE ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OF A COPY file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 055b htm 24 03 2011 2 58 03 PM Index Contents Overview copies ...

Page 296: ...02 056a htm 24 03 2011 2 58 04 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N ADJUSTING THE INTENSITY OF A COPY Intensity Index Contents Operation COPYING This function adjusts the intensity saturation of a colour copy image Intensity must be specified before scanning the original This function cannot be combined with Copy of Copy or Colour Tone Enhancement in Exposure ...

Page 297: ...nsity setting Tap the Off key Tap the Others key and tap the Intensity key Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results To cancel all settings Tap the ...

Page 298: ...ON GUIDE ADJUSTING THE INTENSITY OF A COPY file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 056b htm 24 03 2011 2 58 04 PM Index Contents Overview copies ...

Page 299: ...ing the original in the changed setting Proof copy flow Proof Copy must be specified before scanning the original If Proof Copy is executed while the machine is printing another job the job in progress is interrupted and a proof copy is printed preferentially The interrupted job will resume after proof copying has been completed However if proof copy is executed during printing of a job for which ...

Page 300: ...s are completed tap the Back key As necessary specify the required functions such as Exposure and Copy Ratio Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required resul...

Page 301: ...s found tap the End key As necessary change the settings and repeat proof copying until you are satisfied with the copy result You can also change the number of copies To change the number of copies use the numeric keys In Proof Copy unavailable function keys are not displayed Some available functions may be restricted Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings pro...

Page 302: ...d original sheets and displays the result before making a copy By allowing you to check the number of original sheets that were scanned this helps reduce the occurrence of copy mistakes The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets not the number of scanned original pages For example when 2 sided copying is performed using one original the number 1 will appear to indicat...

Page 303: ...ace the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder and tap the Preview key AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Check the number of original sheets The number that is displayed is the number of scanned original sheets not the number of scanned original pages For example when 2 sided copying is performed using one original the number 1 will appear to indicate that one original sheet...

Page 304: ... that size When mixed size original is combined with auto ratio selection the ratio is adjusted individually for each original according to the selected paper size enabling printing on a uniform paper size When mixed size original is combined with auto ratio selection Auto ratio selection and A3 11 x 17 are selected There are two settings for mixed size originals Same Width Different Width Use thi...

Page 305: ...x 8 1 2 Mexican legal 216 x 340 and Asian legal 216 x 343 A3 and B4 A3 and B5 B4 and A4 A4 and B5 B4 and A4R B4 and A5 B5 and A4R B5 and A5 11 x 17 and 8 1 2 x 14 11 x 17 and 8 1 2 x 13 11 x 17 and 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Mixed Size Original must be specified before scanning the original When Different Width is selected the staple function cannot be used The mixed size original function cannot be used to co...

Page 306: ...er the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence To cancel the mixed size original setting Tap the Off key Place the original face up on the document glass and tap the Preview key Place the original as shown on the Mixed Size Original screen Tap the Others key and tap the Mixed Size Original key For mixed size originals set Original to Auto Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start...

Page 307: ...ION GUIDE SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 059b htm 24 03 2011 2 58 08 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 308: ...tents Operation COPYING When you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder you can use this function which helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding Slow Scan Mode must be specified before scanning the original The 2 Side to 2 Side and 2 Side to 1 Side modes of automatic 2 sided copying cannot be used To always scan the original in the slow scan mode In Setting mode select...

Page 309: ...icon After the settings are completed tap the Back key To cancel slow scan mode Tap the Slow Scan Mode key to clear the checkmark Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder and tap the Preview key AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER If the originals are inserted with too much force they may crumple and misfeed Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When m...

Page 310: ...mp image is copied by sheet not by original If 2in1 4in1 is enabled user stamps are copied for each set of pages A custom stamp image is copied with the registered size The size remains unchanged even when the copy ratio is enlarged or reduced A different custom image cannot be specified for each page When you tap the B W Start key a monochrome copy is made even if you have selected a custom stamp...

Page 311: ...hift setting Card Shot Makes a stamp copy by sheet Mirror Image Makes a stamp copy as normal without mirror image reverse B W Reverse Prints an image as normal without B W reverse However the following condition is set when printed on a dark background Custom stamp Printed in white Custom watermark Printed without being whitened A3 Wide Paper Makes a stamp copy as normal Centring Makes a stamp cop...

Page 312: ...int Page or Original Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Tap the Others key and tap the Custom Image key For custom stamp Print Page Specify a page s for stamp copy First Page or All Pages Print Position Specify a position for stamp copy Originals...

Page 313: ... or All Pages Print Position Specify a position for stamp copy Originals ORIGINAL PLACEMENT ORIENTATION Specify the original orientation 2 Sided Original Type Specify the binding edge for 2 sided original Book or Tablet Angle Specify the corner of the image 0 degrees 90 degrees 90 degrees or 180 degrees After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence To cancel the Custom Image setti...

Page 314: ...ON GUIDE ADDING A REGISTERED IMAGE TO AN ORIGINAL file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 061b htm 24 03 2011 2 58 11 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 315: ...ose of deterring unauthorised copying It does not guarantee the prevention of information leakage Text may not be completely hidden on an output sheet with a pattern print under certain machine conditions In such a case adjust the contrast by selecting the Hidden Pattern Print Setting from the Setting mode When copying an output sheet with a pattern print the hidden pattern may not emerge dependin...

Page 316: ... the Print Contents Setting tab as required To specify print settings you can select the required one from pre set text or use the soft keyboard You can also print serial number and account job ID After the settings are completed tap Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT...

Page 317: ...view key displays the settings of the Print Contents Setting tab Check the preview image in the preview screen The pattern print preview may slightly differ from the actual pattern and exposure as the preview is used for simple pattern colour checking To cancel all settings Tap the CA key Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to s...

Page 318: ...nd paper size to copy images on a sheet the copy ratio is calculated automatically and the original is copied Photo Repeat This function repeatedly copies on A4 8 1 2 x 11 or A3 11 x 17 papers without changing the copy ratio of the photo size original You can select any of the following five types of original size Original sizes up to 130 mm x 90 mm 3 x 5 Original sizes up to 70 mm x 100 mm 2 1 2 ...

Page 319: ...spective Original Paper Select or Copy Ratio key when necessary SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE MANUAL RATIO SELECTION SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING Specify the repeat partition line After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence To cancel the automatic settings Tap the Off key Copy by automatically calculating the repeat count Auto Copy by specifying a repeat count Fixed Repea...

Page 320: ...the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results To cancel all settings Tap the CA key Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of co...

Page 321: ...he settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence To cancel the fixed repeat setting Tap the Off key Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results...

Page 322: ... select a paper size After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence Repeat a photo size original in actual size Photo Repeat 7 steps in all Tap the Others key and tap the Repeat Layout key When you tap the Original sizes up to 130 mm x 90 mm 3 x 5 key on the Original screen you can select the A4 paper size only To cancel the photo repeat setting Tap the Off key Place the original o...

Page 323: ...l MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 063b htm 24 03 2011 2 58 14 PM Index Contents Overview Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more copies tap the copies display key to set a number of copies ...

Page 324: ...4a htm 24 03 2011 2 58 15 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N SPECIFYING A PAPER POSITION Position image Index Contents Operation COPYING This function moves the scanned original to a specified position to make a copy You can make a copy in any desired position as you can fine adjust the position Position Image must be specified before scanning the original ...

Page 325: ...pecify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys then adjust it with If you set the Adjust 2nd pg value to 1st checkbox to goes out and you can set sides 1 and 2 separately Tap the Others key and tap the Position Image key After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence To cancel the Position Image setting Tap the Clear key Place the original and tap the Preview key Pla...

Page 326: ... contents 02 064b htm 24 03 2011 2 58 15 PM Index Contents Overview To cancel all settings Tap the CA key Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies ...

Page 327: ...ation COPYING If the scanned original contains blank pages this function skips them to copy only non blank pages The machine detects blank pages enabling you to skip useless copies without checking an original If an original of which one side is blank is scanned blank pages are skipped for 2 sided copying Depending on the original some pages that are not blank may be detected as blank pages and th...

Page 328: ...UTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Tap the Others key and tap the Blank Page Skip key Tap the Skip Blank Page or Skip Blank and Back Shadow key To cancel the Blank Page Skip setting Tap the Off key After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results To cancel all settings Tap th...

Page 329: ...TION GUIDE SKIPPING BLANK PAGES IN AN ORIGINAL file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 065b htm 24 03 2011 2 58 16 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 330: ...MPHLET ORIGINAL BY PAGE Book divide Index Contents Operation COPYING This function splits a saddle stitch original such as a catalogue or a pamphlet page by page and copies in sequence Book Divide must be specified before scanning the original This function supports three original binding edges left binding right binding and top open The scanned original is split in the centre The document glass i...

Page 331: ...e sure that the binding edge is correct To cancel the Book Divide setting Tap the Off key Tap the Others key and tap the Book Divide key Place the original in the automatic document feeder and tap the Preview key Remove saddle stitches from the original AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results To cancel all s...

Page 332: ...T ORIGINAL BY PAGE file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 066b htm 24 03 2011 2 58 18 PM Index Contents Overview Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies ...

Page 333: ... on the settings of the job in progress the Interrupt key may not appear Depending on the settings of the job in progress the Reserve key may appear instead of the Interrupt key Unlike interrupt copy reserve copy does not temporarily stop the job in progress Instead the reserve copy job begins when the job in progress is finished Interrupt copy cannot be used in combination with the following func...

Page 334: ...upt key to display the user authentication screen Enter the user name and password to perform user authentication Place the original Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Configure copy settings To cancel interrupt copy tap the Cancel key Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start interr...

Page 335: ...OBS Index Contents COPYING When you tap the job status display jobs are displayed in a list To check the status of a copy job tap the Print tab When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing see the following items STOPPING DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS ...

Page 336: ...10N MX 3110N MX 3610N RETRIEVING A PROGRAM Index Contents COPYING 2 steps in all Tap Call Program key on the action panel Tap the key of the program you want to retrieve After selecting a program key tap Select a program key and tap the Add to Bookmark or Register in Home key on the action panel You can then register the selected program as a shortcut in bookmark or home page ...

Page 337: ...formation about how to retrieve a program see RETRIEVING A PROGRAM When a job program is not stored When a job program is stored Sets A3 11 x 17 to A4 8 1 2 x 11 reduction Changes the exposure setting Sets 2 sided copying Sets margins Sets punch hole settings Tap the Colour Start key or the B W Start key Selects copy settings Tap the Colour Start key or the B W Start key Considerable time is requi...

Page 338: ...ual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 073a htm 24 03 2011 2 58 20 PM Index Contents Operation Program settings remains registered even when the main power has been turned off A program can also be stored in a home page or bookmark as a shortcut therefore it is helpful when retrieving it ...

Page 339: ...gram stored is displayed in colour Tap a key with no program stored If a program is not named a serial number is automatically assigned instead of a program name Name the program and tap the OK key A registration completion message appears Select whether or not to register the program in home page or bookmark After the settings are completed tap Specify the copy function to be stored Using the bas...

Page 340: ...24 03 2011 2 58 21 PM Index Contents Overview If user authentication is enabled a shortcut of the program is registered in the user s home page or bookmark If user authentication is disabled the administrator password entry screen appears When the administrator password is entered the registration is completed The number of copies cannot be stored ...

Page 341: ... MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N DELETING AND RENAMING A PROGRAM Index Contents Operation COPYING This section explains how to delete copy settings in a program and rename a program A program that is already stored cannot be deleted When System Settings in Setting mode Copy Settings Copy Setting Disable Registration of Program is selected a registered program cannot be deleted or renamed ...

Page 342: ... 3610N DELETING AND RENAMING A PROGRAM COPYING Tap the Delete key on the action panel Tap the Change Name key on the action panel Deleting a program Renaming a program Deleting a program 3 steps in all Tap Call Program key on the action panel Tap the key of the program you want to delete and tap the Delete key After deleting tap Renaming a program 3 steps in all Tap Call Program key on the action ...

Page 343: ...nts Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 074b htm 24 03 2011 2 58 23 PM Index Contents Overview Tap the key of the required program and rename the program Then tap the OK key After the settings are completed tap ...

Page 344: ...rints the pre specified traceable information to prevent an unauthorised copy To configure print settings In Setting mode select Security Settings Tracking Information Print If this function is specified together with another image compositing function trace information is printed at the top Trace information is printed at the top or bottom outside an image frame The information added at printing ...

Page 345: ... the original enabling the high quality output or speed priority output according to the application Resolution must be specified before scanning the original The resolution setting is applied when making a full size black white copy Touch the Others key and tap the Scan Resolution key Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic docume...

Page 346: ...OPERATION GUIDE ADJUSTING RESOLUTION WHEN SCANNING file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 02 076 htm 24 03 2011 2 58 24 PM Index Contents ...

Page 347: ...is reduced slightly The toner saving level can be selected from up to three levels Tap the Others key and tap the Toner Save Mode key Select the toner saving level After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence If user authentication is enabled you can permit each user group to use the toner save mode AUTHORITY GROUP LIST To change the toner save mode setting In Setting mode select...

Page 348: ...SORT SETTING Index Contents Operation COPYING This function staples sorted copies and delivers them to the tray Binding Edge Process image OFF Does not staple 1 staple in back 1 staple in front 2 Staples Pamphlet Copy You can view staple positions on the PREVIEW SCREEN A finisher or saddle finisher is required to use the staple sort function A saddle finisher is required to use the saddle stitch f...

Page 349: ...d paper sheets while shifting them set by set You can easily remove each set from the output tray To change the output tray tap the Output Tray key and select the output destination If the number of scanned originals exceeds the staple sheet limit a message is displayed Tap the Continue or Cancel key Continue Continues sorting without stapling Cancel Cancels the staple sort setting Saddle stitch 3...

Page 350: ...reen and tap the On key Selecting the Offset check box outputs the sorted paper sheets while shifting them set by set to enable the user to easily remove each set from the output tray To change the output tray tap the Output Tray key and select the output destination If the number of scanned originals exceeds the staple sheet limit a message is displayed Tap the Divide Continue or Cancel key Divid...

Page 351: ...ts them to the tray You can select paper size of A4 A3 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 R to 11 x 17 for punching You can view punch positions on the PREVIEW SCREEN A punch module is required for paper punch The number of holes that can be punched and the spacing between the holes varies depending on the installed punch module You cannot use A3W 12 x 18 size papers and special media such as transparency film and ta...

Page 352: ...Index Contents Overview COPYING 2 steps in all Tap the Others key and tap the Punch key Tap the On key After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence Selecting the Offset check box outputs the sorted paper sheets while shifting them set by set to enable the user to easily remove each set from the output tray To change the output tray tap the Output Tray key and select the output de...

Page 353: ... 11 x17 16KR and 8K papers For detailed information on the sizes and types of paper that can be folded see the specifications in the Quick Start Guide You can view the specified folding method on the PREVIEW SCREEN A saddle finisher is required to use the paper folding function Special media such as transparency film and tab paper cannot be used When the paper folding function is selected the stap...

Page 354: ...Contents Overview COPYING 2 steps in all Tap the Others key and tap the Fold key Select the folding method After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence Selecting the Offset check box outputs the sorted paper sheets while shifting them set by set to enable the user to easily remove each set from the output tray To change the output tray tap the Output Tray key and select the outpu...

Page 355: ...Contents Operation COPYING This function allows you to send a fax while making a copy send an e mail with an image attached or save data in the network folder You need to store the destination in the address book in advance STORING CONTACTS The facsimile and image transmission starts after the copy and the settings same as the copy are used for transmission However the same results as the copy may...

Page 356: ...s print key on the action panel Select a recipient from the address book ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN After you have selected the recipient tap the Enter Address key You cannot use the soft keyboard to enter an address If you cannot find the recipient in the address book enter it in the address book STORING CONTACTS Place the original Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document...

Page 357: ...ts Overview Set each copy item as required These copy settings are used for facsimile transmission However some settings may be unavailable depending on the function You can preview the scanned original by tapping the Preview key Tap the Colour Start or B W Start key to start copying After the copy the transmission starts After the copy you cannot preview the settings before transmission ...

Page 358: ... password are required SELECTING THE PAPER PRINTING ON ENVELOPES This section explains the procedures for loading postcards or envelopes in the bypass tray and for performing printing from the printer driver properties window VIEWING PRINTER DRIVER HELP When selecting settings in the printer driver you can display Help to view explanations of the settings at the time of printing SAVING FREQUENTLY ...

Page 359: ... This function directly prints print jobs or e mail attachment files from the machine PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE This section explains the procedure for printing encrypted PDF files CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT This section explains the procedure for continuing printing by changing to another paper size when the paper runs out PRINTER JOBS The job status scre...

Page 360: ...OPERATION GUIDE PRINTER file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 htm 24 03 2011 2 58 30 PM Index ...

Page 361: ... PS This printer driver supports the PostScript 3 page description language developed by Adobe Systems Incorporated and enables the machine to be used as a PostScript 3 compatible printer If it is desired to use the Windows standard PS printer driver the PPD driver must be used The PS3 expansion kit must be installed To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Windows environment see...

Page 362: ...3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 001 htm 24 03 2011 2 58 32 PM Index Contents machine as a network printer To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Macintosh environment see 3 SETUP IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT in the Software Setup Guide ...

Page 363: ...NG IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT Index Contents Operation PRINTER The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window usually Property or Print Settings may vary depending on the application The machine name that normally appears in the Printer menu is MX xxxx xxxx is a sequence of characters that varies depending ...

Page 364: ...elect the printer driver for the machine and click the Preferences button If the printer drivers appear as a list select the name of the printer driver to be used from the list In Windows 2000 the Preferences button does not appear Click a tab on the Print dialog box to adjust the settings on that tab Click the Paper tab and select the paper size Make sure the paper size is the same as the paper s...

Page 365: ...03 2011 2 58 33 PM Index Contents Overview application You can register up to seven user defined sizes in the pull down menu To store a paper size select Custom Paper or one of User 1 to User 7 from the pull down menu and click the Custom button To select settings on other tabs click the desired tab and then select the settings Click the OK button to execute printing ...

Page 366: ...he machine as a printer for the Macintosh the PS3 expansion kit must be installed on the machine and the machine must be connected to a network To install the PPD file and configure printer driver settings see 3 SETUP IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT in the Software Setup Guide The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application The machine name that normally appears in the Printer m...

Page 367: ...ect Print from the File menu Make sure that the correct printer is selected Select Page Setup from the File menu and select the printer If the printer drivers appear as a list select the name of the printer driver to be used from the list Select the paper settings and click the OK button Set the paper size paper orientation and copy ratio The following example explains how to print a document from...

Page 368: ...ck the Print button In Mac OS X click next to Copies Pages and select the settings that you wish to configure from the pull down menu The corresponding setting screen will appear In Mac OS X 10 5 to 10 5 8 or 10 6 to 10 6 2 if the settings do not appear click next to the printer name In Mac OS 9 click next to General Setting and select the settings that you wish to configure from the pull down men...

Page 369: ...ing user information For black and white print settings see Black and white printing in SELECTING THE COLOUR MODE The number of pages printed is added to the Other User count In this case other print functions may be restricted For more information ask your administrator If you have configured Printing Policy on the Options tab so that user authentication is always performed users are required to ...

Page 370: ...ct the User Number checkbox and enter your user number using 5 to 8 digits In the printer driver properties window of the application select the printer driver of the machine and click the Preferences button If you have configured Printing Policy on the Options tab so that user authentication is always performed user information cannot be entered here User information must be entered in the dialog...

Page 371: ...eration 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 004b htm 24 03 2011 2 58 36 PM Index Contents Overview do not enter a job name the file name set in the application will appear To have a confirmation window appear before printing starts select the Auto Job Control Review checkbox Click the OK button to execute printing ...

Page 372: ...e printing The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application The machine name that normally appears in the Printer menu is SCxxxxxx xxxxxx is a sequence of characters that varies depending on the machine model When black and white printing is set in the printer driver printing is possible without entering user information For black and white print settings see Black and white...

Page 373: ... s printer name is selected Select Job Handling and enter your user information When authentication is carried out using the login name password enter your login name in Login Name and your password 1 to 32 characters in Password When authentication is carried out using the user number enter your user number 5 to 8 digits in User Number In Mac OS X 10 5 to 10 5 8 or 10 6 to 10 6 2 select Job Handl...

Page 374: ...enter a user name your PC login name will appear Enter a job name using up to 32 characters The entered job name will appear as a file name on the touch panel of the machine If you do not enter a job name the file name set in the application will appear Click the Print button In Mac OS X you can click the lock button after entering your login name and password or user number to simplify operation ...

Page 375: ... tray of the machine check that paper of that type is actually loaded into the bypass tray and then select the appropriate paper type When Paper Type in Paper Selection is set to Auto Select A tray with plain paper or recycled paper of the size specified in Paper Size is automatically selected The factory default setting is plain paper only When Paper Type in Paper Selection is set to anything oth...

Page 376: ...610_ex_ope contents 03 006 htm 24 03 2011 2 58 37 PM Index Contents when Auto Select is selected In Setting mode select System Settings Printer Settings Default Settings Bypass Tray Settings Exclude Bypass Tray from Auto Paper Select If special media are frequently loaded in the bypass tray it is recommended that this setting be enabled ...

Page 377: ... is actually loaded into the bypass tray and then select the appropriate bypass tray paper type When a paper type is specified A tray with the specified type of paper and the size specified in Paper Size on the page setup screen is used for printing Special media such as envelopes can also be placed in the bypass tray For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray see LOADING PAPER INTO TH...

Page 378: ...s of paper that can be used in the bypass tray see APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray see LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY For more information on the procedure for loading paper see PAPER FEEDING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT It is recommended that you carry out a test print to check the print result before using an envelope When using media such as envelop...

Page 379: ...S ENVIRONMENT Index Contents Overview PRINTER 3 steps in all Click the Paper tab and select the envelope size from the Paper Size menu Select Bypass Tray from the Paper Source menu of Paper Selection Select the envelope size in the settings of the application Page Setup in many applications and then perform the following steps Select Envelope from the Paper Type menu Set the paper type of the bypa...

Page 380: ...es of paper that can be used in the bypass tray see APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray see LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY For more information on the procedure for loading paper see PAPER FEEDING IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT When using media such as envelopes that can be loaded only in a specific orientation you can rotate the image 180 degrees For more...

Page 381: ...per Size menu on the page setup screen and click the OK button In Mac OS 9 select the envelope size from the Paper Select menu on the page setup screen Select Paper Feed in the print settings window Select Bypass Tray Envelope from the All pages from menu In Mac OS 9 select Bypass Tray Envelope from the All pages from menu of Paper Source Set the paper type of the bypass tray to Envelope and load ...

Page 382: ...window of the printer driver Pop up help Help can be displayed for a setting by clicking the setting and pressing the F1 key To view Help for a setting in Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 click the button in the upper right hand corner of the printer driver properties window and then click the setting Information icon Some restrictions exist on the combinations of settings that can be selected in the p...

Page 383: ... 2 steps in all Click the Help button The Help window will open to let you view explanations of the settings on the tab To view Help for settings in a dialog box click the underlined text at the top of the Help window Select the machine s printer driver from the print window of the application and click the Detail button The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window usually ...

Page 384: ...t the time of printing can be saved as user settings Saving frequently used settings or complex colour settings under an assigned name makes it easy to select those settings the next time you need to use them Settings can be saved from any tab of the printer driver properties window Settings configured on each tab are listed at the time of saving allowing you to check the settings as you save them...

Page 385: ...Contents Overview PRINTER 4 steps in all Configure the print settings on each tab and click the Save button Check the displayed settings Enter a name for the settings using up to 20 characters and click the OK button Select the machine s printer driver from the print window of the application and click the Detail button The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window usually P...

Page 386: ...l MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 014a htm 24 03 2011 2 58 44 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N USING SAVED SETTINGS Index Contents Operation PRINTER You can specify the saved user settings through just one click to apply frequently used settings or complicated colour settings to your printing ...

Page 387: ...USING SAVED SETTINGS Index Contents Overview PRINTER 3 steps in all Select the user settings that you wish to use and click the OK button Start printing Select the machine s printer driver from the print window of the application and click the Detail button The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window usually Property or Print Preferences may vary depending on the applicati...

Page 388: ... 24 03 2011 2 58 45 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER DEFAULT SETTINGS Index Contents Operation PRINTER You can change the default settings of the printer driver Changes you have made in the printer driver properties window when you execute printing from the application are returned to the default settings specified here when you exit the application ...

Page 389: ...Properties In Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 click the File menu and then click Properties In Windows 7 click the Printer properties menu Click the Printing Preferences button on the General tab Click the Start button and select Control Panels and then Printer In Windows7 click the Start button and then click Devices and Printers In Windows XP Server 2003 click the Start button and then click Printer...

Page 390: ...3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 015b htm 24 03 2011 2 58 45 PM Index Contents Overview In Windows 7 click the Default Settings button on the General tab Configure the settings and click the OK button For explanations of the settings see printer driver Help ...

Page 391: ...toner only This is convenient when printing a document that has both colour and black and white pages however the printing speed is slower Color All pages are printed in colour Both colour data and black and white data are printed using Y Yellow M Magenta C Cyan and Bk Black toner Greyscale All pages are printed in black and white Colour data such as images or materials for a presentation are prin...

Page 392: ...10OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 016a htm 24 03 2011 2 58 46 PM Index Contents Operation The Black and White Print checkbox on the Main tab and the Color Mode setting on the Color tab are linked When the Black and White Print checkbox is set to on the Main tab Black and White is selected on the Color tab ...

Page 393: ...ion 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 016b htm 24 03 2011 2 58 47 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N SELECTING THE COLOUR MODE Index Contents Overview PRINTER Click the Color tab and select Color Mode Select Color and select Color Mode Windows 1 step in all Macintosh 1 step in all ...

Page 394: ...3110N MX 3610N SELECTING THE RESOLUTION Index Contents Operation PRINTER The following three selections are available for Print Mode resolution Normal This mode is suitable for printing data such as regular text or a table High Quality The print quality of colour photos and text is high Ultra Fine Select this mode to print colour photos more clearly or graphic gradation images more finely ...

Page 395: ...on 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 017b htm 24 03 2011 2 58 48 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N SELECTING THE RESOLUTION Index Contents Overview PRINTER Click the Advanced tab and select Print Mode Select Color and select Print Mode Windows 1 step in all Macintosh 1 step in all ...

Page 396: ...ction is useful for many purposes and is particularly convenient when you want to create a simple pamphlet 2 sided printing also helps conserve paper Paper orientation Print results Windows Macintosh Windows Macintosh Portrait 2 Sided Book Long edged binding 2 Sided Tablet Short edged binding Horizontal 2 Sided Book Short edged binding 2 Sided Tablet Long edged binding The pages are printed so tha...

Page 397: ... select 2 Sided Book or 2 Sided Tablet If necessary you can select the method of implementing 2 sided printing Click the Compatibility button on the Advanced tab and select the mode from 2 Sided Printing Mode Select Layout and select Long edged binding or Short edged binding In Mac OS X 10 2 8 select the settings in Advanced In Mac OS 9 select Output Document Style and then select Flip on long edg...

Page 398: ...tch the size of the paper loaded in the machine This function is convenient when enlarging a A4 or letter size document to A3 or ledger size to make it easier to view or when printing a document on paper that is different in size from the original document In a Macintosh environment this function can be used only in Mac OS X 10 4 11 10 5 to 10 5 8 and 10 6 to 10 6 2 When you are using the PCL6 or ...

Page 399: ...the print image for example A4 Select Fit To Paper Size and select the actual paper size to be used for printing for example A3 Select Paper Handling and check the paper size for the print image for example A4 To change the print image size use the Paper Size menu that appears when Page Setup is selected Select Scale to fit paper size and select the actual paper size to be used for printing for ex...

Page 400: ...ve paper When used in combination with 2 sided printing this function saves more paper N Up Pages per sheet Print results Left To Right Right To Left Top To Bottom When the print orientation is landscape 2 Up 2 pages per sheet N Up Pages per sheet Upper Left To Right Upper Left To Bottom Upper Right To Left Upper Right To Bottom 4 Up 4 pages per sheet Note the following when printing multiple page...

Page 401: ...TION GUIDE PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 020a htm 24 03 2011 2 58 51 PM Index Contents Operation ...

Page 402: ...lines click the Border checkbox so that the checkmark appears Select the order of the pages When you are using the SPDL2 c printer driver you can print multiple pages on one sheet without changing the original size Click the Compatibility button on the Advanced tab and click the 100 N Up checkbox Click the Special Modes tab Select Layout Print and click the Settings button Select N Up w o 1st Page...

Page 403: ...10_ex_ope contents 03 020b htm 24 03 2011 2 58 52 PM Index Contents Overview In N Up Printing select the number of images per sheet and click the OK button Select Layout and select the number of pages per sheet Select the order of the pages If you wish to print borderlines select the desired type of borderline Macintosh 2 steps in all ...

Page 404: ...Right Top 1 Staple 2 Staples The staple orientation or varies depending on the size and orientation of the paper The punch function punches holes in the output The punch hole positions are set by selecting the binding edge Left Right Top Staple function Punch function A finisher or saddle finisher is required to use the staple function To use the punch function install a punch module in the finish...

Page 405: ...10OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 021a htm 24 03 2011 2 58 53 PM Index Contents Operation When the finisher is disabled in the machine s settings the staple function and punch function cannot be used When the staple function or the punch function is disabled in the machine s settings stapling or punching is not possible ...

Page 406: ...tion or the punch function For the staple function select the number of staples in the Staple menu For the punch function click the Punch checkbox so that the checkmark appears Select Printer Features and select Binding Edge In Mac OS X 10 2 8 select the settings in Advanced In Mac OS 9 select the settings in Output Document Style Select the staple function or the punch function Select the number ...

Page 407: ...ON GUIDE STAPLING OUTPUT PUNCHING HOLES IN OUTPUT file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 021b htm 24 03 2011 2 58 53 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 408: ...D PAMPHLET Pamphlet copy saddle stitch Index Contents Operation PRINTER The pamphlet function prints on the front and back of each sheet of paper so that the sheets can be folded and bound to create a pamphlet If a saddle finisher is installed and if Pamphlet Style and Staple are selected this function automatically folds and outputs the copies This is convenient when you wish to compile printed o...

Page 409: ...amphlet Style Select the printing method for the pamphlet style from the pull down menu The selections are Tiled Pamphlet Pamphlet Style 2 Up Multiple Pamphlet Style Actual Size and Multiple Pamphlet Style 2 Up Windows 2 steps in all When Multiple Pamphlet Style Actual Size is selected paper twice the size specified in the application is used for printing When Multiple Pamphlet Style 2 Up is selec...

Page 410: ... MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 022b htm 24 03 2011 2 58 55 PM Index Contents Overview Staple Position from the Advanced menu In Mac OS 9 select the settings in Output Document Style Select Tiled Pamphlet or 2 Up Pamphlet ...

Page 411: ...610N PRINTING WITH MARGIN SHIFT SETTING Margin shift Index Contents Operation PRINTER This function shifts the print image to increase the margin at the left the right or the top of the paper If a finisher or saddle finisher is installed the staple and punch functions of the machine can also be used together This is convenient when you wish to staple or punch the output but the binding area overla...

Page 412: ...Edge Select Margin Shift Select from the Margin Shift menu If you wish to configure another numeric setting select the setting from the pull down menu and click the Settings button Click buttons or directly enter the number Select Printer Features and select Binding Edge In Mac OS X 10 2 8 select from the Staple Position and Margin Shift menus in Advanced In Mac OS 9 select Advanced and then selec...

Page 413: ...TER One page of print data is enlarged and printed using multiple sheets of paper 4 sheets 2 x 2 9 sheets 3 x 3 or 16 sheets 4 x 4 The sheets can then be attached together to create a large poster To enable precise alignment of the edges of the sheets during attachment borderlines can be printed or overlapping edges can be created overlap function This function is available in a Windows environmen...

Page 414: ...A LARGE POSTER Poster printing Index Contents Overview PRINTER 3 steps in all Click the Paper tab Click the Poster Printing checkbox so that the checkmark appears and click the Poster Settings button From the pull down menu select the number of sheets of paper to be used If you wish to print borderlines and or use the overlap function click the corresponding checkboxes so that the checkmark appear...

Page 415: ...4 03 2011 2 58 58 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES Rotate 180 degrees Index Contents Operation PRINTER This feature rotates the image 180 degrees so that it can be printed correctly on paper that can be loaded in only one orientation such as envelopes or paper with punch holes In Mac OS X a portrait image cannot be rotated 180 degrees ...

Page 416: ...G THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES Rotate 180 degrees Index Contents Overview PRINTER Click the Main tab Select the Rotate 180 degrees checkbox to set to Select Page Setup from the File menu and click the button In Mac OS 9 select Page Setup from the File menu and select PostScript Options Then select the Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical checkboxes to set to Windows 2 steps in all Macintosh 2 steps in...

Page 417: ...0N ENLARGING REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGE Zoom setting enlarge or reduce Index Contents Operation PRINTER This function enlarges or reduces the image to a selected percentage When using the PS printer driver Windows you can set the width and length percentages separately to change the proportion of the image XY Zoom This allows you to enlarge a small image or add margins to the paper by slightly reduc...

Page 418: ...w PRINTER Click the Paper tab Select Zoom and click the Settings button From the pull down menu select the actual paper size to be used for printing Enter the percentage By clicking the button you can specify the value in increments of 1 In addition select Upper Left or Center for the base point on the paper Select Page Setup from the File menu and enter the ratio In Mac OS 9 select Page Setup fro...

Page 419: ...INE THICKNESS Line thickness setting Index Contents Operation PRINTER This function increases the thickness of the entire line when the print lines are not clear in CAD or other special applications When the data includes lines of varying widths you can print all lines at the minimum width as necessary This function is available in a Windows environment This function can be used when the PCL6 prin...

Page 420: ...ickness setting Index Contents Overview PRINTER 2 steps in all Click the Advanced tab Select a number from the Line Width Settings pull down menu The units of line width adjustment can be set to Fixed Width or Ratio Click the Compatibility button and select the units from the Line Width Unit menu To print all line data in the minimum line width click the Compatibility button and click the Print in...

Page 421: ...INT A MIRROR IMAGE Mirror image reverse visual effects Index Contents Operation PRINTER The image is reversed to create a mirror image This function is conveniently used to print a design for a woodblock print or other printing medium In a Windows environment this function is only available when using the PS printer driver In a Macintosh environment this function is only available when using Mac O...

Page 422: ...se visual effects Index Contents Overview PRINTER If you wish to reverse the image horizontally select Horizontal If you wish to reverse the image vertically select Vertical To reverse the image horizontally select Flip Horizontal To reverse the image vertically select Flip Vertical Click the OK button Windows 2 steps in all Click the Advanced tab Macintosh 3 steps in all Select Page Setup from th...

Page 423: ...MX 3610N ADJUST THE BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST OF THE IMAGE Colour adjustment Index Contents Operation PRINTER This function adjusts the brightness and contrast in the print settings when a photo or other image is printed This function makes simple corrections even if image editing software is not installed on your computer In a Macintosh environment this function is only available when using Mac OS ...

Page 424: ...10N MX 3610N ADJUST THE BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST OF THE IMAGE Colour adjustment PRINTER Drag the slide bar or click the and buttons to adjust the image Select Color and click the Color Adjustment button Click the Color Adjustment checkbox so that the checkmark appears and drag the slide bar to adjust the image Windows 2 steps in all Click the Color tab and click the Color Adjustment button Macintos...

Page 425: ...UIDE ADJUST THE BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST OF THE IMAGE file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 029b htm 24 03 2011 2 59 03 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 426: ...FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK Text to black vector to black Index Contents Operation PRINTER When printing a colour image in greyscale text and lines that are drawn in faint colours are printed in black This function allows you to bring out colour text and lines that are faint and difficult to see when printed in greyscale Raster data such as bitmap images cannot be adjusted This function is avail...

Page 427: ...MX 3610N PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK Text to black vector to black Index Contents Overview PRINTER 2 steps in all Click the Color tab Select the Text To Black checkbox and or the Vector To Black checkbox When Text To Black is selected all text other than white text is printed in black When Vector To Black is selected all vector graphics other than white lines and areas are printed in bl...

Page 428: ...lour management method in a Windows environment ColorSync 2 Colour management method in a Macintosh environment Source Profile Selects a colour profile to be used to display images on the PC s screen Rendering Intent Standard value used when converting the colour balance of the image displayed on the computer screen to a colour balance that can be printed by the machine Output Profile Selects a co...

Page 429: ...usts the colours to simulate printing that would be obtained with the process colours used in printing presses Simulation Profile 4 Selects the process colours 1 Cannot be selected when using the PS printer driver in Windows Vista Server 2008 7 2 Cannot be selected in Mac OS X 10 2 8 In Mac OS 9 can be selected in the Colour Matching menu 3 Can only be used when using the PCL6 printer driver 4 Can...

Page 430: ... uses photos CAD Engineering drawing data Scan Data scanned by a scanner Minimum Color Difference Data to be printed in colours as viewed on the screen Custom Data to be printed with special settings Windows 2 steps in all Click the Advanced Color button and specify the settings To configure colour management using the Windows OS ICM set Original Type to Custom in step 1 Then click the Windows ICM...

Page 431: ... photos CAD Engineering drawing data Scan Data scanned by a scanner Minimum Color Difference Data to be printed in colours as viewed on the screen Custom Data to be printed with special settings When you have selected Custom select Neutral Grey Click the Advanced Color button and specify the settings To configure colour management settings select the desired settings from the menus To set CMYK Sim...

Page 432: ...OPERATION GUIDE SELECTING COLOR SETTINGS TO MATCH THE IMAGE TYPE file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 031b htm 24 03 2011 2 59 06 PM ...

Page 433: ... MX 3610N ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED PAGES Watermark Index Contents Operation PRINTER This function adds faint shadow like text as a watermark in the background of the printed image The size colour exposure and angle of the watermark text can be adjusted The watermark text can be selected from the previously registered text in the list When necessary you can enter text to create an original wat...

Page 434: ...k Click the Edit button to edit the font colour and select other detailed settings To create a watermark enter the text of the watermark in the Text box and click the Add button Select Watermarks Click the Watermark checkbox and configure watermark settings Configure detailed watermark settings such as selection of the text and editing of the font and colour Adjust the size and angle of the text b...

Page 435: ...VER THE PRINT DATA Image stamp Index Contents Operation PRINTER This function prints a bitmap or JPEG image stored on your PC over the print data This function prints a frequently used image or an icon of your own creation as if it is stamped on the print data The size position and angle of the image can be adjusted This function is available in a Windows environment This function can be used when...

Page 436: ...610N MX 3110N MX 3610N PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT DATA Image stamp Index Contents Overview PRINTER 1 steps in all Click the Watermarks tab and select Image Stamp If an image stamp has already been stored it can be selected from the pull down menu If you have not stored an image stamp click the Image File select the file you wish to use for the image stamp and click the Add button Windows ...

Page 437: ... A FIXED FORM ON THE PRINT DATA Overlay Index Contents Operation PRINTER This function overlays data on a fixed form you have prepared By creating table rulings or a decorative frame in an application different from that of the text file and registering the data as an overlay file an attractive print result can be easily obtained without the need for complex manipulations This function is availabl...

Page 438: ...e The file will be created when the settings are completed and printing is started Click the Advanced tab and select Overlays A previously created or stored overlay Windows Creating an overlay file 3 steps in all Open the driver properties window from the application that is used for creating overlay data When printing is started a confirmation message will appear The overlay file will not be crea...

Page 439: ...ED FORM ON THE PRINT DATA file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 034b htm 24 03 2011 2 59 10 PM Index Contents Overview file can be selected from the pull down menu ...

Page 440: ...other pages Use this function when you wish to print the front and back covers on heavy paper or insert coloured paper or a different paper type at specified pages As necessary paper can be inserted as insertion sheets where nothing is printed In a Windows environment In a Macintosh environment The front and back covers are printed using paper that is different from the other pages This function c...

Page 441: ...r settings will appear in Information When you have finished selecting settings click the Save button in Custom Settings to save the settings Windows 3 steps in all When Bypass Tray is selected in Paper Source be sure to select the Paper Type and load that type of paper in the bypass tray When Other Page is selected for Insert Position specify the insert position by directly entering a page number...

Page 442: ...x3610_ex_ope contents 03 035b htm 24 03 2011 2 59 11 PM Index Contents Overview Select Printer Features and select Different Paper Select the cover insertion settings Select the print setting paper tray and paper type for the front and back covers In Mac OS 9 select Different Paper and then select the settings for the front and back covers ...

Page 443: ...NTING ON TRANSPARENCY FILM Transparency inserts Index Contents Operation PRINTER When transparency film is used for printing this function prevents the sheets of transparency film from sticking together by inserting a sheet of paper between each sheet of film As necessary the same content as that printed on each sheet of transparency film is also printed on the corresponding sheet of inserted pape...

Page 444: ...s tab Select Transparency Inserts and click the Settings button Select the transparency insert settings When the Printed checkbox is selected to set to the same content as that printed on the transparency film is also printed on the insert Select the paper source and type if needed Set the paper type of the bypass tray to OHP and load transparency film into the bypass tray Select Printer Features ...

Page 445: ...cy Inserts the same content as that printed on the transparency film is also printed on the insert Select the paper source and type if needed Set the paper type of the bypass tray to OHP and load transparency film into the bypass tray In Mac OS X 10 2 8 select the Transparency Inserts checkbox in Advanced so that the checkmark appears In Mac OS 9 select Transparency Inserts and select from the Tra...

Page 446: ...n paper that is of the same size but from a different paper tray For example if carbon copy print is selected when plain paper is loaded into tray 1 and coloured paper is loaded into tray 2 a print result similar to a carbon copy slip is obtained with a single selection of the print command If plain paper is loaded into tray 1 and recycled paper is loaded into tray 2 as necessary selecting Carbon ...

Page 447: ...PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N PRINTING A CARBON COPY Carbon copy Index Contents Overview PRINTER 3 steps in all Click the Special Modes tab Select Carbon Copy and click the Settings button Select the tray for the first copy from Top Copy and then select the tray for the carbon copy from Carbon Copy Windows When the bypass tray is selected be sure to select the Paper Type ...

Page 448: ...ced tab of the printer driver property window The text is printed on the tabs Tab sheets are printed while they are inserted between the desired pages In Tab Paper Print on the Special Modes tab of the printer driver properties window enter the text that you wish to print on the tabs Specify the detailed settings such as the size of the tabs the starting position the distance between tabs and the ...

Page 449: ...the image by directly entering a value or by clicking the button Select the paper source and type Click the Paper tab and select Bypass Tray for Paper Source and Tab Paper for Paper Type Set the paper type of the bypass tray to Tab Paper and load tab papers into the bypass tray Click the Special Modes tab Windows Tab Paper Settings 3 steps in all When you have finished preparing the data to be pri...

Page 450: ...ther types of tab paper the position of the first tab the distance between tabs and the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the tab can be directly entered or changed using the button In addition select the size of the tab paper from Paper Size Select the page settings Specify the pages where you wish to insert tab paper and enter the text that you wish to print on the tabs Also select the font ...

Page 451: ...er inserts Index Contents Operation PRINTER This function prints specific pages on the front side of the paper When you specify a page such as a chapter cover page to be printed on the front side of the paper it is printed on the front side of the next sheet even if it would normally be printed on the reverse side of the paper Example When pages 4 and 8 are specified as page settings Back is blank...

Page 452: ...Index Contents Overview PRINTER 3 steps in all Click the Special Modes tab Select Chapter Inserts and click the Settings button Enter the page numbers that are to begin chapters in Page Setup and click the Add button Your settings will appear in Information When you have finished selecting settings click the Save button in User Settings to save the settings Windows You need to set Document Style o...

Page 453: ...rinted paper in half when a saddle finisher is installed on the machine You can choose whether the output is folded inward or outward This function cannot be used when System Settings in Setting mode Device Control Disabling of Duplex is selected When printing data that is in a pamphlet layout the Multi Sheet Fold Staple function can be used to conveniently fold and staple printed output to create...

Page 454: ... 18 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N FOLDING PRINTED PAPER IN HALF Fold Index Contents Overview PRINTER Click the Special Modes tab Select the desired folding method from Fold Select Printer Features Select Paper Folding Settings and select the desired folding method In Mac OS 9 select Fold Size Setting and then select the setting Windows 2 steps in all Macintosh 2 steps in all ...

Page 455: ...en pattern print Index Contents Operation PRINTER This function prints pattern data such as DO NOT COPY behind the print data If paper with pattern data is duplicated the pattern data emerges in the background which will help to prevent information from being leaked through unauthorised document copying This function is available in a Windows environment This function can be used when the PCL6 or ...

Page 456: ...utton Windows 3 steps in all Hidden Pattern Print is a function provided for the purpose of deterring unauthorised printing It does not guarantee the prevention of information leakage Text may not be completely hidden on an output sheet with a pattern print under certain machine conditions In Setting mode select Security Settings Hidden Pattern Print Setting Contrast if this is the case The hidden...

Page 457: ...e used to run a large copy job in parallel This function reduces the printing time when you handle a large number of prints To use the tandem print function the IP address of the slave machine configured in System Settings in Setting mode Device Control Tandem Connection Setting must be registered in the printer driver In a Windows environment this is accomplished automatically by clicking the Aut...

Page 458: ...the Advanced tab Click the Tandem Print checkbox so that the checkmark appears Windows 2 steps in all The tandem print function can be used only when the printer driver has been installed using Custom Installation with LPR Direct Print Specify Address Auto Search selected and with the Yes checkbox selected for Do you want to use the tandem print function Macintosh 2 steps in all To use the tandem ...

Page 459: ...he first set of copies is printed After checking the contents of the first set of copies you can print the remaining sets from the operation panel of the machine This prevents the occurrence of excessive misprints This function stores a print job as a file on the machine s hard drive allowing the job to be printed from the touch panel when needed The location for storing a file can be selected to ...

Page 460: ...ent Filing Settings When you have selected Custom Folder click the Stored to button to select the folder When Quick File is selected Retention Settings will be set to Hold After Print When Quick File is selected the password entered in Retention Settings is cleared If necessary you can select the data format from CMYK and RGB for data to be stored in the machine Click the Compatibility button on t...

Page 461: ...ork is IPv6 files are stored in the main folder Macintosh 3 steps in all When Quick File is selected Retention Settings will be set to Hold After Print When Quick File is selected the password entered in Retention Settings is cleared If necessary you can select the data format from CMYK and RGB for data to be stored in the machine Select Advanced in Printer Features and select the format from Rip ...

Page 462: ...PERATION GUIDE SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 043b htm 24 03 2011 2 59 21 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 463: ...necessary In Setting mode select System Settings Default Settings and enable Automatically print stored jobs after login At the time of retention print in addition to the user authentication information enter the user name stored in the machine in User Name of Default Job ID in the printer driver Using this function in a Windows environment PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT WHEN USER AUTHENTICATIO...

Page 464: ...w PRINTER 2 steps in all Enter your user number or login name and password in the user authentication screen of the machine At the time of retention print in addition to the user authentication information enter the user name stored in the machine in User Name of Default Job ID in the printer driver A confirmation prompt will appear Tap the OK key The print files stored in the quick file folder ma...

Page 465: ... Type TIFF JPEG PCL PDF Encrypt PDF High Compression PDF PS XPS Extension tiff tif jpeg jpg jpe jfif pcl pdf ps xps Even if the print result is black and white the following types of print jobs will be counted as 4 colour Y Yellow M Magenta C Cyan and Bk Black print jobs When you want such jobs to be counted as black and white jobs select the black and white printing option When the data is create...

Page 466: ...int files on the FTP server from the touch panel of the machine This function eliminates the need for downloading the files from the FTP server to your PC and sending print jobs from the PC to the machine To configure an FTP server In Setting mode select Application Settings Setting for Print from the MFP FTP and configure an FTP server Administrator rights are required Up to 20 FTP servers can be...

Page 467: ... of keys of files that can be printed The icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders on the FTP server To display a folder or a file in a folder tap this key Tap the Document Filing key Tap the Select File from FTP to Print key on the action panel Tap the key of the FTP server that you wish to access A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed Tap to move up one folder level Wh...

Page 468: ...have selected multiple files in step 4 you can select only the number of prints If you have selected a file that includes print conditions i e PCL PS or XPS files in step 4 the settings will be applied When the Print on Glossy Paper checkbox is selected Paper Select is set to Glossy Paper bypass tray and Output Resolution is set to 600 dpi High Quality Tap the Start key Printing begins after the s...

Page 469: ...t using the printer driver When the printer driver of the machine is not installed on your PC you can copy a file into a commercially available USB memory device and connect the device to the machine to print the file directly Use a FAT32 USB memory device with a capacity of no more than 32 GB Printing from a USB memory device is not possible when System Settings in Setting mode Printer Settings D...

Page 470: ...con is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the USB memory device To display a folder or a file in a folder tap this key A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed Tap to move up one folder level When you move down a folder level by tapping a folder key appears Tap this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen Tap the File or Folder Name key to change the ord...

Page 471: ...ments Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 047b htm 24 03 2011 2 59 26 PM Index Contents Overview Tap the Start key Printing begins after the selected file is transferred Remove the USB memory device from the machine ...

Page 472: ...ven if the network folder is not registered you can access the network folder by directly entering or referring to the path to the folder in the workgroup Entering the network folder path directly Referring to the network folder path To register a network folder In Setting mode select Application Settings Setting for Print from the MFP SMB to store a network folder Administrator rights are require...

Page 473: ... in the network folder Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine s settings 6 steps in all Tap the Document Filing key Tap the Select File from Network Folder to Print key on the action panel Tap the Open Registered Network Folder key on the action panel and tap the network folder that you wish to access If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name and pass...

Page 474: ...or Folder Name key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen Each time the key is tapped the order changes between ascending and descending Select the print conditions If you have selected multiple files in step 4 you can select only the number of prints If you have selected a file that includes print conditions i e PCL PS or XPS files in step 4 the settings will be appl...

Page 475: ... you wish to access Access the network folder For the procedure for printing see steps 4 to 6 of Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine s settings Referring to the network folder path 3 steps in all Tap the key of the workgroup that you wish to access in step 3 of Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine s settings Tap the icon and ...

Page 476: ...rectly print the file without using the printer driver In addition to a file on your PC this procedure can be used to print any file that can be accessed from your PC such as a file on another PC connected to the same network For the procedure for accessing Setting Mode Web version see SETTING MODE If you print a file that includes print settings i e PCL PS or XPS files the settings will be applie...

Page 477: ... FTP Print to Valid and then configure the port number Administrator rights are required Performing FTP print Type ftp and then the IP address of the machine in the address bar of your PC s Web browser as shown below Example ftp 192 168 1 28 Drag and drop the file that you wish to print onto the lp folder that appears in your Web browser Printing of the file automatically begins If you print a fil...

Page 478: ...rint In Setting mode select Application Settings E mail Print Settings and register your e mail account Administrator rights are required Performing e mail print Using your PC s e mail software specify the e mail address of the machine in Address and send e mail attached with a file to be printed As an example the control commands include the following Function Command name Values Copies COPIES 1 ...

Page 479: ... If nothing is entered in the body text message of the e mail printing will take place according to the settings configured in Setting mode System Settings Printer Condition Settings Default Settings If you print a file that includes print settings i e PCL PS or XPS files the settings will be applied Enter a file type only when you wish to specify the page description language Normally there is no...

Page 480: ... JOBS Index Contents PRINTER When you tap the job status display jobs are displayed in a list To check the status of a printer job tap the Print tab When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing see the following items STOPPING DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS...

Page 481: ...he entry of a password to print or edit the file To directly print an encrypted PDF file on an FTP server or in a USB memory device etc connected to the machine reset the password and begin printing The PS3 expansion kit is required to use this function To print an encrypted PDF file using the printer driver enter the password when opening the file on your PC Printing is not possible if you do not...

Page 482: ...us display and tap the Print tab Tap the Spool key When the list contains an encrypted PDF file a message is displayed to indicate that an encrypted PDF file exists Tap the print job key for the encrypted PDF file You cannot select multiple encrypted PDF files Tap the Enter Password for Encrypted PDF key on the action panel Enter the password 32 characters or less and tap the Yes key When both a m...

Page 483: ...nts Operation PRINTER If printing stops because the machine ran out of paper or if the size of paper specified in the printer driver is not loaded in the machine a message will appear in the touch panel Printing will begin automatically when paper is loaded in the machine If paper of the desired size is not immediately available you can use paper that is set in a different tray If you changed to a...

Page 484: ...tents 03 059b htm 24 03 2011 2 59 32 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT Index Contents Overview PRINTER 4 steps in all Tap the job status display Tap the key of the job for which Paper Empty appeared Tap the Change Paper key on the action panel Tap the key for the tray containing the paper that you wish to use and tap ...

Page 485: ...e Selectable Border On Off On Off On Off Yes Selectable 2 Sided Print Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Fit To Page Yes Yes Yes No Yes 2 Binding Edge Selectable Selectable Selectable No Yes Black and White Print Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Staple 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Punch 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Paper Paper Size Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Custom Paper 7 size 7 size 7 size Yes Yes Paper Selection Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Output tra...

Page 486: ...lf Fold Multi Sheet Fold Half Fold Half Fold Half Fold Layout printing Yes Yes No No No PATTERN PRINT Yes Yes No No No Process JPEG images using the driver Yes Yes Yes No No Smoothing Yes Yes Yes No No Tandem Print Yes Yes Yes No Yes 10 Retention Yes Yes Yes No Yes DOCUMENT FILING Yes Yes Yes No Yes 10 Print and send Yes Yes Yes No No COLOUR MODE ADJUSTING FUNCTION Colour Adjustment Yes Yes Yes No...

Page 487: ... No Yes The specifications of each function in Windows PPD and Macintosh PPD vary depending on the operating system version and the application 1 Only Mac OS X 10 4 11 10 5 to 10 5 8 and 10 6 to 10 6 2 can be used 2 If a finisher or a saddle finisher is installed The punch module is also required in order to use the punch function 3 If a saddle finisher is installed 4 The horizontal and vertical p...

Page 488: ...IMAGE Index Contents Operation PRINTER This function registers images used as custom images from the printer driver to the machine This function is available in a Windows environment This function can be used when the SPDL2 c printer driver is used To prohibit the registration of custom images In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Copy Settings Prohibition of Custom Image Registrati...

Page 489: ...NTER 3 steps in all Click the Special Modes tab Select Custom Image Registration and click the Settings button Select the registration type and name of the custom image When Custom Stamp is selected in Registered Type a full colour non transparent stamp image is registered When Custom watermark is selected a single colour transparent watermark image is registered If you have attempted to store mul...

Page 490: ...m 24 03 2011 2 59 35 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N ADJUST PRINT POSITION ON ODD AND EVEN PAGES SEPARATELY Print position Index Contents Operation PRINTER This function sets different print positions margins separately for odd and even pages and prints the pages This function is available in a Windows environment This function can be used when the PCL6 or PCL5c printer driver is used ...

Page 491: ...s 03 063b htm 24 03 2011 2 59 36 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N ADJUST PRINT POSITION ON ODD AND EVEN PAGES SEPARATELY Print position Index Contents Overview PRINTER 3 steps in all Click the Advanced tab and click the Compatibility button Click the Print Position button Configure the print start positions for odd and even pages respectively and click the OK button Windows ...

Page 492: ...SERT PRESET DATA BEFORE OR AFTER EACH PAGE Page interleave Index Contents Operation PRINTER This function inserts a preset data item into every page during printing You can easily create documents with opened page spread that is made up of text on the left hand page and a memo space on the right hand page This function is available in a Windows environment This function can be used when the PCL6 o...

Page 493: ...NSERT PRESET DATA BEFORE OR AFTER EACH PAGE Page interleave Index Contents Overview PRINTER 3 steps in all Click the Special Modes tab Select Page Interleave and click the Settings button Set the overlay data to be inserted and set its insertion position Windows You have to create page data to be inserted in advance For the procedure for creating page data see Creating an overlay file in OVERLAY A...

Page 494: ...ages using the driver Index Contents Operation PRINTER In some situations a document containing a JPEG image may not be printed correctly This can be solved by changing the way the JPEG image is rendered When you print an original containing JPEG images this function allows you to select whether the images are rendered in the printer driver or the machine This function is available in a Windows en...

Page 495: ...ntents 03 066b htm 24 03 2011 2 59 38 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N CHANGING THE RENDERING METHOD AND PRINTING JPEG IMAGES Process JPEG images using the driver Index Contents Overview PRINTER 3 steps in all Click the Advanced tab and click the Compatibility button Click the Use driver to render JPEGs checkbox so that the checkmark appears Click the OK button Windows ...

Page 496: ...4 03 2011 2 59 39 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N PRINT THE SAME IMAGE IN TILE PATTERN Repeat print Index Contents Operation PRINTER This function prints the same image in tile pattern on a sheet This is useful for producing name cards and stickers This function is available in a Windows environment This function can be used when the PCL6 or PCL5c printer driver is used ...

Page 497: ...ntents 03 067b htm 24 03 2011 2 59 40 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N PRINT THE SAME IMAGE IN TILE PATTERN Repeat print Index Contents Overview PRINTER 4 steps in all Click the Special Modes tab Select Layout Print and click the Settings button Select Repeat Print In N Up Printing select the number of images per sheet and click the OK button Windows ...

Page 498: ...ope contents 03 068a htm 24 03 2011 2 59 40 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N PRINTING AT A PSEUDO ENHANCED RESOLUTION Smoothing Index Contents Operation PRINTER Resolution enhancement techniques RETs are used to smoothen the outlines of images The images are printed at a pseudo enhanced resolution This function is available in a Windows environment ...

Page 499: ...22A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 068b htm 24 03 2011 2 59 41 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N PRINTING AT A PSEUDO ENHANCED RESOLUTION Smoothing Index Contents Overview PRINTER 3 steps in all Click the Advanced tab and click the Compatibility button Select the Smoothing checkbox so that the checkmark appears Click the OK button Windows ...

Page 500: ...tion allows you to complete two tasks printing and sending with one operation from the printer driver Addresses must be stored in advance in the machine For more information see STORING CONTACTS You must complete the preparatory steps for using each sending function of the machine For more information see the explanation of each sending function This function is available in a Windows environment ...

Page 501: ...lect the Print and Send checkbox so that the checkmark appears Click the Get Address Book button From the Address Book list select the address to which you wish to send the data and click the Add button to add the address to the Destination list If you wish to send the data to all addresses click the Add All button To delete an address from the Destination list select the address and click the Del...

Page 502: ...G SIMULTANEOUSLY file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 03 075b htm 24 03 2011 2 59 42 PM Index Contents Overview The printer driver settings are applied to sending settings ...

Page 503: ...nsmission ENTERING DESTINATIONS The following sections explain the method to enter a destination fax number using the numeric keys and other various methods to retrieve the fax numbers stored in an address book BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS FAX TRANSMISSION IMAGE SETTINGS The following sections explains how to specify the 2 sided original enlarge reduce original scan and send sizes and also change th...

Page 504: ...e features SCANNING ORIGINALS The following sections explain Erase Slow Scan Mode Original Count and Verification Stamp features OPERATING FAX TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION REMOTELY The following sections explain Polling and other features SENDER RELATED FEATURES The following sections explain Fax Own Number Sending Own Name Select and Sending Line features ASSUMING A SPECIFIC USAGE The following sec...

Page 505: ...tion 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 htm 24 03 2011 2 59 43 PM Index CONNECTING AND USING AN EXISTING TELEPHONE FAX JOBS The job status screen allows you to stop or delete a job and check priority processes or settings CHECKING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITIES ...

Page 506: ...t has the core to the LINE socket on the machine Insert the other end the end without the core into a telephone line socket In some countries an adapter is required to connect the telephone line cable to the wall telephone socket as shown in the illustration 2 Set the telephone line type The machine s dial mode setting must be set to match the type of telephone line you are using If the setting is...

Page 507: ...ephone line manually This setting can only be activated in Canada 3 Make sure the main power switch is in the position 4 Checking the date and time Verify that the correct date and time are set in the machine Set the data and time in the setting mode of the machine To set the date and time of the machine In Setting mode select System Settings Default Settings Clock Adjust If Disabling of Clock Adj...

Page 508: ... THE MACHINE AS A FAX file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 001 htm 24 03 2011 2 59 44 PM Index Contents Settings Own Number and Name Set Sender Data Registration ...

Page 509: ...R key appears in the base screen To dial a number inside your PBX touch the R key before dialling to temporarily cancel the PBX Setting This Setting can only be activated in Germany The R key can be included in a fax number stored in an one touch key When the Speaker key is touched the PBX Setting is temporarily cancelled and the R key does not appear When the R key is touched before dialling an F...

Page 510: ...OPERATION GUIDE BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 007 htm 24 03 2011 2 59 45 PM Index Contents ...

Page 511: ...irectly or search the address book or number ENTERING DESTINATIONS Specify the original scan size exposure resolution etc IMAGE SETTINGS If necessary you can refer to the following Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS First tap the Fax icon on the home screen to enter fax mode CHANGING MODE...

Page 512: ...gle page or sending originals of different sizes at the same time 4 Set Others 5 Send the original Tap the Start key You can check the preview image by tapping the Preview key before tapping the Start key Before starting fax transmission tap the File key or Quick File key on the action panel to save the scanned original as data QUICK FILE FILE When the original is placed on the document glass When...

Page 513: ...610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 015 htm 24 03 2011 2 59 46 PM Index Contents When sending a fax in direct transmission mode Multiple originals cannot be scanned in direct transmission mode Tap the Start key to start transmission ...

Page 514: ...ber If you want to cancel the PBX settings temporarily when sending a fax Tap the R key before entering a fax number This function is not available in some countries and regions 1 step in all If you want to enter a pause between digits of the number The Pause key appears on the numeric keys when the destination fax number is entered Tap the Pause key to enter a hyphen If you want to specify multip...

Page 515: ...2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N ENTERING A PAUSE BETWEEN DIGITS OF THE NUMBER Index Contents FAX Enter a pause after the number used to dial out from a PBX for example after 0 or after the country code when dialling an international number 1 step in all Tap the Pause key A hyphen is entered when the Pause key is tapped once The Pause key appears on the numeric keys when the destination fax number is enter...

Page 516: ...t when you wish to send a fax to or poll multiple fax destinations When destinations of other scan modes are stored in addition to fax destinations an icon indicating the mode appears together with the name of the destination in each one touch key Fax Scan to E mail Internet Fax Direct SMTP Scan to FTP Scan to Network Folder Scan to Desktop Group key in which multiple addresses are stored A destin...

Page 517: ...top of the list The destinations displayed on the list can be narrowed with categories job types indexes and keywords For more information see ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN Tap the one touch key and tap to confirm the fax destination If you want to add a destination tap the other one touch key and tap If two or more destinations are selected or specified the total number of addresses appears next to Even if...

Page 518: ...ch number tap the Call Search Number key on the action panel USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION To retrieve a destination from a global address book tap the Global Address Search key on the action panel Retrieving a destination from a global address book To check the entered destinations tap the Confirm Address key on the action panel VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS Double...

Page 519: ...122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 019a htm 24 03 2011 2 59 49 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS Index Contents Operation FAX When multiple destinations have been selected you can display and check the destinations You can also delete a destination cancel selection of the destination if necessary ...

Page 520: ...ntents Overview FAX 2 steps in all Tap the Confirm Address key on the action panel Confirm the destination After the confirmation is completed tap If you wish to confirm details of the specified destination such as its type and name tap the Confirm Destination Information key or the Confirm Information for Address Selected Next key To cancel a specified destination Tap the key of the destination t...

Page 521: ...sing the numeric keys and tap the OK key When the search number is entered the stored address is retrieved and specified as a destination If an incorrect search number is entered Tap the C key to clear the number and enter the correct number The search number is programmed when the destination is stored in the address book If you do not know the search number tap the Print Individual List key on t...

Page 522: ...0_ex_ope contents 04 021a htm 24 03 2011 2 59 51 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK Index Contents Operation FAX If an LDAP server is configured in the setting mode Web version you can search for the desired destination in the global address book and obtain the fax number when performing a fax transmission ...

Page 523: ...ed it is not necessary to take step 2 In this case start from step 3 After the settings are completed tap In the base screen or address book screen tap the Global Address Search key on the action panel Tap of Item to select the object to be searched and tap Touch to Input Keyword to enter the initial of destination then tap the Start Search key The search results will appear after a brief interval...

Page 524: ...PM Index Contents Overview Tap the destination key and tap to confirm the fax destination If no names are found that match the search characters tap the Search Again key To add other destination continuously tap the address and tap To check the destination information Tap the Confirm Destination Information key on the action panel or double tap the destination key Tap to close the address informat...

Page 525: ...estinations of the FTP Desktop transmission and Scan to Network Folder are also shown in the transmission log The addresses shown in the transmission log can also be stored in an address book This is a convenient way to store the fax numbers and addresses of destinations that were manually entered However addresses of the FTP Desktop transmission cannot be stored from the machine If numeric keys w...

Page 526: ...s Overview FAX 2 steps in all Tap the key of the fax destination that you wish to redial The last 50 addresses used for transmission are displayed To cancel the resend setting Tap the highlighted key When you select the destination and tap the Register New Address in Address Book the destination can be stored in the address book This is convenient if you have entered a destination directly Tap the...

Page 527: ...ional number tap the Pause key between the identification number of an international telephone service company e g 001 and the country code e g 81 for Japan to insert a pause for smoother line connection The time in seconds set in Pause Time Setting of Setting mode defines the length of pause On the screen a hyphen indicates a pause If two seconds are set in Pause Time Setting tapping the Pause ke...

Page 528: ...he scanning process Quick On Line Sending If transmission cannot begin immediately because the line is in use all pages will be scanned into memory and the transmission will be reserved USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION To fax a large number of sheet originals When a fax transmission or reception is already in progress the following procedure is available to reserve a transmissi...

Page 529: ...ead of your fax One of the following functions is being used for transmission Broadcast transmission F code transmission Timer transmission Dual Page Scan Book Divide 2in1 Card Shot Job Build Original Count The document glass is being used except when the speaker is being used to dial To disable the Quick On Line Sending setting In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settin...

Page 530: ...he transmission in progress is completed ahead of any previously reserved transmissions Tap the Direct TX key on the action panel to send a fax USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE When transmission in direct transmission mode ends the mode automatically changes back to memory transmission m...

Page 531: ...ally rotated 90 degrees and transmitted in horizontal orientation Rotation Sending If the original is placed in horizontal orientation it is transmitted in that orientation without being rotated Rotation sending is not available for originals with A4R B5 or A5 8 1 2 x 11 R or 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 size To cancel the rotation sending setting In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Se...

Page 532: ...e the image will be automatically reduced to fit the receiving machine s paper width Example Reduced sizes and reduction ratios Transmitted image width Receiving machine s paper width Reduced size Ratio A3 11 x 17 B4 B4 1 0 84 A3 11 x 17 A4 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 A4R 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 R 1 0 71 B4 A4 8 1 2 x 11 A4R 1 0 84 To cancel the Auto Reduction Sending setting In Setting mode select System...

Page 533: ...N TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES Index Contents FAX The following original sizes can be transmitted Minimum original size Maximum original size Using the automatic document feeder 131 mm height x 140 mm width 5 1 8 height x 5 1 2 width 297 mm height x 1000 mm width 11 5 8 height x 39 3 8 width Using the document glass 297 mm height x 432 mm width 11 5 8 height x 17 width A long original can be trans...

Page 534: ...tomatically detect The standard sizes are set in Original Size Detector Setting in setting mode List of original size detector settings Selections Standard sizes detected original sizes Document Glass Document feeder tray automatic document feeder AB 1 A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B5R A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B5R 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 14 11 x 17 AB 2 A3 A4 A4R A5 B5 B5R 216 mm x 330 mm 8 1 2 x13 A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B...

Page 535: ... mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 029 htm 24 03 2011 2 59 57 PM Index Contents Inch 2 mm 8 1 2 x11 8 1 2 x11 R 5 1 2 x8 1 2 mm x 330 mm 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Inch 3 11 x17 8 1 2 x13 2 5 216 mm x 340 mm 8 1 2 x11 8 1 2 x11 R 5 1 2 x8 1 2 A4 A3 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 13 2 5 216 mm x 340 mm 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 ...

Page 536: ...ly operates in memory transmission mode In direct transmission mode or manual transmission mode the transmission will be cancelled Wait for a brief period and then try sending the fax again To cancel the transmission Cancel it from the job status screen STOPPING DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED To set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when the connection cannot ...

Page 537: ...ot answer the call within a preset period of time transmission will automatically be attempted again after a preset interval This function only operates in memory transmission mode To cancel the transmission Cancel it from the job status screen STOPPING DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED To set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when a transmission fails due to an ...

Page 538: ...ion confirmation message prior to fax transmission In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Default Settings Fax Dest Confirmation Mode To disable fax broadcast when Fax Dest Confirmation Mode is enabled In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Send Settings Disable Fax Broadcasting Destination specified by one touch key search number T...

Page 539: ...ntered three times for confirmation all the previous settings are cancelled and you will return to the base screen You can use the numeric keys to enter fax numbers serially In that case tap to enter the destination fax number to be added If the Sub Address key was tapped to enter a sub address and passcode the fax number must be re entered during confirmation After re entering the fax number tap ...

Page 540: ...ansmission operation is performed the transmission will be reserved and transmission will take place after fax reception is completed If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned a message will appear and scanning will stop When Quick On Line Sending is enabled for transmission the scanned originals are sent If Quick On Line Sending is not enabled transmission will be cancelled...

Page 541: ...document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Specify the destination fax number ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Start key to begin transmission When scanning is completed the machine beeps Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED When scanning is completed Job stored will...

Page 542: ...l Count File Quick File Memory Box Book Divide Poling 2 Sided Scan Search Global Address Book Resending will not take place when a direct transmission is not successful due to a communication error or other reason If a fax transmission is already in progress when the direct transmission operation is performed the direct transmission will wait until the previous transmission is finished When the pr...

Page 543: ...A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE Index Contents Overview FAX 3 steps in all Specify the destination fax number and tap the Send Directly key on the action panel ENTERING DESTINATIONS Only one destination can be specified A one touch key in which multiple destinations are stored cannot be used The destination cannot be retrieved from a global address book Place the original in the document feeder ...

Page 544: ... open the automatic document feeder and place the original on the document glass If a fax is being received when the transmission operation is performed the transmission will be reserved and transmission will take place after fax reception is completed If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned a message will appear and transmission will be cancelled Do not place any objects ...

Page 545: ...riginal Place the original on the document glass DOCUMENT GLASS When faxing a multi page original scan each page in order starting from the first page Specify the destination fax number ENTERING DESTINATIONS If you have another page to scan change pages and then tap the Start key Repeat until all originals have been scanned If no action is taken for one minute scanning automatically ends and the t...

Page 546: ...eport or in the Image Sending Activity Report PRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTS If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen is displayed scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved The Change Setting key can be tapped if necessary to change the exposure resolution scan size and send size for each original page scanned However when 2in1 or Card Shot is ...

Page 547: ...earch Global Address Book Resending will not take place when a direct transmission is not successful due to a communication error or other reason If a fax transmission is already in progress when the direct transmission operation is performed the direct transmission will wait until the previous transmission is finished When the previous transmission is completed the direct transmission will begin ...

Page 548: ...nd tap the Send Directly key on the action panel ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Place the original on the document glass DOCUMENT GLASS When faxing a multi page original scan each page in order starting from the first page Only one destinatio...

Page 549: ...al the fax is sent after the number is dialled and the connection is established If a person answers you will be able to hear his or her voice but you will not be able to speak When the speaker is used transmission takes place without scanning the original into memory A destination that includes an F code sub address and passcode cannot be used A one touch key that has multiple destinations or has...

Page 550: ...r or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS When the connection is established you will hear the dial tone through the machine s speaker After tapping the Speaker key use the slider that is displayed when you tap the Speaker Volume key or use key to adjust the volume of the speaker Specify the destination fax number ENTERING DESTINATIONS A one touch key in which multiple de...

Page 551: ...estination from the stored addresses open the detail confirmation screen and remove the destination in the screen To register destinations in a contact or group Tap the Register Edit Address key in the base screen or address book screen or tap the Register Address icon in the home screen For more information see STORING CONTACTS or STORING GROUPS When a one touch key is used to dial the number of ...

Page 552: ...X TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 038a htm 24 03 2011 3 00 06 PM Index Contents Operation Same Image as Fax Address key on the action panel ...

Page 553: ...utomatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Specify all destinations ENTERING DESTINATIONS After entering a destination using the numeric keys if you wish to enter another destination using the numeric keys tap before entering the next destination can be omitted before or after a destination entered using a one touch key If Must Input Next Address Key...

Page 554: ...e original pages in the document feeder tray all pages are scanned A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended If you placed the original on the document glass scan each page one at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate...

Page 555: ...2A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 039a htm 24 03 2011 3 00 07 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N RESENDING TO UNSUCCESSFUL BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DESTINATIONS Index Contents Operation FAX The results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen If transmission to any of the destinations failed resend the fax to those destinations ...

Page 556: ... same broadcast transmission key will appear in each of those modes After tapping the key of the completed broadcast transmission tap the Check Details of Selected Job key on the action panel Broadcast xxxx will appear as the destination of the broadcast job key The job control number that appeared on the touch panel when scanning ended appears in xxxx After tapping the Sending Failed tab tap the ...

Page 557: ...t filing resend screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered Perform the document filing resend procedure There is no need to re scan the original If the job was stored in a confidential folder or was stored as confidential file a password entry screen will appear after you tap the Retry key Enter the password Not using document filing You will return to the base screen with the unsuccessful ...

Page 558: ... using the PC Fax function in the same way that documents are printed Select the PC Fax driver as the printer driver for your computer and then select the Print command in the application Image data for transmission will be created and sent as a fax For the procedures for using this function see the PC Fax driver Help To use the PC Fax function the PC Fax driver must be installed For more informat...

Page 559: ...3 2011 3 00 09 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL 2 sided original Index Contents Operation FAX The automatic document feeder will automatically scan both sides of the document 2 sided scanning automatically turns off after transmission has ended 2 sided scanning is not possible when direct transmission or speaker transmission is performed ...

Page 560: ...ng the Original key tap the 2 sided original type Book key or the 2 sided original type Tablet key See the figure on the right to check the binding edge if the original and select the key to be tapped Tap the Image Orientation key with the same orientation as the placed original If this setting is not correct a suitable image may not be transmitted After the settings are completed tap To cancel 2 ...

Page 561: ...ransmitted is indicated as the Send size in the base screen In the above screen the scan size the placed original is A4 8 1 2 x 11 and the send size is auto For example if the scan size is A4 8 1 2 x 11 and the send size is B5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 the image will be reduced before transmission Only standard original sizes can be automatically detected Standard sizes When the original size is an inch size ...

Page 562: ... SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE Index Contents Operation FAX When the original size is not standard inch size or non standard size or is not detected correctly manually specify the original size When Long Size is selected the 2 sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed The image is sent in Mono2 only When Postcard Photo Size or a standard size direct entry is selected...

Page 563: ...E ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE Index Contents Overview FAX 2 steps in all Tap the appropriate original size key After the settings are completed tap After tapping the Original key tap the Scan Size key If you are sending a long original tap the Long Size key Use the automatic document feeder to scan a long original The maximum width that can be scanned is 1 000 mm 39 3 8 the maximum height is ...

Page 564: ...X 3110N MX 3610N SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES Index Contents Operation FAX When scanning a non standard size original such as a postcard specify the original size by numeric values after placing the original The width can be from 25 mm to 432 mm 1 to 17 and the height can be from 1 to 25 mm to 297 mm 11 5 8 When the scan size is specified by numeric values the send size c...

Page 565: ...ntents Overview FAX 4 steps in all After tapping the Scan Size key tap the Direct Entry key Specify the original size Tap the areas displaying sizes in width and height respectively and enter the sizes using the numeric keys It is convenient to use to finely adjust the entered size Tap the Original key Tap the OK key After the settings are completed tap twice On the base screen check that the spec...

Page 566: ...PECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE Index Contents Operation FAX Tap this key to specify the send size as a paper size If the specified send size is larger than the scan size the image will be enlarged If the specified send size is smaller than the scan size the image will be reduced The send size cannot be specified when Long Size is selected for the scan size or when the scan size is specified ...

Page 567: ...e Scan Size it may not be possible to select some sizes for the Send Size Size keys that cannot be specified for the Send Size cannot be tapped Tap the Image Orientation key with the same orientation as the original image If this setting is not correct a suitable image may not be transmitted After the settings are completed tap To configure the default setting of image orientation select System Se...

Page 568: ...IFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 047b htm 24 03 2011 3 00 15 PM Index Contents Overview Scan Size and the Send Size ...

Page 569: ...ocument feeder the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun However when Job Build or Preview Setting in Others is used the exposure can be changed each time a new set of originals is inserted Exposure settings Exposure Suggestion Auto This setting automatically adjusts the exposure for light and dark parts of the original Manual 1 2 Select this setting when the original consists...

Page 570: ...1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 048b htm 24 03 2011 3 00 16 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N CHANGING THE EXPOSURE Index Contents Overview FAX 2 steps in all After tapping the Exposure key tap the Manual key Adjust the exposure with the slider or When Auto is selected the exposure will be set to 3 After the adjustment tap ...

Page 571: ...your original has intricate pictures or diagrams A higher quality image will be produced than with the Fine setting Ultra Fine Select this setting when your original has intricate pictures or diagrams This setting gives the best image quality However transmission will take longer than with the other settings Half Tone Select this setting when your original is a photograph or has gradations of colo...

Page 572: ...THE RESOLUTION Index Contents Overview FAX 2 steps in all Tap the key of the desired resolution When your original is a photograph or has gradations of colour such as a colour original and you wish to produce a clearer image than Fine Super Fine or Ultra Fine used alone set the Half Tone checkbox to Halftone cannot be selected when Standard is used After the settings are completed tap Tap the Fax ...

Page 573: ...age in the preview screen As you can adjust the exposure and resolution to scan the original while checking it in the preview screen you can send a better quality original to the destination PREVIEW SCREEN The settings and functions that can be changed while and after an image is scanned for preview are as follows Exposure Send Size 2 Sided Booklet Tablet Resolution Erase Job Build 2in1 Timer Own ...

Page 574: ...s in orientation are automatically adjusted when faxes are received When a fax smaller than A4 8 1 2 x 11 size is received the size of the paper used for printing will vary depending on the orientation vertical or horizontal in which the sender placed the original If a print job such as the copy or printer function has already been executed when printing the received data the first reserved job is...

Page 575: ...G A FAX AUTOMATICALLY Index Contents Overview FAX 2 steps in all The machine rings and fax reception begins automatically A beep sounds when reception ends The faxes are printed automatically If a password entry screen appears A password is registered to print the received fax data When the correct password is entered the received fax is printed PRINTING A PASSWORD PROTECTED FAX Hold setting for r...

Page 576: ...dex Contents Operation FAX A fax can be received manually using the touch panel manually When answering the telephone by tapping the Speaker key you will be able to hear the voice of the caller but you will not be able to speak You can receive a fax after answering a call on an extension telephone Remote reception can also be used to receive a fax RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING A CALL ON THE EXTE...

Page 577: ...of extension telephone while the telephone is ringing When the Speaker key is tapped the Manual Reception and Speaker Volume keys appear Adjust the volume by using the slider that is displayed when you tap the Speaker Volume key or using If the received fax data remains unprinted it will cause the fax memory to fill up which may prevent some faxes from being received If this function is enabled yo...

Page 578: ...ived Data Print When the previously programmed 4 digit password is entered using the numeric keys printing begins The Cancel key can be tapped to close the password entry screen however the data in memory key will blink in the touch panel The password entry screen will reappear when you tap the blinking key or change modes To display the received data list screen after entering the password In Set...

Page 579: ...2011 3 00 21 PM Index Contents The received faxes will be stored in memory regardless of whether they are received automatically or manually When the received data is transferred to other machine data stored in memory is also transferred At that time the same password entry screen will appear as for printing Forwarding will not take place unless the password is entered ...

Page 580: ...he printed data is automatically deleted from memory If the power is turned off at the specified time printing will start at the timing when the power is turned on This function can be specified when the Received Data Image Check Setting is enabled If Hold Setting for Received Data Print is enabled this function is not available To print received data at the specified time In Setting mode select S...

Page 581: ...Important points when using this function If the received fax data is not printed or deleted the fax memory will run low and the machine will not be able to receive any faxes When using this function you should print the received data as soon as possible without leaving it in the fax memory The amount of free fax memory space is shown in the system area at the top of the screen Depending on the si...

Page 582: ... next message appears while you are configuring settings of any type and you tap the Received Data icon the settings that you are configuring will be cancelled Tapping the Received Data icon while Received Data Image Check Setting is disabled displays the confidential reception data file To show thumbnails of the received images tap the Thumbnail key To delete a received image tap the Delete key o...

Page 583: ...ll images that have been selected by Select All Use these keys to enlarge or reduce an image Rotates image counterclockwise or clockwise A preview image is an image for the touch panel It will differ from the actual print result Tap the Erase Specified Range key to delete unwanted area of the image Specify the image area you wish to delete in the Erase Specified Range screen To forward the selecte...

Page 584: ...ted to a different line than the machine If some pages of a fax that is being forwarded were successfully printed only those pages that were not printed will be forwarded A forwarded fax becomes a fax transmission job If transmission does not take place because the transmission was cancelled or an error occurred the fax will be held in memory until it can be printed All faxes received are forwarde...

Page 585: ..._ope contents 04 058b htm 24 03 2011 3 00 25 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES Fax data forward Index Contents Overview FAX 4 steps in all Tap the Setting mode key on the Home screen Tap the Fax Data Receive Forward key Tap the Fax Settings key Tap the Execute key in Forward Received Data to begin forwarding ...

Page 586: ... inbound routing settings for all received data For the procedure for accessing the setting mode Web version see the Quick Start Guide The following explanation assumes that the setting mode Web version has been accessed with administrator rights Whether or not to forward data for each forwarding table can be quickly set In Setting mode select Application Settings Forward Received Data and tap Val...

Page 587: ...r or not to have the machine to print the faxes to forward when inbound routing is enabled After the settings are completed be sure to click the Store button Always Print Always prints received data before forwarding the data Print at Error Prints received data only when an error prevents forwarding Save Only at Error Saves received data only when an error prevents forwarding For the saved data th...

Page 588: ...er whose faxes will be forwarded To forward all received data select Forward All Received Data To forward only data received from specific senders select Forward Received Data from Below Sender To forward all data except data from specific senders select Forward Received Data from Senders except Below Select the appropriate senders from the list and click the Add button When selecting senders from...

Page 589: ...ok You can specify multiple registered addresses or telephone numbers from the address book of the machine Up to 1 000 recipients can be registered for Recipients 1 2 and 3 in total When you select the recipients from the address book up to 400 recipients can be registered for network folder FTP Desktop Internet fax and fax Enter a recipient directly and specify the recipient Specify this informat...

Page 590: ...e forwarding permission settings that appear here are linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 10 If you wish to use different forwarding conditions than those set in step 10 set the forwarding permission settings To use the inbound routing function enable the forwarding tables that you wish to use from among the stored tables To delete a forwarding table click the checkbox next to the tabl...

Page 591: ...60a htm 24 03 2011 3 00 27 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY Index Contents Operation FAX Received faxes can be forwarded manually after receipt This function is available when System Settings Operation Settings Preview Setting Received Data Image Check Setting is enabled in Setting mode The factory default setting is disabled ...

Page 592: ...apping the Review Received Data key on the action panel in the job status screen Tap the key of the received data you wish to forward and tap the Forward to Other Address key Multiple received data items can be selected Specify the destination in the displayed address book screen and forward the data If you wish to select the image to forward go to step 3 To store the sender fax number as a number...

Page 593: ...VED DATA MANUALLY file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 060b htm 24 03 2011 3 00 28 PM Index Contents Overview Specify the forwarding destination and forward the image ...

Page 594: ...a htm 24 03 2011 3 00 28 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N SAVING RECEIVED DATA Index Contents Operation FAX You can save received faxes in the document filing folder This function is available when System Settings Operation Settings Preview Setting Received Data Image Check Setting is enabled in Setting mode The factory default setting is disabled ...

Page 595: ...he received data list by tapping the job status display and then tapping the Check Received Data key on the action panel in the job status screen Tap the key of the received data you wish to save and tap the Save Data to Folder key on the action panel Multiple received data items can be selected If you wish to select the image to save go to step 3 To store the sender fax number as a number for All...

Page 596: ... fax number for each branch Specify 2in1 Specify Erase Tap the Start key Scan and send the original Call the registered program Tap the Start key Scan and send the original Considerable time is required to send the documents each month because the above settings must be selected In addition mistakes are occasionally made when selecting the settings When a program is stored settings are selected wi...

Page 597: ...a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission The same settings can be used repeatedly for transmission The following contents cannot be stored in programs Tapping the Speaker key Custom Size Card Shot page move and unspecified erase during preview Metadata Entry Send Settings and Own Name Select Up to 48 programs can be stored Up to 500 destinations can be stored in o...

Page 598: ...ic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Tap Call Program key on the action panel Configure additional settings For the called program additionally configure the following settings Image settings Original scan size Send size Others Timer Transmission Card Shot File Quick File Own Name Select Transaction Report The setting stored in the program cannot be ...

Page 599: ...tm 24 03 2011 3 00 30 PM Index Contents Overview A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended If you placed the original on the document glass scan each page one at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key ...

Page 600: ...e shadows tend to form but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows Scanning a thick book Erase modes If a ratio setting is used in combination with an erase setting the erase width will change according to the selected ratio This function erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows For example if you set an erase width ...

Page 601: ...Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 063a htm 24 03 2011 3 00 31 PM Index Contents Operation 10 mm 1 2 The setting changed here will apply to System Settings Copy Settings Copy Setting Erase Width Adjustment in Setting mode ...

Page 602: ...tapped all the checkboxes are set to Place the original Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Enter the destination fax number ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the Erase key Specify the erase edge on the reverse side when erasing edges of one to three sides of Up Down Left an...

Page 603: ... the desired value by the numeric keys then adjust it with After the settings are completed tap To cancel the erase settings Tap the Clear key Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have end...

Page 604: ...ion FAX Original scan size Transmitted image A3 11 x 17 x 1 page A4 8 1 2 x 11 x 2 page The left and right sides of an original can be transmitted as two separate pages This function is useful when you wish to fax the left and right pages of a book or other bound document as separate pages When using dual page scan the original must be placed on the document glass This function can be enabled when...

Page 605: ...MENT GLASS Align the centre of the original with the appropriate size mark Enter the destination fax number ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the Dual Page Scan key A checkmark appears on the icon After the settings are completed tap the Back key To cancel the Dual Page Scan setting Tap the Dual Page Scan key to clear the checkmark Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original...

Page 606: ...610_ex_ope contents 04 064b htm 24 03 2011 3 00 33 PM Index Contents Overview settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that transmission has ended ...

Page 607: ... MX 3110N MX 3610N SPLITTING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELY Book divide Index Contents Operation FAX The opened pages of a saddle stitch pamphlet are split by page according to actual page order When using this function you do not need to sort the original pages to be sent This function can be enabled when the original size setting is set to Auto The document glass is n...

Page 608: ...hat the binding edge is correct After the settings are completed tap To cancel the Book Divide setting Tap the Off key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Enter the destination fax number ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the Book Divide key Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original Tap the Preview key t...

Page 609: ...TING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELY file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 065b htm 24 03 2011 3 00 35 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 610: ...nt feeder tray or on the document glass and have it scanned at the reserved time of transmission Up to 94 timer transmissions can be stored at once This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial If another transmission is in progress when the specified time arrives the timer operation will begin after that transmission is finished Only one timer pollin...

Page 611: ...ATION GUIDE SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 066a htm 24 03 2011 3 00 35 PM Index Contents Operation ...

Page 612: ...document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination fax number ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the Timer key Specify the time hour and minute in 24 hour format Tap the areas displaying the hour and minute respectively and enter the values using the numeric keys It is convenient to use to finely adjust the time The setting will ...

Page 613: ...re information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray all pages are scanned A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended and the machine stands by for transmission If you placed the original on the document glass scan each page one at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat until al...

Page 614: ...original pages and wish to reduce the number of pages sent For the standard size A4 8 1 2 x 11 or B5 or A5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 original pages are scanned from both the single pass feeder and document glass Transmission is not possible at a size smaller than the original size The 2in1 is only available for originals with A4 8 1 2 x 11 or B5 or A5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 size This function cannot be used in direct ...

Page 615: ... not correct a suitable image may not be transmitted After the settings are completed tap Place the original Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Enter the destination fax number ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the 2in1 key A checkmark appears on the icon To cancel the 2in1...

Page 616: ...ll pages are scanned A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended If you placed the original on the document glass scan each page one at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended Tap...

Page 617: ...ation FAX Send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page without the need to send each side separately When using this function the original must be placed on the document glass If the original size is larger than the send size it will result in a sending failure Check the original size once more and specify it again The ratio cannot be specified and Rotation Sending Setting cannot be...

Page 618: ...lue close to the desired ratio value by the numeric keys then adjust it by tapping After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence Place a card face down on the document glass DOCUMENT GLASS Enter the destination fax number ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the Card Shot key To enlarge or reduce the images to fit the paper based on the entered original size set the Fi...

Page 619: ...he preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED However settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen Place a card face up on the document glass and tap the Start key to scan the reverse side Before scanning the back of the card tap the Change Setting key on the touch panel to change the exposure Tap the Read End key If...

Page 620: ...riginals in both the automatic document feeder and on the document glass Use this function when there are more original pages than can be placed at once in the automatic document feeder When scanning originals that are separated into sets scan the set that has the first page first The settings that you select for the first set can be used for all remaining sets This function is not available for Q...

Page 621: ...e stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line on the tray Originals can also be placed on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Enter the destination fax number ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Job Build key A checkmark appears on the icon To cancel the Job Build setting Tap the Job Build key to clear the checkmark Tap the Start key to scan the first set Tap the Preview key t...

Page 622: ... key If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved The Change Setting key can be tapped to change the exposure resolution scan size and send size for each original page scanned However when Job Build is used in combination with 2in1 in Others only the exposure can be changed when scanning each even numbered p...

Page 623: ...ine automatically detects the size of each original This feature can only be used with the following combinations of original sizes A3 and B4 A3 and B5 B4 and A4 A4 and B5 A4R and B5 B4 and A4R B4 and A5 B5 and A5 11 x 17 and 8 1 2 x 14 11 x 17 and 8 1 2 x 13 11 x 17 and 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Once mixed size originals has been selected an original scan size cannot be specified Once the original scan size ...

Page 624: ... together in the far left corner of the document feeder tray AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Enter the destination fax number ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Mixed Size Original key For mixed size originals set Original to Auto A checkmark appears on the icon To cancel the Mixed Size Original setting Tap the Mixed Size Original key to clear the checkmark Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original...

Page 625: ...04 071a htm 24 03 2011 3 00 42 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N SENDING A THIN ORIGINAL Slow scan mode Index Contents Operation FAX Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder This function helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding When slow scan mode is selected 2 sided scanning is not possible ...

Page 626: ...nals are inserted with too much force they may crumple and misfeed Enter the destination fax number ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Slow Scan Mode key A checkmark appears on the icon After the settings are completed tap To cancel the Slow Scan Mode setting Tap the Slow Scan Mode key to clear the checkmark Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original Tap the Preview key to check the preview of...

Page 627: ...unt Index Contents Operation FAX Count the number of scanned original sheets and display the count before transmission Checking the number of scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets not the number of scanned original pages For example when a 2 sided original is transmitted the number 1 ...

Page 628: ...ed original pages For example when 2 sided copying is performed using one original the number 1 will appear to indicate that one Place originals in the automatic document feeder AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Enter the destination fax number ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Original Count key A checkmark appears on the icon After the settings are completed tap To cancel the Original Count setting Tap the ...

Page 629: ... and the reverse side page Tap the OK key to start transmission If this function is combined with Job Build the count result is displayed after the Read End key has been tapped If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets Tap the Cancel key and then tap the OK key in the message screen to clear all scanned data Scan settings and destination settings will...

Page 630: ...anned using the automatic document feeder allowing you to verify that all originals were correctly scanned To use the verification stamp function the optional stamp unit must be installed When 2 sided originals are used the front of each original is stamped twice If an error occurs during scanning an original that was not scanned may be stamped When the O mark that is stamped on originals starts t...

Page 631: ...x number ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the Verification Stamp key A checkmark appears on the icon After the settings are completed tap the Back key To cancel the Verification Stamp setting Tap the Verification Stamp key to clear the checkmark Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more inf...

Page 632: ...t is automatically printed out to alert you when a transmission fails or when a broadcast transmission is performed The transaction report contains a description of the transmission date start time name of other party time required number of pages result etc INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN Transaction reports are printed based on conditions set in the setting mode however you can tempor...

Page 633: ... To cancel the transaction report settings Tap the Do not Print key Even if the Print Original Image checkbox is selected the original cannot be printed when speaker dialling manual transmission direct transmission polling reception or F code transmission is used Place the original Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DO...

Page 634: ...to include part of the transmitted original in the transaction report Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray all pages are scanned A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmiss...

Page 635: ...d To set the date and time In Setting mode select System Settings Default Settings Clock Adjust To store a sender name and sender fax number In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Operation Settings Own Number and Name Set Sender Data Registration If you intend to use own number sending be sure to configure this information To add the number of pages to be transmitted In Settin...

Page 636: ...X2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 075 htm 24 03 2011 3 00 47 PM Index Contents To select a sender fax number or destination In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Send Settings Sender Destination Name Change ...

Page 637: ... 04 076a htm 24 03 2011 3 00 48 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N TEMPORARILY CHANGING THE SENDER INFORMATION Own name select Index Contents Operation FAX You can temporarily change sender information to be used in the own number sending by selecting from data stored separately The function is released when the transmission with the changed sender information ends ...

Page 638: ...11 3 00 49 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N TEMPORARILY CHANGING THE SENDER INFORMATION Own name select Index Contents Overview FAX 2 steps in all Tap the sender information key to specify the sender information used for own number sending After the settings are completed tap To cancel the sender information settings Tap the Clear key Tap the Others key and tap the Own Name Select key ...

Page 639: ...call the transmitting machine and initiate reception of a document in that machine Because the receiving machine initiates reception of a document this is called Polling Reception Make sure there is no original in the machine when using the polling reception function The function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function The receiving machine b...

Page 640: ...ing setting Tap the Polling key to clear the checkmark Enter the destination fax number ENTERING DESTINATIONS Multiple fax numbers can be entered maximum of 500 Polling will take place in the order that the multiple fax numbers were entered Polling multiple machines is called Multi Polling To enter multiple fax numbers tap after entering a fax number and enter the next fax number In this procedure...

Page 641: ...e the manual polling reception when you must start polling after listening to a recorded greeting such as when using a fax information service Make sure there is no original in the machine when using the polling reception function This function cannot be used to poll multiple machines serial polling The function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling...

Page 642: ...e dial tone through the machine s speaker Enter the destination fax number ENTERING DESTINATIONS One touch key for a contact or group in which multiple destinations are stored and one touch key for which an address other than fax number is stored cannot be used After tapping the Speaker key you can tap the Speaker Volume key to adjust the volume of the speaker Tap the Others key and tap the Pollin...

Page 643: ...N ANOTHER MACHINE POLLS YOUR MACHINE Polling memory Index Contents FAX Sending a document that has been scanned into memory when another machine polls your machine is called Polling Memory Prior to polling the document that will be faxed to the other machine must be scanned into a polling memory box SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO POLLING MEMORY This function can only be used when the other machine is Su...

Page 644: ... machines that can use polling memory When a machine requests fax transmission you can only allow the machine to use polling memory if its programmed sender fax number matches a fax number stored in your machine as a polling passcode number This function is called Polling Security Setting To use this function first store polling passcode numbers the sender fax numbers programmed in the other machi...

Page 645: ...610N MX 3110N MX 3610N SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO POLLING MEMORY Index Contents Operation FAX Follow these steps to scan a document into the memory box for polling transmission Public Box If another document remains in the memory box Public Box the newly scanned document is added to the previous document In this case the number of polling times will be the number set for the newly scanned document ...

Page 646: ...key and tap the Memory Box key Tap the Polling Memory tab Tap the Public Box key from the folder list Tap the Change Number of Times key on the action panel Tap the Once key or Unlimited key to specify the number of times Tap the Once key if you want the document cleared from memory after it is transmitted Tap the Unlimited key to allow polling an unlimited number of times After the settings are c...

Page 647: ...tents Overview When the original is scanned a preview image appears in the touch panel If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray all pages are scanned If you placed the original on the document glass scan each page one at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End ...

Page 648: ...3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 082a htm 24 03 2011 3 00 54 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE PUBLIC BOX Index Contents Operation FAX You can check the document stored in the machine s memory box public box for memory polling ...

Page 649: ... MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE PUBLIC BOX Index Contents Overview FAX 4 steps in all Tap the Others key and tap the Memory Box key Tap the Polling Memory tab Tap the Public Box key from the folder list When nothing is stored in the Public Box the Public Box key will be greyed out Tap the Image Check key to check the document To print the document tap the Print key ...

Page 650: ...MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 083a htm 24 03 2011 3 00 55 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N DELETING A DOCUMENT FROM THE PUBLIC BOX Index Contents Operation FAX Delete a document from the memory box public box when it is no longer required ...

Page 651: ...nts Overview FAX 5 steps in all Tap the Others key and tap the Memory Box key Tap the Polling Memory tab Tap the Public Box key from the folder list When nothing is stored in the Public Box the Public Box key will be greyed out Tap the Empty out Box key Tap the Delete key The document is deleted and you return to the screen of step 2 You can tap the Image Check key to check the image in the touch ...

Page 652: ...he ITU T in the table below This function allows the machine to communicate with other machines that also support F code It enables exchange of confidential documents confidential communication retrieval polling and distribution polling memory of information distribution of information to multiple destinations relay broadcast transmission with other machines that support F code communication An F ...

Page 653: ...N file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 085 htm 24 03 2011 3 00 57 PM Index Contents An F code consists of a sub address and passcode and cannot be longer than 20 digits ...

Page 654: ...address and passcode in each memory box and store them After you have created a memory box notify the other party of F code communication of the sub address and passcode of the box To use the following F code communication functions F code memory boxes must be created in your machine F code confidential reception F code polling memory F code relay broadcast transmission To use the following F code...

Page 655: ... memory F code relay broadcast transmission When performing an F code operation the F code sub address and passcode is appended to the fax number that is dialled Check the F code sub address and passcode stored in the memory box in the other machine before you perform an F code transmission It is convenient to store an F code sub address and passcode together with the fax number in a one touch key...

Page 656: ...r can direct the transmission specifically to the user of the box This is convenient for sending sensitive documents that you do not wish people other than the recipient to see or when the receiving machine is shared by multiple departments To print an F code confidential fax the print passcode must be entered CHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY F CODE CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION The F code sub address and pass...

Page 657: ...N CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION USING F CODES Index Contents Operation FAX Send a fax to a destination fax number after adding the F code sub address and passcode If necessary the F code confidential transmission can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission It is convenient to store this function in a program The F code confidential transmission cannot be registered a...

Page 658: ...the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Document Glass Specify the destination If the sub address and passcode are stored in the one touch key it is not necessary to take steps 3 to 6 Go to step 7 ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Sub Address key Enter Enter the sub address using the numeric keys Tap the Sub Address key Enter If a passcode has been omitted in the memory box of the destination mac...

Page 659: ...ITTED Scanning of the original starts If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray all pages are scanned A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended If you placed the original on the document glass scan each page one at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the ...

Page 660: ...asscode Confidential faxes are automatically given priority in the print job queue The fax is automatically cleared from the memory box after being printed To print transaction report automatically when an F code confidential fax is received In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Default Settings Transaction Report Print Select Setting Confidential Reception If you...

Page 661: ...code If you make a mistake a message will appear and you will return to the entry screen You can tap the Cancel key to return to step 4 Tap the Check Image key to check the document To print the document tap the Print key The machine rings and the fax is received A beep sounds when reception ends Tap the Others key and tap the Memory Box key From the Confidential tab tap the Check received data li...

Page 662: ... CHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY F CODE CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 090b htm 24 03 2011 3 01 01 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 663: ... in the other machine Otherwise polling reception will not take place Verify the F code sub address and passcode of the memory box in the other machine before you perform F code polling reception The receiving machine bears the telephone charges of the transmission If necessary use the F code polling reception in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission Only one polling rece...

Page 664: ...To cancel the Polling setting Tap the Polling key to clear the checkmark Specify the destination ENTERING DESTINATIONS If the sub address and passcode are stored in the one touch key the following sub steps are not necessary Go to step 8 Tap the Sub Address key Enter Enter the sub address using the numeric keys Tap the Sub Address key Enter If a passcode has been omitted in the memory box of the d...

Page 665: ...RATION GUIDE POLLING RECEPTION USING F CODES file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 091b htm 24 03 2011 3 01 03 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 666: ...de memory box polling memory in your machine to that machine The other machine must correctly specify the F code sub address and passcode configured in your machine Otherwise transmission will not take place An original to be sent to the other machine using F code polling communication must be previously scanned into an F code memory box polling memory in your machine If other documents have alrea...

Page 667: ...ENT GLASS Tap the Others key and tap the Memory Box key Tap the Polling Memory tab Tap the folder of the F code memory polling box To change the number of times tap the Change Number of Times key on the action panel Tap the Once key if you want the document cleared from memory after it is transmitted Tap the Unlimited key to allow polling an unlimited number of times After the settings are complet...

Page 668: ...4 092b htm 24 03 2011 3 01 04 PM Index Contents Overview Scanning of the original starts If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray all pages are scanned If you placed the original on the document glass scan each page one at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key ...

Page 669: ...MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 093a htm 24 03 2011 3 01 05 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE F CODE MEMORY POLLING BOX Index Contents Operation FAX You can check the document stored in the F code memory polling box A document in a memory box cannot be printed while the document is being transmitted ...

Page 670: ... 04 093b htm 24 03 2011 3 01 05 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE F CODE MEMORY POLLING BOX Index Contents Overview FAX 4 steps in all Tap the Polling Memory tab Tap the folder of the F code memory polling box Tap the Others key and tap the Memory Box key Tap the Check Registered Data key on the action panel To print the document tap the Print key ...

Page 671: ...3610_ex_ope contents 04 094a htm 24 03 2011 3 01 06 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N DELETING A DOCUMENT STORED FOR F CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION Index Contents Operation FAX Delete the document stored in an F code memory polling box in order to be able to store a new document A document in a memory box cannot be deleted while the document is being transmitted ...

Page 672: ...01 06 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N DELETING A DOCUMENT STORED FOR F CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION Index Contents Overview FAX 4 steps in all Tap the Others key and tap the Memory Box key Tap the Polling Memory tab Tap the folder of the F code memory polling box Tap the Empty out Box key on the action panel You can tap the Check Registered Data key to check the image in the touch panel before deleting...

Page 673: ...e timer transmission function to further reduce cost SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME TIMER TRANSMISSION F code sub address and passcode and the destination in the F code relay broadcast memory box of the recipient machine should be verified by the recipient in advance Before using this function program the destination machines in the F code relay broadcast memory box in the relay machine It is n...

Page 674: ...ex_ope contents 04 095a htm 24 03 2011 3 01 07 PM Index Contents Operation When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination the date and time of reception cannot be printed on the faxes Receiving Date Time Print is disabled To create F code memory boxes In Setting mode select System Settings F Code Memory Box ...

Page 675: ...ass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination ENTERING DESTINATIONS If the sub address and passcode are stored in the one touch key it is not necessary to take steps 3 to 5 Go to step 6 Tap the Sub Address key Enter Enter the sub address using the numeric keys Tap the Sub Address key Enter If a passcode has been omitted in the memory box of the destination machine it is not ...

Page 676: ...ed A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended If you placed the original on the document glass scan each page one at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended When the relay machine receives the...

Page 677: ...form the requesting party who you will communicate with using F code relay request transmission of the sub address and passcode of the F code relay broadcast memory box in your machine Program the destination machines in the F code relay broadcast memory box when you create the box in your machine CREATING MEMORY BOXES IN THE MACHINE FOR F CODE COMMUNICATION It is not necessary for the destination...

Page 678: ...OPERATION GUIDE RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION USING F CODES file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 096 htm 24 03 2011 3 01 08 PM ...

Page 679: ...one speak to the other party and then press the START key to fax an original that has been placed to that party You can also press the START key when an original is not placed to receive a fax After connecting an extension telephone configure the External Telephone Setting in setting mode You cannot send a fax by using the extension telephone Connect an extension telephone that has a modular socke...

Page 680: ...ration FAX Follow the steps below if you need to start fax reception after answering a call and speaking on the extension telephone If you are using a pulse line set the extension to send tone signals To receive a fax after answering a call on the extension telephone In Setting mode select System Settings Fax Data Receive Forward Fax Settings Receive Settings to enable Manual Reception To change t...

Page 681: ...N THE EXTENSION TELEPHONE Remote reception Index Contents Overview FAX 3 steps in all While the machine is ringing pick up the receiver to speak Signal the machine to start fax reception Press from the extension telephone Replace the receiver The machine beeps when reception ends If the extension phone is still lifted when fax transmission ends an alarm signal will sound and a message will appear ...

Page 682: ...m the fax job status tap the mode display and select the fax When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing see the following items STOPPING DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS Fax jobs include reception timer transmission and data forwarding as well as usual tran...

Page 683: ...of the job queue list until the specified time is reached The job is printed at the specified time and moves to the completed job list If another job is being printed at the specified time the job being printed is prioritized over the timer job Retry jobs A retry job appears at the end of the job queue list Transmission of the retry job starts according to the Recall in Case of Line Busy setting i...

Page 684: ...0Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 04 109 htm 24 03 2011 3 01 13 PM Index Contents After the fax is printed the status changes to Received Then a job is added for which the status field displays Waiting in the job queue list When forwarding the received fax is completed the field changes to Forward OK ...

Page 685: ...mage Sending Activity Report contains useful information such as the types of errors that occurred The most recent 200 transactions are included in the report You can have the machine print the Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reaches 201 or at a specified time once a day only The contents of the Image Sending Activity Report are erased when the report is printed ...

Page 686: ...e in Super G3 mode Forwarding The received data was forwarded NO RESPONSE No response from the receiving party BUSY Transmission was not possible because the other party was already using the line CANCEL The transmission was cancelled while in progress MEMORY OVER The memory became full during quick on line transmission MEM FULL The memory became full during reception LENGTH OVER The transmitted f...

Page 687: ...cation RX NO F CODE POLL F code polling was attempted however the other machine did not have an F code polling memory box NO F FUNC F code communication was attempted however the other machine does not support F code communication NO F CODE F code communication was refused by the other machine because of an incorrect sub address or other reason M BOX xxxxxx Data was received and stored in a confid...

Page 688: ...NTERING DESTINATIONS This section explains a method for directly entering a destination and methods for retrieving destination addresses stored in an address book TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE IMAGE SETTINGS This section explains how to specify the 2 sided original enlarge reduce original scan and send sizes and also change the exposure or original image type resolution data format and colour mode CHECKIN...

Page 689: ...S This section explains the Erase Slow Scan Mode Blank Page Skip Original Count and Verification Stamp features SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS This section explains the I Fax own address send Transaction report and Timer transmission features CHECKING THE INTERNET FAX ACTIVITY LOG RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES PRINTING RECEIVED DATA There are various ways to print received data FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA SAVING RECE...

Page 690: ...ned file is sent to a specified folder of an FTP server When the file is sent it is also possible to send an e mail to a previously stored e mail address to inform the recipient of the location of the file Scan to Desktop The scanned file is sent to a specified folder on your computer To use Scan to Desktop software must be installed from the Sharpdesk Network Scanner Utilities CD ROM that accompa...

Page 691: ... see SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE Data entry mode In data entry mode information entered using the touch panel or automatically generated by the machine is sent to a directory on an FTP server or an application on a PC as a metadata file in XML format Installing the application integration module is required to use the metadata delivery function The application integration module can be comb...

Page 692: ...st store sender information configure server settings store destinations in the address book and perform other required operations 1 Make sure the main power switch is in the position 2 Checking the date and time Verify that the correct date and time are set in the machine Set the data and time in the setting mode of the machine To set the date and time of the machine In Setting mode select System...

Page 693: ...ver settings default settings for the network scanner and settings for Internet Fax To configure server settings In Setting mode select Network Settings Services Settings Administrator rights are required To configure basic settings for the network scanner In Setting mode select Application Settings Network Scanner Settings Administrator rights are required To configure settings for Internet Fax I...

Page 694: ...AGE SEND To store your computer in the machine as a destination for Scan to Desktop Network Scanner Tool must be installed from the Sharpdesk Network Scanner Utilities CD ROM that accompanies the machine To scan an image to your computer Network Scanner Tool must be running on your computer To install Network Scanner Tool see the Shapdesk Installation Guide that accompanies the machine When a stan...

Page 695: ...sion Do so from the job status screen STOPPING DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED To set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when the connection cannot be established because the line is busy or for other reasons In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Internet Fax Settings Send Settings Recall in Case of Line Busy When a communication error occur...

Page 696: ...methods are available in the Image Send mode including Scan to E mail and Scan to FTP The base screen layout slightly differs depending on how image is sent To set the screen that is initially displayed when the Image Send key is tapped In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Operation Settings Default Settings Default Display Setting Select one of the following screens for the ...

Page 697: ... automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Tap the address key to directly enter the destination and specify the address to send scan data ENTERING DESTINATIONS Specify the original scan size exposure file format and other items IMAGE SETTINGS First to place the machine in a desired image send mode tap the appropriate icon in the Home screen CHANGI...

Page 698: ...SCANNING ORIGINALS For other settings see the contents of Image Send Use Others other than the time when using scan settings such as sending two pages as a single page or sending originals of different sizes at the same time 4 Set Others 5 Send the original Tap the Start key You can check the preview of an image by tapping the Preview key When the original is placed on the document glass Repeat th...

Page 699: ...MITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES Index Contents IMAGE SEND The following original sizes can be transmitted Minimum original size mm Maximum original size mm Using the automatic document feeder 131 mm height x 140 mm width 5 1 8 height x 5 1 2 width 297 mm height x 1000 mm width 11 5 8 height x 39 3 8 width Using the document glass 297 mm height x 1000 mm width 11 5 8 height x 17 width A long original can b...

Page 700: ...that the machine can automatically detect To specify the standard size select System Settings Device Control Original Size Detector Setting in Setting mode List of original size detector settings Selections Standard sizes detected original sizes Document Glass Document feeder tray automatic document feeder AB 1 A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B5R A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B5R 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 14 11 x 17 AB 2 A3 A4 ...

Page 701: ... htm 24 03 2011 3 01 22 PM Index Contents Inch 2 11 x17 8 1 2 x13 216 mm x 330 mm 8 1 2 x11 8 1 2 x11 R 5 1 2 x8 1 2 A4 A3 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 13 216 mm x 330 mm 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Inch 3 11 x17 8 1 2 x13 2 5 216 mm x 340 mm 8 1 2 x11 8 1 2 x11 R 5 1 2 x8 1 2 A4 A3 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 13 2 5 216 mm x 340 mm 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 ...

Page 702: ...all the stored destinations The address book screen shows all destinations used in each mode Each one touch key shows the name of the destination and an icon indicating the mode used for the destination For information on the address book see ADDRESS BOOK For the procedure for storing an address in the address book see STORING CONTACTS or STORING GROUPS Fax Scan to E mail Internet Fax Direct SMTP ...

Page 703: ...he list The destinations displayed on the list can be narrowed with categories job types indexes and keywords For more information see ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN Tap the one touch key and tap to confirm the fax destination If you want to add a destination tap the other one touch key and tap If two or more destinations are selected or specified the total number of addresses appears next to Even if only a ...

Page 704: ...number tap the Call Search Number key on the action panel USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION To retrieve a destination from a global address book tap the Global Address Search key on the action panel RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK To check the entered destinations tap the Confirm Address key on the action panel VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS Double ta...

Page 705: ...ex_ope contents 05 021a htm 24 03 2011 3 01 24 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS Index Contents Operation IMAGE SEND When multiple destinations have been selected you can display and check the destinations You can also delete a destination from the list cancel selection of the destination ...

Page 706: ...tents Overview IMAGE SEND 2 steps in all Confirm the destination After the confirmation is completed tap If you wish to confirm details of the specified destination such as its type and name tap the Confirm Destination Information or Confirm Information for Address Selected Next key on the action panel Tap the Confirm Address key on the action panel To cancel a specified destination Tap the key of...

Page 707: ...p the OK key When the search number is entered the stored address is retrieved and specified as a destination If an incorrect search number is entered Tap the C key to clear the number and enter the correct number Tap the Call Search Number key The search number is programmed when the destination is stored in the address book If you do not know the search number tap the Print Individual List key o...

Page 708: ...ss In data entry mode select the mode of the destination and enter the destination address For Scan to Network Folder mode the network folder entry screen appears See SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER To switch among To Cc and Bcc tap You can select Bcc if Image Send Settings Scan Settings Scan Settings Bcc Setting Enable Bcc is enabled in System Settings In Internet Fax mode the reception report reques...

Page 709: ...erver and enter the user name and password Tap the key of the network folder After the settings are completed tap You will return to the screen of step 1 Tap the OK key again to accept the destination Tap the key of the workgroup that you wish to access Tap the Search key and enter a keyword to search for a workgroup server or network folder Up to 100 workgroups 100 servers and 100 network folders...

Page 710: ...OPERATION GUIDE SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 024 htm 24 03 2011 3 01 26 PM Index Contents ...

Page 711: ... 025a htm 24 03 2011 3 01 27 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK Index Contents Operation IMAGE SEND When an LDAP server is configured in the Setting mode Web version look up an address in a global address book and retrieve the destination address for Scan to E mail or Internet fax transmission excluding Direct SMTP addresses ...

Page 712: ... is not necessary to take step 2 In this case start from step 3 After the settings are completed tap Tap the destination key and tap to confirm the Tap the Global Address Search key on the action panel Tap of Object to select the object to be searched and tap Touch to Input Keyword to enter the initial of destination then tap the Start Search key The search results will appear after a brief interv...

Page 713: ...5b htm 24 03 2011 3 01 28 PM Index Contents Overview fax destination If no destination is found Tap the Search Again key to add more search letters To continuously add other destination Tap the destination and then tap To check the destination information Tap the Confirm Destination Information key or double tap the destination key Tap to close the address information screen ...

Page 714: ...to Network Folder are also shown in the transmission log The addresses shown in the transmission log can also be stored in an address book This is convenient when storing an address that was manually entered However addresses of the FTP Desktop transmission cannot be stored from the machine When a destination for retransmission is selected in the transmission log screen the mode of the selected de...

Page 715: ...the key of the destination to resend The last 50 addresses used for transmission are displayed If a screen requiring you to enter the user name and password appears enter the information To cancel the resend setting Tap the highlighted key When you select the destination and tap the Register New Address in Address Book the destination can be stored in the address book This is convenient if you hav...

Page 716: ... the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned a message will appear and scanning will stop When performing Scan to E mail take care not to send a file that is too large In particular multi page files tend to be large When sending a multi page file or other large file it may be necessary to reduce the number of scanned pages or reduce the send size Do not place any objects under th...

Page 717: ...T GLASS When placing the originals orient them as shown below To place a large portrait oriented original place it as shown in the figure titled Landscape orientation and specify the placement orientation in step 5 Place A5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 size originals in portrait vertical orientation If placed in landscape horizontal orientation an incorrect size will be detected For an A5R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 R size o...

Page 718: ...e name reply name or mail text at scan transmission Tap the Original key You can change exposure resolution file format colour mode and other settings Tap their keys AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL 2 SIDED ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE ENLARGE REDUCE CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE CHANGING THE RESOLUTION CHANGING FORMAT IN SCAN OR DATA ENTRY MODE CHANGING COLOUR ...

Page 719: ... use the password entered here to open the Encrypt PDF file To cancel Encrypt PDF tap the Cancel key The format settings screen will appear to let you change the file type Select a new file type and tap the Start key to begin transmission If the original was placed on the document glass replace it with the next original and tap the Start key Repeat until all originals have been scanned Tap the Rea...

Page 720: ... text When performing Scan to FTP Scan to Desktop or Scan to Network Folder only the file name is used If the subject or file name is not changed the settings in Application Settings Network Scanner Settings in Setting mode are used If the reply to address is not changed the settings in System Settings Image Send Settings Scan Settings Default Sender Set in Setting mode are used If this is not con...

Page 721: ...completed tap To cancel the selection of the subject Tap the Clear key If you wish to directly enter the text tap the Direct Entry key to open the soft keyboard Enter the text and tap the OK key Tap Others and tap the Send Settings key To change the file name tap the File Name entry box After the settings are completed tap Tap the key of the file name from the list To directly enter the file name ...

Page 722: ... text tap the Edit key To clear all entered text Tap the Clear All key When this key is tapped the entire body of the message is erased immediately not just the selected line After the settings are completed tap Tap the Global Address Search key to specify a user stored in the global address book in the same way as you would select the reply address Tapping the Direct Entry key allows you to direc...

Page 723: ...e number so that you can check the result easily Mail Footer Registration The specified text is automatically appended to the end of the body text of e mail This is convenient when you wish to append pre set text such as a corporate policy To enter the text to append select Application Settings Network Scanner Settings Administration Settings and then Mail Footer Registration in Setting mode Admin...

Page 724: ...ge the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size Place the original of the A5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 size in the portrait orientation If placed in landscape horizontal orientation an incorrect size will be detected For an A5R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 R size original enter the original size manually SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE Rotation sending A4 B5R and A5R 8 ...

Page 725: ...E AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE CHANGING THE RESOLUTION CHANGING FORMAT IN INTERNET FAX MODE CHANGING COLOUR MODE Tapping the Others key allows you to configure various functions for example collectively sending two original pages as one sheet or original pages with different sizes Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending the...

Page 726: ... sound to indicate that the operation is completed Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen is displayed scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved Tap the Change Setting key to change the exposure resolution scan size and send size for each original page scanned However when 2in1 or Card Shot is...

Page 727: ...ET FAX TRANSMISSION Index Contents Operation IMAGE SEND Change the subject file name and body text when performing an Internet fax transmission If necessary directly enter the text Configure a file name and other settings for an Internet fax using the Send Settings of the other functions If the subject and file name are not changed the settings in the Setting mode Web version are used To configure...

Page 728: ...text key To cancel the selection of the subject Tap the Clear key If you wish to directly enter the text tap the Direct Entry key to open the soft keyboard Enter the text and tap the OK key Enter the body text After the settings are completed tap To clear all entered text Tap the Clear All key When this key is tapped the entire body of the message is erased Tap Others and tap the Send Settings key...

Page 729: ...11 3 01 37 PM Index Contents Overview immediately not just the selected line To select a pre set text previously stored in the Setting mode Web version tap the Pre Set Select key To directly enter the body text tap the Edit key Enter up to 1800 characters A line break counts as one character Use to select on a line basis To edit the selected line tap the Edit key The soft keyboard will appear with...

Page 730: ...rs You can also send faxes with the one touch key by setting the Set to the address as usually used checkbox to when addresses are registered If you wish to temporarily remove a destination from the stored addresses open the detail confirmation screen and remove the destination in the screen A transmission is performed ignoring hyperlinks with Scan to FTP and Scan to Network Folder addresses If th...

Page 731: ...t be used for broadcast transmission are greyed out to prevent selection If a Scan to FTP or Network Folder address is specified in a broadcast transmission hyperlink e mail transmission will not take place To switch delivery types To Cc Bcc tap If System Settings Image Send Settings Operation Settings Default Settings Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting is enabled in Setting mode tap...

Page 732: ... Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray all pages are scanned A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended If you placed the original on the document glass scan each page one at a time When scanning finishes place...

Page 733: ...ngs Image Send Settings Scan Settings Scan Settings Compression Mode at Broadcasting in Setting mode is used for all destinations Colour scanning In scan mode if the colour mode setting is Full Colour the original is sent in Mono2 to Internet fax destinations and in colour to scan destinations If the facsimile expansion kit is enabled tap the Send Same Image as Fax Address key on the action panel ...

Page 734: ...ADCAST TRANSMISSION file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 033 htm 24 03 2011 3 01 40 PM Index Contents Dropout colour This mode is available for Scanner and Data entry It is linked to a mode with an appropriate function ...

Page 735: ...x3610_ex_ope contents 05 034a htm 24 03 2011 3 01 41 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N RESENDING TO UNSUCCESSFUL BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DESTINATIONS Index Contents Operation IMAGE SEND The results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen If transmission to any of the destinations failed resend the image to those destinations ...

Page 736: ...mplete key If the broadcast transmission included destinations of different modes the same broadcast transmission key will appear in each of those modes After tapping the key of the completed broadcast transmission tap the Check Details of Selected Job key on the action panel Broadcast xxxx will appear as the destination of the broadcast job key The job control number that appeared on the touch pa...

Page 737: ...sending to all unsuccessful transmission destinations key is tapped differ depending on whether or not document filing is used Using document filing You will return to the document filing resend screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered Perform the document filing resend procedure There is no need to re scan the original Not using document filing You will return to the base screen with the...

Page 738: ...driver as the printer driver for your computer and then select the Print command in the application Image data for transmission will be created and sent as an Internet fax For the procedures for using this function see the PC Fax driver Help To send an Internet fax using the PC I Fax function the PC Fax driver must be installed and then updated using the CD ROM that accompanies the Internet fax ex...

Page 739: ...x3610_ex_ope contents 05 037a htm 24 03 2011 3 01 43 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL 2 sided original Index Contents Operation IMAGE SEND The automatic document feeder is used to automatically scan both sides of an original The settings on 2 sided scanning are cleared when transmission has completed ...

Page 740: ...apping the Original key tap the 2 Sided original type Tablet key or the 2 Sided original type Book key See the figure on the right to check the binding edge of the original and select the key to be tapped Tap the Image Orientation key with the same orientation as the placed original If this setting is not correct a suitable image may not be transmitted After the settings are completed tap To cance...

Page 741: ... size to be transmitted is indicated as the send size In the above screen the scan size the placed original is A4 8 1 2 x 11 and the send size is auto For example if the scan size is A4 8 1 2 x 11 and the send size is B5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 the image will be reduced before transmission Only standard original sizes can be automatically detected Standard sizes When the original size is an inch size or a n...

Page 742: ...CIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE Index Contents Operation IMAGE SEND When the original size is not standard inch size or non standard size or is not detected correctly manually specify the original size When Long Size is selected the 2 sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed The image is sent in Mono2 only When Postcard Photo Size or a standard size direct entry is selec...

Page 743: ...IGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE Index Contents Overview IMAGE SEND 2 steps in all Tap the appropriate original size key After the settings are completed tap After tapping the Original key tap the Scan Size key If you are sending a long original tap the Long Size key Use the automatic document feeder to scan a long original The maximum width that can be scanned is 1 000 mm 39 3 8 the maximum height ...

Page 744: ...X 3610N SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES Index Contents Operation IMAGE SEND When scanning a non standard size original such as a card or postcard specify the original size using numeric values after placing the original The width can be from 25 mm to 432 mm 1 to 17 and the height can be from 25 mm to 297 mm 1 to 11 5 8 When the scan size is specified by numeric values the se...

Page 745: ...NG NUMERIC VALUES Index Contents Overview IMAGE SEND 4 steps in all After tapping the Scan Size key tap the Direct Entry key Specify the original size Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively and enter the sizes using the numeric keys It is convenient to use to finely adjust the entered size Tap the Original key Tap the OK key On the base screen check that the specified size is...

Page 746: ...D Tap this key to specify the send size as a paper size If the specified send size is larger than the scan size the image will be enlarged If the specified send size is smaller than the scan size the image will be reduced The send size cannot be specified when Long Size is selected for the scan size or when the scan size is specified by numeric values The send size cannot be specified when TIFF S ...

Page 747: ...Orientation key with the same orientation as the original image If this setting is not correct a suitable image may not be transmitted After the settings are completed tap To configure the default setting of image orientation select System Settings Image Send Settings Operation Settings Default Settings Image Orientation in Setting mode Tap the Original key Tap the Send Size key Depending on the p...

Page 748: ...ocuments Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 041b htm 24 03 2011 3 01 49 PM Index Contents Overview The ratio used for reduction or enlargement of the original will appear between the Scan Size and the Send Size ...

Page 749: ...ting automatically adjusts the exposure for light and dark parts of the original Manual 1 2 Select this setting when the original consists of dark text 3 Select this setting for a normal original neither dark nor light 4 5 Select this setting when the original consists of light text How to select the original type Scan mode Data entry mode Item Description Auto The original image type is automatic...

Page 750: ... IMAGE TYPE file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 042a htm 24 03 2011 3 01 50 PM Index Contents Operation Map This mode is best for copying maps with light colour shading and fine text ...

Page 751: ...the original type you wish to set based on the original type Tap to adjust the exposure After the settings are completed tap When Auto is selected changing the exposure sets the original image type to Text automatically Tap to adjust the exposure After the settings are completed tap When Auto is selected the exposure will be set to 3 In Scan and Data Entry Modes In Internet Fax Mode In Scan and Da...

Page 752: ...GUIDE CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 042b htm 24 03 2011 3 01 50 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 753: ...esolution setting will result in a large file and if the file is too large transmission may not be possible In this event reduce the number of pages scanned or take other measures to decrease the file size CHANGING FORMAT IN SCAN OR DATA ENTRY MODE CHANGING FORMAT IN INTERNET FAX MODE SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE When using the automatic document feeder the resolution setting cannot be ch...

Page 754: ...f destinations in different modes tap to switch modes to set the resolution in each mode However FTP Desktop and Network Folder are set to the same mode When E mail FTP Desktop or Network Folder is selected When Internet Fax is selected Tap the Resolution key In the Internet Fax mode set the Half Tone checkbox to to specify half tone This option is unavailable if 200x100dpi is selected This functi...

Page 755: ...OPERATION GUIDE CHANGING THE RESOLUTION file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 043b htm 24 03 2011 3 01 52 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 756: ...igh Compression PDF PDF High Compression PDF Ultra Fine PDF A PDF A PDF A High Compression PDF A PDF A High Compression PDF A Ultra Fine Encrypted PDF Encrypted PDF Encrypted PDF Encrypt High Compression PDF Encrypted PDF Encrypt High Compression Ultra Fine PDF TIFF TIFF TIFF JPEG XPS XPS The file format for sending a scanned image is specified when the destination is stored in a one touch key how...

Page 757: ... dpi If PDF High Compression is set when a resolution setting has been specified in scanner or other mode the resolution setting will be cancelled and the High Compression PDF resolution will be used for transmission When PDF High Compression is selected Resolution cannot be changed while waiting for the next original or in Change Setting in the job build settings If PDF High Compression is set wh...

Page 758: ...ur Greyscale mode is the file format with the colour mode set to Full Colour or Greyscale Tap the key of the desired file type When Colour Greyscale mode is selected and the scanner function expansion kit is installed the Compact and U Fine checkboxes appear To suppress image quality deterioration and reduce the data size of a file to be transmitted select High Compression PDF Select U Fine only w...

Page 759: ...ox to and use to specify the number of pages per file Tapping the numeric value display field allows you to directly change the numeric value using the numeric keys After the settings are completed tap When a checkmark does not appear in the Specified Pages per File checkbox one file is created for all scanned pages When Specified Pages per File is selected consecutive numbers are added to the cre...

Page 760: ... TIFF S is selected the transmission settings are restricted as follows Resolution The selections are 200x100dpi and 200x200dpi If TIFF S is selected after 200x400dpi 400x400dpi or 600x600dpi is selected the resolution automatically changes to 200x200dpi Send size Always A4R 8 1 2 x 11 R If TIFF S is selected after the send size is changed the send size is automatically fixed to A4R 8 1 2 x 11 R I...

Page 761: ...3610_ex_ope contents 05 045b htm 24 03 2011 3 01 54 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N CHANGING FORMAT IN INTERNET FAX MODE Index Contents Overview IMAGE SEND 2 steps in all Tap the TIFF S or TIFF F key to specify the file format If you selected TIFF F select the compression mode After the settings are completed tap Tap the File Format key ...

Page 762: ...od Auto The machine detects whether the original is colour or black and white and automatically selects full colour or black and white Mono2 or Greyscale scanning Full Colour The original is scanned in full colour This mode is best for full colour originals such as catalogues Mono2 Colours in the original are scanned as black or white This mode is best for text only originals Greyscale The colours...

Page 763: ... destinations in different send modes tap to select a send mode E mail DeskTop FTP Internet Fax or Data Entry to set the colour mode for each mode Tap the Colour Mode key Tap the Greyscale or Mono2 key to set the B W mode for automatic colour selection Specify whether Mono2 or greyscale is used when scanning black and white originals Note that if the file format is set to JPEG scanning will take p...

Page 764: ... panel before transmission If you tap the Preview key before scanning the original you can check the status of the scanned image in the preview screen As you can adjust the exposure and resolution to scan the original while checking it in the preview screen you can send a better quality original to the destination Depending on the size of the transmission data part of the preview image may not app...

Page 765: ...of the documents are erased before transmission When a job program is not stored When a job program is stored Enter the address of each branch office Select Dual Page Scan Specify Erase Tap the Start key Scan and send the original Tap the key of a stored program Tap the Start key Scan and send the original Considerable time is required to send the documents each month because the above settings mu...

Page 766: ...me settings can be used repeatedly for transmission The following contents cannot be stored in programs Tapping of the Speaker key Custom sizes Card shot Page changes and unspecified erases during preview Metadata Entry Send settings Own Name Select Up to 48 programs can be stored Up to 500 destinations can be stored in one program A program in which sub addresses and passcodes are specified as an...

Page 767: ...l in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Configure additional settings For the called program additionally configure the following settings Image settings Scan Size Send Size File Format Colour Mode Send settings Others Timer Transmission Card Shot File Quick File Transaction Report When stored in the program t...

Page 768: ... 049b htm 24 03 2011 3 01 58 PM Index Contents Overview A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended If you placed the original on the document glass scan each page one at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key ...

Page 769: ... erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows Scanning a thick book Erase modes If a ratio setting is used in combination with an erase setting the erase width will change according to the selected ratio This function erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows For...

Page 770: ...Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 050a htm 24 03 2011 3 01 58 PM Index Contents Operation The width can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm 0 to 1 The factory default setting is 10 mm 1 2 The setting changed here will apply to System Settings Copy Settings Copy Setting Erase Width Adjustment in Setting mode ...

Page 771: ... key is tapped all the checkboxes are set to Place the original Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the Erase key Specify the erase edge on the reverse side when erasing edges of one to three sides of Up Down Left and...

Page 772: ... the settings are completed tap To cancel the erase settings Tap the Clear key Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray all pages are scanned A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and ...

Page 773: ...ents Operation IMAGE SEND Original scan size Transmitted image A3 11 x 17 x 1 page A4 8 1 2 x 11 x 2 pages The left and right sides of an original are scanned as two separate pages This function is useful when you wish to successively scan each page of a book or other bound document When using dual page scan the original must be placed on the document glass This function is available when the orig...

Page 774: ...page scan IMAGE SEND 4 steps in all Place the original on the document glass DOCUMENT GLASS Align the centre of the original with the appropriate size mark Specify the destination ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the Dual Page Scan key A checkmark appears on the icon After the settings are completed tap the Back key To cancel the Dual Page Scan setting Tap the Dual Page Scan key to...

Page 775: ...rview Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED However settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that transmis...

Page 776: ...3610N SPLITTING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELY Book divide Index Contents Operation IMAGE SEND The opened pages of a saddle stitch pamphlet are split by page according to actual page order before transmission When using this function you do not need to sort the original pages to be sent This function can be enabled when the original size setting is set to Auto The docum...

Page 777: ...e sure that the binding edge is correct After the settings are completed tap To cancel the Book Divide setting Tap the Off key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Specify the destination ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the Book Divide key Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original Tap the Preview key to...

Page 778: ...TING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELY file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 052b htm 24 03 2011 3 02 02 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 779: ... when you set up the transmission It is not possible to leave the document in the document feeder tray or on the document glass and have it scanned at the reserved time of transmission Up to 94 timer transmissions can be stored at once Settings selected for a timer transmission exposure resolution and other functions are automatically cleared after the transmission is finished However when the doc...

Page 780: ...t it in the setting mode before starting a job BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER Specify the date Place the original Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the Timer key Tap to specify the time hour and minute in 24 hour ...

Page 781: ... TRANSMITTED If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray all pages are scanned A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended and the machine stands by for transmission If you placed the original on the document glass scan each page one at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the ...

Page 782: ...tion 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 054a htm 24 03 2011 3 02 04 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N WHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN THE IMAGE Suppress background Index Contents Operation IMAGE SEND Suppresses light background areas of originals This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode ...

Page 783: ...ttings Tap the Off key After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence Place the original Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the Suppress Background key Tap the Start key to start scanning of the origi...

Page 784: ...e original pages in the document feeder tray all pages are scanned A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended If you placed the original on the document glass scan each page one at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key A beep will sound to indicate that transmission has ended When the colour mode setting is Mono2 the suppress backg...

Page 785: ...2 05 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO A SINGLE PAGE Card shot Index Contents Operation IMAGE SEND Send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page without the need to send each side separately If the scan size is larger than the send size it will result in a sending failure The ratio cannot be specified and Rotation Sending Setting cannot be selected ...

Page 786: ...st specify a value close to the desired ratio value by the numeric keys then tap or for adjustment After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence Place a card face down on the document glass DOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the Card Shot key To enlarge or reduce the images to fit the paper based on the entered original size tap...

Page 787: ...the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED However settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen Place a card face up on the document glass and tap the Start key to scan the reverse side Before scanning the back of the card tap the Change Setting key on the touch panel to change the exposure Tap the Read End key I...

Page 788: ...es in a single transmission You can also send a fax by placing originals in both the automatic document feeder and on the document glass Use this function when there are more original pages than can be placed at once in the automatic document feeder When scanning originals that are separated into sets scan the set that has the first page first The settings that you select for the first set can be ...

Page 789: ...FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Job Build key A checkmark appears on the icon To cancel the Job Build setting Tap the Job Build key to clear the checkmark Tap the Start key to scan the first set Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED However settings for this...

Page 790: ...tion is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen is displayed scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved The Change Setting key can be tapped to change the exposure resolution scan size and send size for each original page scanned However when Job Build is used in combination with 2in1 in Others only the exposure can be changed when scanning each even numbered page of t...

Page 791: ...lly detects the size of each original This function can only be used with the combinations of original sizes as shown below A3 and B4 A3 and B5 B4 and A4 and A4 and B5 A4R and B5 B4 and A4R B4 and A5 and B5 and A5 11 x 17 and 8 1 2 x 14 11 x 17 and 8 1 2 x 13 and 11 x 17 and 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 When Mixed Size Original is selected an original scan size cannot be specified After the original scan size ha...

Page 792: ...ent feeder tray AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Specify the destination ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Mixed Size Original key Otherwise tap the Others key and tap the Mixed Size Original key For mixed size originals set Original to Auto A checkmark appears on the icon To cancel the Mixed Size Original setting Tap the Mixed Size Original key to clear the checkmark After the settings are completed tap the...

Page 793: ...ERENT SIZES file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 057b htm 24 03 2011 3 02 09 PM Index Contents Overview A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended ...

Page 794: ...058a htm 24 03 2011 3 02 10 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N SCANNING A THIN ORIGINAL Slow scan mode Index Contents Operation IMAGE SEND Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder This function helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding When slow scan mode is selected 2 sided scanning is not possible ...

Page 795: ...nserted with too much force they may crumple and misfeed Specify the destination ENTERING DESTINATIONS Touch the Others key and tap the Slow Scan Mode key A checkmark appears on the icon To cancel the Slow Scan Mode setting Tap the Slow Scan Mode key to clear the checkmark After the settings are completed tap the Back key Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original Tap the Preview key to c...

Page 796: ...fore transmission Checking the number of scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets not the number of scanned original pages For example when a 2 sided original is transmitted the number 1 will appear to indicate that one original sheet is transmitted not 2 to indicate the front side page ...

Page 797: ...leted tap the Back key To cancel the Original Count setting Tap the Original Count key to clear the checkmark Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED However settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen When scanning is completed ...

Page 798: ...rformed within one minute after the above confirmation screen appears the scanned image and settings will be cleared and the base screen will reappear Scanning will not be completed automatically and the image will not be reserved for transmission If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets Tap the Cancel key and then tap the OK key in the message scree...

Page 799: ... scanned using the automatic document feeder allowing you to verify that all originals were correctly scanned To use the verification stamp function the optional stamp unit must be installed When 2 sided originals are used the front of each original is stamped twice If an error occurs during scanning an original that was not scanned may be stamped When the O mark that is stamped on originals start...

Page 800: ...ination ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the Verification Stamp key A checkmark appears on the icon After the settings are completed tap the Back key To cancel the Verification Stamp setting Tap the Verification Stamp key to clear the checkmark Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more info...

Page 801: ... you to skip useless blank sheets without checking an original If an original of which one side is blank is scanned blank pages are skipped for 2 sided sending In a broadcast transmission to destinations including fax and Internet fax destinations this function is applied to scan mode destinations only Depending on the original some pages that are not blank may be detected as blank pages and thus ...

Page 802: ...ff key After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence Place originals in the automatic document feeder AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Specify the destination ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the Blank Page Skip key Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKIN...

Page 803: ...the number of scanned original sheets appears in A the number of scanned sides in B and the number of sheets to be sent excluding blank pages in C For example if five original sheets that include two blank pages are scanned by duplex scanning A will show 5 B will show 10 and C will show 8 If this step is not performed within one minute after the above confirmation screen appears the scanned image ...

Page 804: ...r of original pages and wish to reduce the number of pages sent For the standard size A4 8 1 2 x 11 or B5 or A5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 original pages are scanned from both the single pass feeder and document glass This function cannot be used in scan mode or data entry mode The 2in1 is only available for originals with a size other than a standard size A4 8 1 2 x 11 or B5 or A5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Transmission i...

Page 805: ...tting is not correct a suitable image may not be transmitted After the settings are completed tap Place the original Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the 2in1 key A checkmark appears on the icon After the settings ...

Page 806: ... all pages are scanned A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended If you placed the original on the document glass scan each page one at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended T...

Page 807: ...ts MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 063a htm 24 03 2011 3 02 16 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N REMOVING CHROMATIC COLOURS FROM THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION Dropout colour Index Contents Operation IMAGE SEND This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode ...

Page 808: ...ur key A checkmark appears on the icon After the settings are completed tap the Back key To cancel the Drop Out Colour setting Tap the Drop Out Colour key to clear the checkmark Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED If you inserted the original pages...

Page 809: ... Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 063b htm 24 03 2011 3 02 17 PM Index Contents Overview Tap the Change Setting key in the scan end confirmation screen to change the exposure resolution scan size and send size However when scanning each even numbered page of the original only the exposure can be changed ...

Page 810: ...ducts MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 064a htm 24 03 2011 3 02 18 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N ADDING CONTRAST TO THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION Contrast Index Contents Operation IMAGE SEND This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode ...

Page 811: ...he original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the Contrast key Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE T...

Page 812: ...20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 064b htm 24 03 2011 3 02 18 PM Index Contents Overview When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended ...

Page 813: ...ducts MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 065a htm 24 03 2011 3 02 19 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N ENHANCING THE OUTLINE OF THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION Sharpness Index Contents Operation IMAGE SEND This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode ...

Page 814: ...keys in sequence Place the original Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the Sharpness key Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax F...

Page 815: ...pe contents 05 065b htm 24 03 2011 3 02 20 PM Index Contents Overview If you placed the original on the document glass scan each page one at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended ...

Page 816: ... out to alert you when an Internet fax transmission fails or when a broadcast transmission is performed The transaction report contains a description of the transmission date start time name of destination time required number of pages result etc INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN Transaction reports are printed based on conditions set in the setting mode Select different conditions for a ...

Page 817: ... document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination ENTERING DESTINATIONS Tap the Others key and tap the Transaction Report key The print conditions for a transaction report are as follows Always Print A transaction report is printed no matter whether the transmission succeeds or fails Print at Error A tra...

Page 818: ...ore sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray all pages are scanned A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended If you placed the original on the document glass scan each page one at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat the proce...

Page 819: ... Clock Adjust Sender name sender address In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Operation Settings Own Number and Name Set Sender Data Registration If you intend to use the I Fax Own Address Send function be sure to configure this information Page numbers Select whether or not to include page numbers using System Settings Image Send Settings Internet Fax Settings Send Settings ...

Page 820: ... check the status of an Internet Fax job tap the Internet Fax tab When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing see the following items STOPPING DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS Internet fax jobs include reception timer transmission and data forwarding as well...

Page 821: ...is printed at the specified time and moves to the completed job list If another job is being printed at the specified time the job being printed is prioritized over the timer job Internet Fax transmission job with reception report request specified An Internet Fax transmission job with a reception report request specified excluding a direct SMTP transmission job is placed into the standby state at...

Page 822: ...05 069 htm 24 03 2011 3 02 24 PM Index Contents When reception is completed the status field displays In Memory in the completed job list After the fax is printed the status changes to Received Then a job is added for which the status field displays Waiting in the job queue list When forwarding the received fax is completed the field changes to Forward OK ...

Page 823: ...eport contains information that is useful in dealing with problems such as the types of errors that occurred The most recent 200 transactions are included in the report You can have the machine print the Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reaches 201 or at a specified time once a day only The contents of the Image Sending Activity Report are erased when the report i...

Page 824: ... from the destination CANCEL A transmission was stopped while in progress or a reserved transmission job was cancelled MEM FULL The memory became full during reception Reject Reception An Internet fax was sent from a party that is blocked NG REPORT A receive report was requested for a transmission however the transmission did not take place correctly and a transmission failed report was received N...

Page 825: ...ction checks for reception once every five minutes If faxes will be received at night keep the main power switch of the machine in the position If the machine is out of paper or there is no paper that matches the size of the received fax a message will appear in the touch panel Follow the instructions in the message to load an appropriate size of paper You can print the received Internet fax data ...

Page 826: ...ual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 077b htm 24 03 2011 3 02 26 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES AUTOMATICALLY Index Contents Overview IMAGE SEND 2 steps in all The machine rings and fax reception begins automatically A beep sounds when reception ends The fax is automatically printed ...

Page 827: ...X 3110N MX 3610N RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES MANUALLY Index Contents IMAGE SEND If the interval for checking for received faxes is somewhat long and you wish to check immediately you can manually initiate reception Tap the Receive key to connect to the mail server and retrieve received faxes The Receive key can be tapped only when POP3 server settings are configured in the Setting mode Web version ...

Page 828: ...numeric keys printing begins When the Cancel key is tapped the password entry screen closes however the data in memory key will blink in the touch panel The password entry screen will reappear when you tap the blinking key or change modes To display the received data list screen after entering the password In Setting mode select System Settings Operation Settings Job Detail Settings Preview Settin...

Page 829: ...s automatically deleted from memory If the power is turned off at the specified time printing will start at the timing when the power is turned on This function can be specified when the Received Data Image Check Setting is enabled If Hold Setting for Received Data Print is enabled this function cannot be used To print received data at the specified time In Setting mode select System Settings Imag...

Page 830: ...re printing This function is available when System Settings Operation Settings Preview Setting Received Data Image Check Setting is enabled in Setting mode The factory default setting is disabled Depending on the size of the received data part of the check image on the touch panel may not appear The received data list can also be shown in the job status screen that appears when you tap the job sta...

Page 831: ...ction panel If you wish to transfer or save data after selecting the image also tap the Image Check key To show thumbnails of the received images tap the Thumbnail key To delete a received image tap the Delete key on the action panel To transfer the selected received image tap the Forward to Other Destination key Specify the destination in the displayed address book screen and transfer the image T...

Page 832: ...1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 081b htm 24 03 2011 3 02 30 PM Index Contents Overview Specify the image area you wish to delete in the Erase Specified Range screen To forward the selected image tap the Forward key FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY To save the selected image tap the Save to HDD key FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY ...

Page 833: ...uding direct SMTP Forwarding is not possible if no faxes were received or a forwarding fax number is not programmed If some pages of a fax that is being forwarded were successfully printed only those pages that were not printed will be forwarded If forwarding was not successful because the transmission was cancelled or a communication error occurred the faxes that were to be forwarded will return ...

Page 834: ...tents 05 083b htm 24 03 2011 3 02 31 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET FAX DATA Fax data forward Index Contents Overview IMAGE SEND 4 steps in all Tap the Setting mode key on the Home screen Tap the Fax Data Receive Forward key Tap the Internet Fax Settings key Tap the Execute key in Forward Received Data to begin forwarding ...

Page 835: ...thout being printed In setting mode Web version configure the inbound routing settings For the procedure for accessing the setting mode Web version see Quick Start Guide The following explanation assumes that the setting mode Web version has been accessed with administrator rights Whether or not to forward data for each forwarding table can be quickly set In Setting mode select Application Setting...

Page 836: ... Change of Forward Approval Specify in Print Style Setting whether or not to have the machine to print the faxes to forward when inbound routing is enabled After the settings are completed be sure to click the Store button Always Print Always prints received data before forwarding the data Print at Error Prints received data only when an error prevents forwarding Save Only at Error Saves received ...

Page 837: ...click the Add button Enter a Table Name A maximum of 50 forwarding tables can be stored Select the sender whose faxes will be forwarded To forward all received data select Forward All Received Data To forward only data received from specific senders select Forward Received Data from Below Sender To forward all data except data from specific senders select Forward Received Data from Senders except ...

Page 838: ...x number is selected as a recipient the file format is ignored Select the recipient from the address book You can specify multiple registered addresses or telephone numbers from the address book of the machine Up to 1 000 recipients can be registered for Recipients 1 2 and 3 in total When you select the recipients from the address book up to 400 recipients can be registered for network folder FTP ...

Page 839: ...m the forwarding table The forwarding permission settings that appear here are linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 10 If you wish to use different forwarding conditions than those set in step 10 set the forwarding permission settings To use the inbound routing function enable the forwarding tables that you wish to use from among the stored tables To delete a forwarding table click the ...

Page 840: ...htm 24 03 2011 3 02 33 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY Index Contents Operation IMAGE SEND Received faxes can be forwarded manually after receipt This function is available when System Settings Operation Settings Preview Setting Received Data Image Check Setting is enabled in Setting mode The factory default setting is disabled ...

Page 841: ...then tapping the Check Received Data key on the action panel in the job status screen Tap the key of the received data you wish to forward and tap the Forward to Other Destination key Multiple received data items can be selected Specify the destination in the displayed address book screen and forward the data If you wish to select the image to forward go to step 3 Tap the Image Check key on the ac...

Page 842: ...6a htm 24 03 2011 3 02 35 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N SAVING RECEIVED DATA Index Contents Operation IMAGE SEND Save received faxes in the document filing folder This function is available when System Settings Operation Settings Preview Setting Received Data Image Check Setting is enabled in Setting mode The factory default setting is disabled ...

Page 843: ...hen data is received the Received Data icon appears Tap the icon You can also display the received data list by tapping the job status display and then tapping the Check Received Data key on the action panel in the job status screen Tap the key of the received data you wish to save and tap the Save Data to Folder key on the action panel Multiple received data items can be selected If you wish to s...

Page 844: ...ge file and how it is to be processed is generated based on pre stored information and transmitted separately from an image file that is generated for sending a scanned image The metadata file is created in XML format By linking the metadata with applications such as document management software a workflow application or an encryption server a sophisticated document solution environment can be bui...

Page 845: ...tor rights are required Enable metadata delivery Storing Metadata Sets Store the items the metadata set to write to the XML file that will be generated during scanning Up to 10 metadata items can be configured in a metadata set A stored metadata set can be selected at the time of transmission Addresses specified in Address Type Allowing Metadata Entry when a metadata set is stored can be selected ...

Page 846: ...nsion the date etc in the generated file name If the file name setting is left blank the machine will automatically generate a unique file name It is recommended that you use Network Scanner Tool to receive metadata For more information see the Network Scanner Tool User s Guide PDF format on the Sharpdesk Network Scanner Utilities CD ROM For information on the licence agreement and how to use the ...

Page 847: ...allow metadata delivery In addition perform metadata delivery using document filing in Document Operations in Setting mode Web version In data entry mode configure metadata settings to perform metadata delivery To perform transmission without sending metadata switch the screen from data entry mode to a different mode and then perform transmission When metadata settings have been configured or an a...

Page 848: ...the items stored in the metadata set will appear Tap the key of the item that you wish to enter Tap the key of the value that you wish to enter and tap the OK key To directly enter the metadata value tap the Direct Entry key On the soft keyboard screen that appears tap the OK key You will return to the screen shown in step 3 After the settings are completed tap To cancel the selection of the metad...

Page 849: ...OPERATION GUIDE TRANSMITTING METADATA file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 091b htm 24 03 2011 3 02 38 PM ...

Page 850: ...a field is one of the following fields a message will appear informing you that the field cannot be filled in Enter appropriate information in the related items of the send settings Name entered in metadata fields Description Where entered formName Name of the user who sent the job If the name is not entered as metadata the sender name determined by the usual rules for determining the sender name ...

Page 851: ...ETADATA FIELDS file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 05 092 htm 24 03 2011 3 02 39 PM Index Contents Blank until a value is set in the send settings screen ...

Page 852: ...xplains information you should know before using the document filing function IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING DOCUMENT FILING This section explains important points you should know before using the document filing function USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH MODE BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING MODE FILING SIMULTANEOUSLY WHILE USING OTHER MODE This section explains the procedure to scan and save data simulta...

Page 853: ...ING A FILE TO RETRIEVE FILE PRINTING MULTI FILE PRINTING FILE TRANSMISSION FILE MOVING DELETE FILE FILE IMAGE CHECKING FILE MERGING RETRIEVING AND USING A FILE FROM THE JOB STATUS SCREEN FILE SEARCH AND RETRIEVAL PRINTING AN EXTERNAL FILE This section explained the method to insert a page of another file into a file that has been stored by the document filing function ...

Page 854: ...OPERATION GUIDE DOCUMENT FILING file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 06 htm 24 03 2011 3 02 40 PM Index ...

Page 855: ...rive of the machine or an external memory device as data The stored files can be printed or transmitted as required Editing of the stored files for example combining is also possible A file saved in PDF format can be displayed or printed on a computer Uses of document filing Using the document filing function allows you to additionally print out conference material with the same settings or print ...

Page 856: ...ickly and easily store document data without specifying a file name or other information The stored file can also be used by other people Do not use this method to save files that you do not want others to use File As a copy image send or other job is performed this function saves the document data to the hard drive Unlike Quick File various types of information can be appended to the file when th...

Page 857: ...automatically assigned to each job Main Folder Scanned documents are stored in this folder When you store a job in the Main folder you can specify a previously stored user name and assign a file name A password can also be set when storing a file Confidential save as required Custom Folder Folders with custom names are stored inside this folder Scanned documents are stored in the stored folder Lik...

Page 858: ...d as a search condition when searching for a file Custom Folder The Main folder is initially available as a location for storing files by File and File Store Store a custom folder and specify it as a location for storing files Specify a password for the user folder as required Enter the password to use the folder My Folder A previously created custom folder can be selected as My Folder or a new fo...

Page 859: ...d total number of pages and total number of files that can be stored in custom folders and in the Main folder Examples of original types Number of pages Number of files Full colour original Text and photo example Size A4 Max 4500 Max 3000 Black white original Text Size A4 Max 10000 Number of pages and number of files that can be stored in the Quick File folder Examples of original types Number of ...

Page 860: ...and when all pages are black white Copying in sort mode uses the same memory area as the Quick File folder For this reason when too much data has been stored in the Quick File folder it may not be possible to perform a large copy job using sort mode Delete unnecessary files from the Quick File Folder The original types above are examples to make the explanation easier to understand The actual numb...

Page 861: ...e Quick File folder every week on Friday at 6 00 PM To automatically delete document filing data periodically In Setting mode select System Settings Document Filing Settings Automatic Deletion of File Settings To check the settings Print the list To check the set deletion cycle In Setting mode select System Settings List Print Administrator Settings List and print a list of the administrator setti...

Page 862: ... it from other files User Name Use this to specify the owner of the file The user name must first be registered by selecting User Control in Setting mode User List File Name Set it when assigning a file name Stored to Select which folder the file will be saved in Property Sharing Protect or Confidential can be selected When you select Confidential set a password 1 to 32 digits for the file The abo...

Page 863: ... a file with File you can save it with the Confidential property Set a password for a Confidential file to prevent the file from being used by other people Exercise care to prevent other people from obtaining the password The property of a stored Confidential file can be changed to Sharing by Property Change as required Do not store sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be used ...

Page 864: ...tion panel for each mode File key and Quick File key These keys may not appear on the action panel depending on the mode or settings In this case tap the Others key on the base screen in each mode and then tap the Quick File or File key To change the screen display In Setting mode Web version select System Settings Operation Settings Favourites Menu Using document filing in print mode To use docum...

Page 865: ...OPERATION GUIDE USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH MODE file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 06 011 htm 24 03 2011 3 02 48 PM Index Contents ...

Page 866: ...ENT FILING file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 06 012 htm 24 03 2011 3 02 49 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING MODE Index Contents DOCUMENT FILING ...

Page 867: ... having to locate the original When a file is stored using Quick File the following user name and file name are automatically assigned to the file User Name User Unknown File Name Mode_Day Month Year_Hour Minute Second Example Copy_20110404_112030 Stored to Quick File Folder When user authentication is used the user name that was used for login is automatically selected Only the file name and loca...

Page 868: ... the automatic document feeder or on the document glass SELECTING A PROCEDURE FOR PLACING THE ORIGINAL DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND STATUS OF THE ORIGINAL Start a copy or image sending When the function is executed the image data of the original is stored in the Quick File folder To prevent accidental saving of the file the message The scanned data is stored in the quick file folder appears for 6 sec...

Page 869: ...each mode allows you to store the original in the Main folder or stored Custom folder as a file simultaneously with printing or transmission The stored file can be retrieved at a later time allowing you to recopy or resend the original without having to locate it When a file is stored using File without appending file information the following user name and file name are automatically assigned to ...

Page 870: ...wsing To save in an external memory device Assigning a file name Specifying the folder Creating PDF for PC browsing After configuring the above settings you will return to this screen Go to the next step As an example the procedure for using File in copy mode is explained below 4 steps in all Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic...

Page 871: ...er people will not be able to view the file without permission Changing the property A protect setting can be selected for files saved with the document filing function This prevents a file from being moved or automatically or manually deleted Three properties are available for saved files Sharing Protect and Confidential When saved with the Sharing property a file is not protected When saved with...

Page 872: ... can be changed to Confidential Two properties cannot be selected for a single file 2 steps in all Select Property in the File Information screen When you have selected Confidential enter a password 32 digits using the numeric keys Every time you enter one digit is displayed Specifying a user name 3 steps in all Tap the User Name text box When user authentication is used the user name that was use...

Page 873: ...ou specify the TEST TXT file the file will be saved as TEST TXT 1 file If the length of the file name exceeds the limit excess characters will be omitted and a serial number will be added to the end of the file name Specifying the folder Specify the folder for storing the file 2 steps in all Tap the Stored to text box If a user name with a My Folder setting is selected My Folder of that user will ...

Page 874: ...is enabled The sequence for using a stored file depending on the situation is explained For information on user authentication procedures see USER AUTHENTICATION in OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES For information on enabling user authentication and storing user names see User Control in SETTING MODE Also in setting mode Web version you can use document filing In setting mode Web version click Docum...

Page 875: ...e settings FILE SELECTION SCREEN FILE PRINTING FILE TRANSMISSION FILE MOVING DELETE FILE FILE IMAGE CHECKING FILE MERGING When the folder is selected the files in the folder will appear Select the file that you wish to retrieve Select a file from the thumbnail images of the stored files FILE SELECTION SCREEN SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE Retrieve a file using the search function FILE SEARCH AND RET...

Page 876: ...P_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 06 019 htm 24 03 2011 3 02 54 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N FILE SELECTION SCREEN DOCUMENT FILING The file selection screen can be displayed in List screen format or Thumbnail screen format to display thumbnail images of files List display mode Thumbnail display mode Mode icons ...

Page 877: ...22A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 06 019 htm 24 03 2011 3 02 54 PM Index Contents COPYING Internet Fax Direct SMTP Printer RGB Printer CMYK Fax Send Scan to E mail File Store Scan to FTP Scan to Desktop Scan to Network Folder PC Fax Send PC I Fax Send Edit When different types of jobs such as copy and fax are combined ...

Page 878: ... Maximum of 8 digits using the numeric keys and tap the OK key Tap the key of the desired file If the folder with a password is tapped a password entry screen will appear Enter the password Maximum of 32 digits and tap the OK key Tap the Print Now key to printed out the file with the settings used for its storage Tap the By Job Display key to display the keys of a particular mode such as copy or s...

Page 879: ... also be modified before printing by changing the print settings A file saved in black and white or greyscale cannot be printed in colour Printing is not available when a long size document is saved in Scan to HDD Scan to External Memory Device E mail FTP Desktop or Network Folder Printing is available when the data saved in E mail FTP Desktop or Network Folder includes a Fax or Internet Fax broad...

Page 880: ...s saved Select a file and tap the Print Now key To print the file in black and white select the Print B W checkbox Quick printing Changing settings before printing Quick printing Changing settings before printing After selecting the desired file follow the steps below SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE 4 steps in all Tap the Change Setting to Print key Change the print settings For more information see ...

Page 881: ...different folder If the job type is changed with the By Job Display key or the screen is changed by being tapped while a file is selected the selection of the file will be cancelled Tap the Print key on the action panel When not printing with the number of copies at data saving tap the Apply the Number from Stored Setting of Each Job checkbox to set to When printing with the number of copies at da...

Page 882: ...not allowed checkbox and Selection of User Unknown is not allowed checkbox select the All Users key and User Unknown key If you tap the All Users key all files in the folder the files of all users are selected If you tap the User Unknown key all files in the folder with no user name specified are selected If a password has been established tap the Password key Enter the password 5 to 8 digits usin...

Page 883: ... to specify the number of copies As required directly tap the numeric value display key and change the value using the numeric keys To automatically delete the file after printing tap the Delete key Tap the Start key to start printing If there are no files that match the search conditions you will return to the file list screen It the Delete the Data key on the action panel is tapped all files tha...

Page 884: ...transmission methods require installation of the corresponding options If any of the following other modes were included in the saved file the file cannot be transmitted Pamphlet Copy Covers Inserts Photo Repeat Multi Page Enlargement 2in1 for copying If any of the following other modes were included in the saved file the file can be transmitted but other functions cannot be executed Margin Shift ...

Page 885: ...1 3 02 59 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N FILE TRANSMISSION Index Contents Overview DOCUMENT FILING 3 steps in all Select settings for sending After selecting the desired file follow the steps below SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE Tap the Send key on the action panel Tap the Start key If you are sending a fax or an Internet fax only the B W Start key can be used ...

Page 886: ..._ope contents 06 026a htm 24 03 2011 3 02 59 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N FILE MOVING Index Contents Operation DOCUMENT FILING Changes the file storage location The file is moved to another folder A file whose property is Protect cannot be moved To move a protected file change its property to Sharing or Confidential ...

Page 887: ...word is tapped a password entry screen will appear Enter the password 5 to 8 digits using the numeric keys and tap the OK key After selecting the desired file follow the steps below SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE Tap the Move to key A file cannot be moved to the Quick File folder With this procedure the original name is changed and the file is moved to the specified folder Unlike the Save As command...

Page 888: ...OPERATION GUIDE FILE MOVING file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 06 026b htm 24 03 2011 3 03 00 PM ...

Page 889: ...610_ex_ope contents 06 027a htm 24 03 2011 3 03 01 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N DELETE FILE Index Contents Operation DOCUMENT FILING Stored files that are no longer required can be deleted A file whose property is Protect cannot be deleted To delete a protected file change its property to Sharing or Confidential ...

Page 890: ..._0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 06 027b htm 24 03 2011 3 03 02 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N DELETE FILE Index Contents Overview DOCUMENT FILING 2 steps in all Tap the Delete key Check the file and then tap the Yes key After selecting the desired file follow the steps below SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE ...

Page 891: ...2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N FILE IMAGE CHECKING Index Contents Operation DOCUMENT FILING Depending on the size of the image part of the image may be clipped off in the image check screen on the touch panel A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel It will differ from the actual print result The image check screen does not appear when multiple files are selected ...

Page 892: ... mx3610_ex_ope contents 06 028b htm 24 03 2011 3 03 03 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N FILE IMAGE CHECKING Index Contents Overview DOCUMENT FILING 2 steps in all Tap the Check Image key on the action panel Check the image of the file After selecting the desired file follow the steps below SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE ...

Page 893: ...03 04 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N FILE MERGING Index Contents Operation DOCUMENT FILING You can combine files that have been saved by Document Filing If you have only selected a single file the File Merge key is not displayed The file name is a combination of the first file name a tilde and a serial number As required change the file name at a later time ...

Page 894: ...ETRIEVE Append file information To select the user name file name folder and property setting see File Information Changing the property Specifying a user name Assigning a file name Specifying the folder Creating PDF for PC browsing To delete the original file select the Delete checkbox Tap the Execute key Combining of files starts and after the processing is finished the Files combined message ap...

Page 895: ...OPERATION GUIDE FILE MERGING file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 06 029b htm 24 03 2011 3 03 05 PM Index Contents Overview ...

Page 896: ...06 032a htm 24 03 2011 3 03 05 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N RETRIEVING AND USING A FILE FROM THE JOB STATUS SCREEN Index Contents Operation DOCUMENT FILING Files stored using File and Quick File appear as keys in the job status complete screen This is convenient when you need to quickly print the saved data of a copy job or quickly send a saved fax to another destination ...

Page 897: ...A FILE FROM THE JOB STATUS SCREEN Index Contents Overview DOCUMENT FILING 4 steps in all Tap the tab with a file to be retrieved and tap the Complete key Tap the job status display Tap the key of the desired file from the completed job Tap the Send or Change Setting to Print key on the action panel FILE TRANSMISSION FILE PRINTING To view detailed information on a file select the file and then tap ...

Page 898: ...LE SEARCH AND RETRIEVAL Index Contents Operation DOCUMENT FILING When there are many stored files it may take some time to locate a file The search function of document filing mode can be used to find a file quickly Searching is possible even when you only know part of the file name or folder name As required a folder can also be specified as a search range Example Only part of a file name is know...

Page 899: ... appear Enter the password 5 to 8 digits using the numeric keys Tap User Name Search using the user name Select a user on the user selection screen that appears and then tap Login Name Search using the login name Enter the file name or folder name on the soft keyboard that appears and tap the OK key File or Folder Name Search using the file name or folder name Enter the file name or folder name on...

Page 900: ... mode tap the CA key To return to the file search screen tap the Search Again key When you search using File or Folder Name custom folders that match the search characters will also appear in the list When a folder key is tapped a list of the files in the folder appears Tap the desired file in the list Also in setting mode Web version you can use the file search function Click Document Operations ...

Page 901: ...10N MX 3610N PRINTING AN EXTERNAL FILE Index Contents Operation DOCUMENT FILING A file stored in the FTP server USB memory device or network folder of a PC can be printed The file can also be modified before printing by changing the print settings On the action panel tap the Select File from FTP to Print Select File from USB Memory to Print or Select File from Network Folder to Print key ...

Page 902: ...rver Printing a file in a USB memory Printing a file in the network folder of a PC Printing a file on an FTP server 6 steps in all Tap the Select File from FTP to Print key on the action panel Change the print settings For more information see FILE PRINTING Select the Delete or Print B W checkbox when needed To fit the image to the paper size when printing select the Fit To Page checkbox To print ...

Page 903: ...election Printing a file in a USB memory 5 steps in all Tap the Select File from USB Memory to Print key on the action panel Select a file or folder Change the print settings For more information see FILE PRINTING Select the Delete or Print B W checkbox when needed To fit the image to the paper size when printing select the Fit To Page checkbox To print a colour image in black and white when print...

Page 904: ... the file D is tapped the print screen appears A Displays the first level of the network folder This does not appear if there is just one upper level B Displays folders one level above C Displays folders D Displays the print screen Change the print settings For more information see FILE PRINTING Select the Delete or Print B W checkbox when needed To fit the image to the paper size when printing se...

Page 905: ...ERNAL FILE PRINTING file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 06 034b htm 24 03 2011 3 03 09 PM Index Contents Overview Tap the Start key to start file printing ...

Page 906: ...ion of the copy or image send mode If the original is 2 sided be sure to tap the Original key and then tap the 2 Sided Tablet key or the 2 Sided Booklet key as appropriate for the original Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Document Glass Tap the Scan to HDD ke...

Page 907: ...he explanation of the copy or image send mode If the original is 2 sided be sure to tap the Original key and then tap the 2 Sided Tablet key or the 2 Sided Booklet key as appropriate for the original Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Document Glass Tap the Sca...

Page 908: ... mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 11 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N Index SETTING MODE SETTING MODE SETTING MODE LIST TOP PAGE STATUS ADDRESS BOOK USER CONTROL SYSTEM SETTINGS NETWORK SETTINGS APPLICATION SETTINGS ENERGY SAVE E MAIL ALERT AND STATUS JOB LOG SECURITY SETTINGS SETTING MODE FOR FAX ...

Page 909: ...network connection setting and log check of operation status Setting mode can also be selected using the Web browser by accessing the machine from a PC connected to the same network as the machine This section explains the settings that can be controlled from the touch panel of the machine Administrator password To maintain security the machine administrator should promptly change the password aft...

Page 910: ...he machine 1 step in all Tap the item that you wish to set up from the menu on the left of the screen For details of the settings see the explanation for each item To quit the setting mode tap the Exit key in the upper right corner of the screen For details on login procedures when user authentication is enabled see User authentication of the OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Displaying the setting m...

Page 911: ... machine From the menu tap System Settings Print Data List Tap the Print key on the All Custom Setting List Check the IP address on the printed list Recommended Web browsers Internet Explorer 6 0 or later Windows Netscape Navigator 9 Windows Firefox 2 0 or later Windows Safari 1 5 or later Macintosh Displaying the Setting mode Web version Depending on the machine settings user authentication may b...

Page 912: ...dex Contents SETTING MODE The following is a list of setting mode items factory default settings and restrictions for each item Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed it may not be possible to use some settings U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Status Device status No Yes Network status Yes Yes Power reset No Yes ...

Page 913: ...ex Contents SETTING MODE The following is a list of setting mode items factory default settings and restrictions for each item Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed it may not be possible to use some settings U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Address Book Yes Yes Category Setting Category 1 Yes Yes Global Address...

Page 914: ...stom Index User1 Yes Yes Default Settings No Yes User Authentication No Yes User Authentication Disabled No Yes Authentication Method Setting Authenticate a User by Login Name and Password No Yes Device Account Mode Setting Disabled No Yes Actions when the limit of pages for output jobs Job is Completed even when the Limit of Pages is Reached No Yes A Warning when Login Fails Disabled No Yes Disab...

Page 915: ...ist No Yes Page Limit Group List No Yes Page Limit Setting No Yes Authority Group List No Yes Favourite Operation Group List No Yes Customized Key List 1 No Yes Home Screen List 1 No Yes User Count Showing user count No Yes Save user count No Yes Card Area Settings No Yes Check Facility Code in HID Mode OFF No Yes Import from Configuration file No Yes Card reading test No Yes Card Type Reader Sett...

Page 916: ... System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Total Count Yes Yes Job Count Yes Yes Device Count Yes Yes Default Settings U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Default Settings Yes Yes Clock Adjust Yes Yes Specify Time Zone Yes Yes Date Time Settings Yes Yes Synchronize with Internet Time Server Disabled Yes Yes Daylight Saving ...

Page 917: ...or Item Factory default setting U A List Print User Yes Yes All Custom Setting List Yes Yes Printer Test Page Yes Yes Sending Address List Yes Yes Document Filing Folder List Yes Yes Paper Tray Settings U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Paper Tray Settings Yes Yes Tray 1 Plain Auto AB Auto Inch Yes Yes Tray 2 1 Yes Yes Tray 3 1 Yes Yes Tray 4 1 Ye...

Page 918: ... Data Receive Forward Yes Yes Internet Fax Settings Yes Yes Reception Start Yes Yes Manual Reception Key in Initial Screen Enabled Yes Yes Forward Received Data Yes Yes When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed Printer Condition Settings U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Printer Condition Settings Yes Yes Default Settings Yes Yes Copies 1 s...

Page 919: ...nch Disabled Yes Yes Quick File Disabled Yes Yes PCL Settings Yes Yes PCL Symbol Set Setting PC 8 Yes Yes PCL Font Setting Internal Font 0 Courier Yes Yes PCL Line Feed Code 0 CR CR LF LF FF FF Yes Yes Wide A4 Disabled Yes Yes PostScript Settings Yes Yes Print PS Error Disabled Yes Yes Binary Processing Disabled Yes Yes Document Filing Control U General user A System administrator Administrator It...

Page 920: ...ine configuration No Yes Default Display Settings Home Screen No Yes Disabling of Job Priority Operation Disabled No Yes Disabling of Bypass Printing Disabled No Yes Key Operation Setting 0 0 seconds No Yes Disable Auto Key Repeat Disabled No Yes Disabling of Clock Adjustment Disabled No Yes Disabling of Covers Inserts Mode Disabled No Yes Set Keyboard Priority 1 Soft Keyboard No Yes Initial Origi...

Page 921: ...assword No Yes Operational Authority Prohibited No Yes View Password Entry Screen Display in both computer and machine No Yes Cookie Settings Not stored No Yes Prohibit sending simultaneously with copy Disabled No Yes Prohibit sending simultaneously with print Disabled No Yes Soft Keyboard Template Setting No Yes Customized Key Setting 2 No Yes Copy No Yes Customize 1 File No Yes Customize 2 Quick...

Page 922: ...ntrol U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Device Control No Yes Original Size Detector Setting No Yes Original Detection Size Combination AB 1 Inch 1 No Yes Cancel Detection at Document Glass Disabled No Yes Disabling of Document Feeder Disabled No Yes Original Feeding Mode All Disabled No Yes Disabling of Duplex Disabled No Yes Disabling of Large C...

Page 923: ...to 23 lbs No Yes Registration Adjustment No Yes Optimization of Hard Disk No Yes 1 When a large capacity tray is installed 2 When a paper drawer is installed 3 When a saddle finisher or finisher is installed 4 When a saddle finisher is installed 5 When a punch module is installed 6 When a colour related problem has occurred Copy Settings U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Fac...

Page 924: ... Original Size X 86 mm 3 3 8 Y 54 mm 2 1 8 No Yes Fit to Page Disabled No Yes Automatic Saddle Stitch Enabled No Yes Initial Tab Copy Setting 10 mm 1 2 No Yes Prohibition of Program Registration Disabled No Yes Disabling of Bypass Tray in Duplex Copy Disabled No Yes Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disabled No Yes Auto Selection Setting of Tray that is Supplied the Paper Disabled No Yes Prohibiti...

Page 925: ...ies depending on the machine configuration No Yes Print Density Level No Yes Colour 3 No Yes B W 3 No Yes CMYK Exposure Adjustment All 0 No Yes Bypass Tray Settings No Yes Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray Disabled No Yes Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray Enabled No Yes Exclude Bypass Tray from Auto Paper Select Disabled No Yes Job Spool Queuing Enabled No Yes Prohibit USB Memory D...

Page 926: ...ettings No Yes Hold settings for a while after scanning has been completed Disabled No Yes Default Display Settings E mail fax when fax is installed No Yes Display all destination types regardless of display mode Disabled No Yes Image Orientation Portrait No Yes Initial Resolution Setting No Yes Common to scans Apply the Resolution Set when Stored Disabled 200 X 200 dpi No Yes E mail Apply the Res...

Page 927: ...entre Clearance Width 10 mm 1 2 No Yes Time Specified Output of Received Data Disabled No Yes Enable Disable Settings No Yes Settings to Disable Registration No Yes Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel All Invalid No Yes Disable Registering Destination on Web Page 3 All Invalid No Yes Prohibition of Program Registration All Invalid No Yes Disable Registration of Memory Box All Inva...

Page 928: ...ault Sender Set No Yes Default Colour Mode Settings No Yes Common to scans No item Auto No Yes No item Greyscale No Yes Disable Change of B W Setting in Auto Mode Disabled No Yes Common to e mails No item Auto No Yes No item Greyscale No Yes Disable Change of B W Setting in Auto Mode Disabled No Yes Initial File Format Setting Common to scans No Yes File Type PDF No Yes B W MMR G4 No Yes Colour Gr...

Page 929: ...isable Scan Function No Yes PC Scan Disabled No Yes Default Address Setting Disabled No Yes Internet Fax Settings 1 No Yes Default Settings No Yes Auto Wake Up Print Enabled No Yes Compression Setting MH G3 No Yes Speaker Volume Setting No Yes Receive Signal Middle No Yes Communication Error Signal Middle No Yes Original Print on Transaction Report Print Out Error Report Only No Yes Transaction Re...

Page 930: ...ion Error Recall Times 1 Interval 3 minutes No Yes Receive Settings No Yes Auto Receive Reduce Setting Enabled No Yes Duplex Reception Setting Disabled No Yes Set Address for Data Forwarding No Yes Direct SMTP Disabled No Yes Add Hostname or IP Address Too Disabled No Yes Hostname or IP Address No Yes Letter Size RX Reduce Print 5 Disabled No Yes Receiving Date Time Print Disabled No Yes A3 RX Red...

Page 931: ...te File Disabled No Yes Delete Folder Disabled No Yes Change Password Disabled No Yes Delete All Quick Files No Yes Delete Now No Yes Delete Quick Files at Power Up Enabled No Yes Image Orientation Portrait No Yes Default Colour Mode Settings Auto No Yes Default Exposure Settings Auto No Yes Default Original Image Type Text No Yes Initial Resolution Settings 600 X 600 dpi No Yes Colour Data Compre...

Page 932: ...ing PDF No Yes B W MMR G4 No Yes Colour Greyscale No Yes Compression Ratio Middle No Yes Emphasize Black Letter Disabled No Yes Specified Pages per File Disabled No Yes Default Exposure Settings Auto No Yes Default Original Image Type Auto No Yes Initial Resolution Settings 200 X 200 dpi No Yes Prohibition of Saving in External Memory Device Disabled No Yes PDF Format Default Settings for PC Brows...

Page 933: ...bled No Yes Fit to the resolution at time job is executed Disabled No Yes Document Output Options No Yes Print No Yes Copy Enabled No Yes Printer Enabled No Yes Scan Send Disabled No Yes Internet Fax Send Including PC I Fax 2 Disabled No Yes Fax Send Including PC Fax 3 Disabled No Yes Scan to HDD Enabled No Yes Scan Send No Yes Copy Disabled No Yes Printer Disabled No Yes Scan Send Enabled No Yes ...

Page 934: ... Disabled No Yes Automatic Deletion of File Settings All Invalid No Yes 1 When the exit tray unit is installed 2 When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed 3 When the facsimile expansion kit is installed List Print Administrator U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A List Print Administrator No Yes Administrator Settings List No Yes Image Sending...

Page 935: ...ings No Yes 1 When an external account module is installed 2 When an external account module or application communication module is installed Enable Disable Settings U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A ENABLE DISABLE SETTINGS No Yes Printer Condition Settings No Yes Disable Blank Page Print Disabled No Yes User Control No Yes Disabling of Printing b...

Page 936: ...e Disabled No Yes Disabling of Slave Machine Mode Disabled No Yes Copy Settings No Yes Prohibition of Program Registration Disabled No Yes Disabling of Bypass Tray in Duplex Copy Disabled No Yes Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disabled No Yes Prohibition of Custom Image Registration Disabled No Yes Prohibit utilize sending function at copy Disabled No Yes Printer Settings No Yes Prohibit Notice ...

Page 937: ...able Registration Using Network Scanner Tools 6 Disabled No Yes Prohibition of Inbound Routing 6 Disabled No Yes Settings to Disable Transmission No Yes Disable Resend on Image Send Mode Disabled No Yes Disable Selection from Address Book All Invalid No Yes Disable Direct Entry All Invalid No Yes Disable PC I Fax Transmission 7 Disabled No Yes Disable PC Fax Transmission 8 Disabled No Yes Document...

Page 938: ...alled 2 When a paper drawer is installed 3 When a saddle finisher or finisher is installed 4 When a punch module is installed 5 When a colour related problem has occurred 6 When the network is enabled 7 When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed 8 When the facsimile expansion kit is installed 9 When the Web browsing expansion kit is installed Data Backup U General user A System administrator...

Page 939: ...egration Module No Yes Application Communication Module No Yes External Account Module No Yes XPS expansion kit No Yes It may not be possible to use some settings depending on the peripheral devices installed Storing Calling of System Settings U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Storing Calling of System Settings No Yes Restore Factory Defaults No Y...

Page 940: ...ed it may not be possible to use some settings U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Network Settings Quick Settings No Yes Network Name Settings No Yes DNS Settings No Yes SMTP Settings No Yes LDAP Settings No Yes Public Folder NAS Settings No Yes General Settings No Yes General Settings No Yes Print Status on Startup Disabled No Yes Network Settings...

Page 941: ...led No Yes Frame Type 802 2 No Yes Operation Mode PSERVER No Yes PSERVER Settings No Yes Bindery Mode Enabled No Yes RPRINTER Settings No Yes EtherTalk No Yes EtherTalk Settings No Yes EtherTalk Disabled No Yes NetBEUI No Yes NetBEUI Settings No Yes NetBEUI Disabled No Yes Services Settings No Yes DNS No Yes WINS No Yes SMTP No Yes SNMP No Yes Kerberos No Yes SNTP No Yes mDNS No Yes Print Port Set...

Page 942: ...s WSD Settings No Yes WSD Print Enabled No Yes Use Multicast Discovery Enabled No Yes LDAP Settings No Yes LDAP Settings Enabled No Yes Global Address Books List No Yes Public Folder NAS Settings No Yes Public Use of Storage Allowed No Yes Shared Use of Storage Allowed No Yes Proxy Settings No Yes Proxy Server Address No Yes User Name No Yes Password No Yes Port Number 8080 No Yes Address without ...

Page 943: ...OPERATION GUIDE NETWORK SETTINGS file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 003 05 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 22 PM Index Contents ...

Page 944: ...ystem administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Application Settings Print Menu Setting Yes Yes Text Settings Stamp Yes Yes Custom Stamp No Yes Custom Watermark No Yes Network Scanner Settings Yes Yes Subject Name Settings Yes Yes File Name Settings Yes Yes Message Body Settings Yes Yes Administration Settings No Yes Advanced Settings No Yes Disable Selection of Reply to Disable...

Page 945: ...ble SSL Disabled No Yes Connection Test No Yes Default Settings No Yes Own Number and Name Set No Yes Sender Name No Yes Source Address No Yes Direct SMTP No Yes Port Number Receive 25 No Yes Timeout 300 No Yes Port Number Send 25 No Yes Timeout 300 No Yes Inbound Routing Settings Yes Yes Sender Number Address Registration Yes Yes Administration Settings No Yes Inbound Routing Settings No Yes Inbo...

Page 946: ...elivery Disabled No Yes Metadata Set List No Yes External Applications Settings Standard Application Settings No Yes Received Application Settings No Yes External Accounting Application Settings No Yes External Account Control Disabled No Yes Web Browsing Settings No Yes How to Handle Cookies Alert me No Yes Disable URL Entry Disabled No Yes Disable Adding or Editing Favourites Disabled No Yes Dis...

Page 947: ...s No Yes E mail Print Disabled No Yes POP3 Server No Yes Port Number 110 No Yes POP Authentication Disabled No Yes User Name No Yes Password No Yes Check Interval 5 minutes No Yes Enable SSL Disabled No Yes Connection Test No Yes Setting for Print from the MFP FTP No Yes Setting for Print from the MFP SMB No Yes Setting for Print from the PC No Yes FTP Print Enabled No Yes Port Number 21 No Yes Us...

Page 948: ...gs U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Energy Save No Yes Eco Mode Settings No Yes Eco Mode Settings Following the System Settings No Yes Eco Scan Setting No Yes Eco Scan Setting Enabled No Yes Home Screen Disabled No Yes Copy Disabled No Yes Fax Image Send No Yes Scan Send Enabled No Yes Fax I Fax Send Enabled No Yes Metadata Set Enabled No Yes Doc...

Page 949: ...ents Web Browsing Enabled No Yes Power Management Setting Disabled No Yes Preheat Mode Setting 1 minutes No Yes Turn Off the panel display in the Preheat mode Enabled No Yes Auto Power Shut Off Enabled No Yes As soon as the remote job is finished enter Auto power shut off mode Enabled No Yes Power ON OFF Schedule Setting No Yes When the Web browsing expansion kit is installed ...

Page 950: ...LERT AND STATUS Index Contents SETTING MODE The following is a list of setting mode items factory default settings and restrictions for each item Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed it may not be possible to use some settings U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A E Mail Alert and Status E mail Status No Yes Alerts ...

Page 951: ...JOB LOG Index Contents SETTING MODE The following is a list of setting mode items factory default settings and restrictions for each item Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed it may not be possible to use some settings U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Job Log Control Job Log No Yes View Job Log No Yes ...

Page 952: ...s installed it may not be possible to use some settings U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Security Settings Change Password No Yes Port Control No Yes Server Port No Yes HTTP Enabled No Yes Port Number 80 No Yes HTTPS Enabled No Yes Port Number 443 No Yes FTP Print Enabled No Yes Port Number 21 No Yes Raw Print Enabled No Yes Port Number 9100 No Y...

Page 953: ...o Yes SMTP Enabled No Yes WSD Enabled No Yes USB Device Expansion 1 Enabled No Yes Sharp OSA Expansion Platform No Yes HTTP Enabled No Yes Port Number 10080 No Yes HTTPS Enabled No Yes Port Number 10443 No Yes Client Port No Yes HTTP Enabled No Yes HTTPS Enabled No Yes FTP Enabled No Yes FTPS Enabled No Yes SMTP Enabled No Yes SMTP SSL Enabled No Yes POP3 Enabled No Yes POP3 SSL Enabled No Yes SNM...

Page 954: ...dress Filter Settings No Yes Filter Addresses 1 to 10 0 No Yes SSL Settings No Yes Server Port No Yes HTTPS Enabled No Yes IPP SSL Disabled No Yes Redirect HTTP to HTTPS in Device Web Page Access Disabled No Yes Client Port No Yes HTTPS Enabled No Yes FTPS Enabled No Yes SMTP SSL Enabled No Yes POP3 SSL Enabled No Yes LDAP SSL Enabled No Yes Level of Encryption Low No Yes Certificate Information N...

Page 955: ...No Yes IPsec Rules No Yes Pattern Print No Yes Default Settings Hidden Pattern Print Setting Standard No Yes Print Colour Black No Yes Exposure Standard No Yes Font Size 48 points No Yes Angle 0 deg No Yes Font Style Standard No Yes Camouflage Pattern Pattern 1 No Yes Print Method Character stand out No Yes Print Contents Setting No Yes Standard Characters DO NOT COPY No Yes Pre set Text ON No Yes...

Page 956: ...abled No Yes Print Colour Select Black No Yes Print Position No Yes Vertical Position No Yes Print on the Upper of Paper Disabled No Yes Print on the Lower of Paper Enabled No Yes Horizontal Position No Yes Print to the Left Enabled No Yes Print to the Right Disabled No Yes Select the Job to Print No Yes Copy Enabled No Yes Printer Enabled No Yes Prints Document Filing Enabled No Yes Internet Fax ...

Page 957: ...ocuments Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 003 10 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 27 PM Index Contents 3 Displayed when the Internet fax function is enabled 4 Displayed when the fax function is enabled ...

Page 958: ... 3610N TOP PAGE Index Contents SETTING MODE The following is a list of setting mode items factory default settings and restrictions for each item Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed it may not be possible to use some settings U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Status Machine Identification No Yes ...

Page 959: ...ication screen appears Model Name Displays the standard model name of the machine Machine Location The information entered in the Machine Location item in Machine Identification appears If no name has been set Not Set appears Current Status Displays the current status of the machine The display status depends on the PAU display format If two or more errors occur at the same time only one status is...

Page 960: ...mo Displays a text that the administrator entered Device Status Graphically displays the current status of the machine Reboot the MFP key Displays the restart screen Enter the Power Save Mode key Displays the power save mode screen Machine Identification Screen Item Description Name Enter the model name and other information of the machine Machine Code Enter the machine code of the machine Machine...

Page 961: ...Updates the information displayed Back button Returns to the top page Paper Input Tray Status Displays the current status of the paper trays installed in the machine Output Tray Status Displays the current status of the output tray installed in the machine Supply Status Displays the current status of supplies If staples are installed their status is displayed Device Configuration Displays the info...

Page 962: ...plex Mode Displays the duplex mode of the NIC Hardware Address Displays the MAC address of the NIC Print Status on Startup Displays whether or not status is printed upon startup Device Name Displays the device name Domain Displays the domain name TCP IP Displays the current status of the TCP IP protocol IPv4 Settings Displays the IPv4 protocol settings DHCP BOOTP Selects whether or not the IP addr...

Page 963: ...current IP address of the primary DNS server Secondary Server Displays the current IP address of the secondary DNS server Domain Name Displays the current domain name of the DNS server WINS Displays the status of the WINS server Primary Server Displays the current IP address of the primary WINS server Secondary Server Displays the current IP address of the secondary WINS server Primary Server DHCP...

Page 964: ...ion mode Print Server Name Displays the print server name NDS Tree Displays the NDS tree name NDS Context Displays the NDS context EtherTalk Status Displays the EtherTalk status EtherTalk Displays the status of the EtherTalk protocol Zone Name Displays the zone name Type Name Displays the type name Object Name Displays the object name NetBEUI Status Displays the NetBEUI status NetBEUI Displays the...

Page 965: ...eset screen enables you to restart the machine or enter the power save mode In some environments the machine cannot be restarted or shifted to power save mode Item Description Reboot the machine Reboots the machine Tapping the Execute key opens the Restart screen and then tapping the Execute key again restarts the machine Enter the Power Save Mode Shifts the machine to power save mode Tap the Exec...

Page 966: ...0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 010 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 32 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N CATEGORY SETTING Index Contents SETTING MODE A category can be renamed for greater ease of use Delete the previously entered characters and enter a new name up to 127 characters The factory default name is Category 1 ...

Page 967: ...lay the global address book setting screen Registration Item Description Applicable Destination Type Select the applicable destination type from E mail Address Fax Number and Internet Fax Allow selection on operation panel Specify whether or not enable the global address to be selected on the operation panel of the machine To Be Used as Default Specify whether or not to use the selected global add...

Page 968: ...registered users When you select a user name the user edit or delete screen appears The Vender and Vender2 options are displayed only when the vender is connected Storing a user When you tap the Add key the registration screen appears Up to 1000 groups can be registered For information on the settings see Settings Editing and deleting a user When you select a user from the list the user edit delet...

Page 969: ...User Name Administrator System Administrator Group Fixed User Vender Vender2 Other User Login Name admin sysadmin users device account Vender Vender2 Other Password See Quick Start Guide 1 sysadmin 1 users 1 device account 1 My Folder Main Folder Authentication Settings Login Locally Pages Limit Group Unlimited 1 Authority Group 2 Admin System Administrator 1 User 1 Guest 1 Favourite Operation Gro...

Page 970: ...authentication User Group Set a group to which the user belongs Up to 8 groups can be assigned Authentication Server When the Network Authentication is selected select the server to be used for user authentication from the LDAP server list that is stored using Setting mode Web version Pages Limit Group Specify the page limit for the user by selecting one of the stored page limit groups The factory...

Page 971: ...ATION GUIDE USER LIST file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 012 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 33 PM Index Contents The factory default name is User 1 ...

Page 972: ...s enabled see User authentication of the OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES User Authentication When User Authentication is enabled the authentication screen appears before an operation is carried out in any mode except the job status screen Log in as an already registered user After logging in you can move freely through the modes The login screen appears when a document filing file is used or when a...

Page 973: ...le this enables uses such as authentication for colour copying only Also you can temporarily log in as a user other than the auto login user and operate the machine with the privileges of this user To allow other users to log in temporarily when Device Account Mode is enabled select Allow Login by Different User If you have logged in as the Auto Login user and if you have failed automatic login du...

Page 974: ...N ACTIONS WHEN THE LIMIT OF PAGES FOR OUTPUT JOBS Index Contents SETTING MODE This setting determines whether or not a job will be completed if the page limit is reached while the job is in progress The following settings can be configured Job is Completed even when the Limit of Pages is Reached Job is Stopped when the Limit of Pages is Reached Job is Stopped when the Limit of Pages is Reached and...

Page 975: ...ts SETTING MODE If a login fails three times in succession a warning is displayed and further login is disabled for five minutes This prevents an unauthorised person from attempting to guess a password The number of failed login attempts is retained even if the power is turned off Locking of the operation panel for five minutes can be cancelled by selecting User Control in Setting mode Default Set...

Page 976: ...ex Contents SETTING MODE Printing by users whose information is not stored in the machine such as printing without entering valid user information in the printer driver or printing of a file on an FTP server in Setting mode Web version can be prohibited When a print job is executed by a user who is not registered in the machine the Other User registered as factory default is used as the login user...

Page 977: ...x_ope contents 07 013 06 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 36 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N AUTOMATICALLY PRINT STORED JOBS AFTER LOGIN Index Contents SETTING MODE When retention is enabled in the printer driver and print data has been spooled to the machine you can have the spooled print data automatically print out when the user who enabled retention logs in ...

Page 978: ...authentication server When you log into Setting mode Web version or send a print job to the machine using user information that is not registered in the machine the authentication server is not known This setting is used to select one of the LDAP servers registered in the machine as the authentication server When login is performed by network authentication using user information that is not regis...

Page 979: ...r including base settings for each group and associate these with the control numbers registered in the machine To use this function add the properties associated with Pages Limit Group Authority Group Favourite Operation Group and My Folder to the directory information of the LDAP server used for user authentication The property information is indicated below Settings previously stored in the mac...

Page 980: ...the same authority so that they will be registered in each machine using the same registration numbers For My Folder register the folder having the same name in Custom Folder in each machine The directory information of the LDAP server that is used cannot be changed from the machine Consult the administrator of the LDAP server Users auto registered When access control is enabled and login is perfo...

Page 981: ...ble Maximum entries for User Name is 1000 Old or unused user names will be deleted Consult the administrator of the machine If access control information cannot be obtained from the LDAP server used for authentication user authentication cannot take place If a user that is registered in the machine is authenticated by network authentication the user registration settings in the machine will be giv...

Page 982: ...20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 013 09 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 38 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N DISPLAY USAGE STATUS AFTER LOGIN Index Contents SETTING MODE When user authentication is enabled this setting specifies whether or not to display the page counts of a user when the user logs in ...

Page 983: ..._3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 013 10 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 39 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N LOGIN NAME DISPLAY Index Contents SETTING MODE When user authentication is enabled this setting specifies whether or not to display the login name ...

Page 984: ...tion 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 013 12 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 39 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N INCLUDE JOB STATUS IN USER AUTHENTICATION Index Contents SETTING MODE When user authentication is enabled this setting specifies whether or not to include the job status in user authentication ...

Page 985: ...x3610_ex_ope contents 07 013 13 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 40 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N AUTOMATIC LOGOUT SETTING Index Contents SETTING MODE When user authentication is enabled this setting specifies whether or not to enable automatic logout The time until logout can be specified up to 240 seconds in increments of 10 seconds ...

Page 986: ...011 3 03 41 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N USER INFORMATION PRINT Index Contents SETTING MODE Prints the following item lists User List List of Number of Pages Used Page Limit Group List AUTHORITY GROUP LIST Favourite Operation Group List All User Information Print Select each item and tap the Print key to print it out Cannot be printed when no groups are stored ...

Page 987: ...oducts MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 013 15 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 42 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N EDIT HELP DISPLAY OF LOGIN SCREEN Index Contents SETTING MODE Settings you have created here is displayed on the login screen ...

Page 988: ...nts Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 013 16 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 42 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N RESETTING THE COUNTER AFTER E MAIL STATUS TRANSFER Index Contents SETTING MODE After E mail Status has been sent the counter is reset ...

Page 989: ...s MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 015 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 43 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N USER GROUP LIST Index Contents SETTING MODE This is used to store user groups Tap each group name to enter them directly ...

Page 990: ... Settings Editing a page limit group Selecting a group from the list displays the edit screen for that group For information on the settings see Settings To return a group to the factory default state set Select the Group Name to be the Registration Model to Unlimited on the edit screen Settings Item Description Group Name Store the name of the group up to 32 characters Select the Home Screen to b...

Page 991: ...OPERATION GUIDE PAGE LIMIT GROUP LIST file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 016 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 43 PM Index Contents ...

Page 992: ... MODE Sets the page limit for the machine Settings Item Description Function Names The name of the functions that can be configured is displayed Set a limit for each function Page Limit When Prohibited is selected for a mode input from the mode is prohibited When Unlimited is selected for a mode there is no limit to the number of pages that can be input output in that mode When Limited is selected...

Page 993: ...roups Editing an authority group Selecting a group from the list displays the edit screen for that group For detailed information about each of the settings see List of settings and factory default settings of template groups To return a group to the factory default state select the group from the list and select any of options Return to the Administrator Authority Return to the system administrat...

Page 994: ...hibited Allowed Only Black White Allowed FTP Pull Print Allowed Prohibited Allowed Prohibited USB Memory Direct Print Allowed Prohibited Allowed Prohibited Network Folder Pull Print Allowed Prohibited Allowed Prohibited Utilize sending function at print Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Toner Save Mode Usage Approval Setting No Toner Saving No Toner Saving No Toner Saving No Toner Saving PDF Creatio...

Page 995: ...mory Device Colour Mode Approval Setting All allowed All prohibited All allowed Only Black White Allowed Using Others Allowed Prohibited Allowed Prohibited Prints Document Filing Colour Mode Approval Setting All allowed All prohibited All allowed Only Black White Allowed Using Others Allowed Prohibited Allowed Prohibited Toner Save Mode Usage Approval Setting 1 No Toner Saving No Toner Saving No T...

Page 996: ...System Settings 2 Allowed 3 Allowed 3 Only user authority settings are allowed All settings prohibited Web Settings Display of Device Network Status Allowed Allowed Allowed Prohibited Power Reset Prohibited Machine Identification Prohibited Application Settings Excluding Registration of Pre set Text Forward Table Prohibited Registration of Pre set Text Forward Table Allowed E Mail Alert and Status...

Page 997: ...OPERATION GUIDE AUTHORITY GROUP LIST file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 019 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 45 PM Index Contents ...

Page 998: ...ettings Select settings for Colour Mode Paper Tray Exposure Type Copy Ratio 2 Sided Output Offset Output Tray and Staple Position Image Send Initial Status Settings Select settings for Image Orientation Exposure Resolution Colour Mode File Format and Original Image Type Also select settings for Specified Pages per File and register Sender Name for fax Document Filing Scan to HDD Initial Status Set...

Page 999: ...omatically print stored jobs after login When retention is enabled in the printer driver and print data has been spooled to the machine the spooled print data is automatically printed out when the user who enabled retention logs in Default List Thumbnail Display Select the default display format Customize Key Setting Select to use System Settings or use the registered customized key settings for p...

Page 1000: ...cted the settings of this home screen are applied Template A template for the design of the home screen can be selected from the list A sample of the selected template can be reviewed Key Layout of the Screen The layout of the keys in the home screen is displayed Home button Registers the function to use for the selected key number Fixed button Registers the function to use for the selected key nu...

Page 1001: ...functions They will be displayed in the base screen of each mode The display settings returns to the factory default state when you tap the Return to the Factory Default Setting key for each mode Settings Item Description Key Name Enter a name for the customized key maximum of 20 characters Function Menu Program Others Select the function that you wish to assign to the key The functions that can b...

Page 1002: ...Show key this user count is displayed Item Description Next Displays the next user in the order of the registration numbers Previous Displays the previous user in the order of the registration numbers Show Counts Displays the counts and the number of pages remaining of the selected user for each function Page Limit The page limit set for the user appears in parentheses below the count If periphera...

Page 1003: ... registration numbers Show Counts Displays the counts and the number of pages remaining of the selected user for each function Clear Count Reset the count of the selected item to 0 Clear All Count Clears all counts of the selected user to zero 0 When multiple users are selected Item Description Show Counts Displays the counts and the number of pages remaining of the selected user for each function...

Page 1004: ...03 2011 3 03 49 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N TOTAL COUNT Index Contents SETTING MODE This function shows the page count in each mode Pages printed directly from the machine such as list prints are included in the Other Prints count The items displayed or printed will vary depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed ...

Page 1005: ...ation Settings Disabling of Clock Adjustment is enabled the date and time cannot be set Item Description Specify Time Zone If your region is ahead of GMT Greenwich Mean Time select If your region is behind GMT select Next specify the time difference between your region and GMT in hours and minutes Example If your region is Japan 9 hours 00 minutes Date Time Settings Select and set the year month d...

Page 1006: ...ng Type set the starting week of daylight saving time and then the starting day If you selected Date in Select Setting Type set the starting date Set the hour and minute and the UTC Coordinated Universal Time setting Completing Time Set the ending time of daylight saving time in the same way as you set the starting time Adjustment Time Set the time to be adjusted when daylight saving time begins W...

Page 1007: ...OPERATION GUIDE DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME SETTING file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 024 03 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 50 PM Index Contents ...

Page 1008: ...ings in Setting mode Operation Settings Disabling of Clock Adjustment is enabled the date and time cannot be set Item Description Current Setting The current time appears in the format set in Date Format Format Set the order of display of the year month and day Separator Select one of three symbols or a blank space for the separator used in the date Day Name Position Select whether the day name ap...

Page 1009: ...M MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N KEYBOARD SELECT Index Contents SETTING MODE This is the first and basic setting for operating the machine The layout of the keyboard that appears in text entry screens can be changed The keyboard layouts that can be selected are shown below English US English UK Japanese French German Swedish Norwegian Finnish Danish Russian Greek Turkish ...

Page 1010: ...is is used to print the PCL Symbol Set List various font lists and the NIC page network interface settings etc PCL Symbol Set List PCL Internal Font List PCL Extended Font List PS Font List PS Extended Font List NIC Page Sending Address List Lists can be printed of various addresses stored in the machine Individual List Group List Program List Memory Box List All Sending Address List Document Fili...

Page 1011: ...ing setting screen appears The following settings can be configured Item Description Type Select a type of paper to be loaded into the tray The paper types that can be selected vary by paper tray For more information see Tray Settings To user type setup see PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION Size Select the paper size from the list The paper sizes that can be selected vary by tray The sizes that can be selec...

Page 1012: ...annot be changed in this screen If System Settings in Setting mode Device Control Disabling of Tray Settings is selected the tray settings except for the bypass tray cannot be configured Tray Settings Paper Tray Paper Type Size Tray 1 Plain Pre Printed Recycled Letter Head Pre Punched Colour Heavy Paper 1 1 User Type 26 31 Paper Machine A3 A4 A4R A5R B4 B5 B5R 11 x17 8 1 2 x14 8 1 2 x13 2 5 216mmx...

Page 1013: ... 8K 16K 16KR Tray 3 when a paper drawer is installed Tray 4 when a paper drawer is installed Tray 5 when a large capacity tray is installed Plain Pre Printed Recycled Letter Head Pre Punched Colour User Type A4 B5 8 1 2 x 11 Bypass In addition to the paper types of trays 1 to 4 Heavy Paper 2 1 Thin Paper Glossy Paper Auto AB A3W A3 B4 A4 A4R A5R B5 B5R 11 x17 8 1 2 x11 216mmx330mm 8 1 2 x13 2 216m...

Page 1014: ...0 g m2 to 256 g m2 index 110 lbs bond to 140 lbs heavy paper The size that is automatically detected is set in Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection in the bypass tray settings screen see below Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection in the bypass tray settings screen is used to select the paper size that is automatically detected from similar sizes when t...

Page 1015: ...p to three paper sizes can be registered Tap the key Custom 1 to Custom 7 in which you wish to register or change a paper size and the registration screen appears Select whether you wish to enter the size in mm Size Input AB or inches Size Input Inch and then set the X and Y dimensions of the paper Size Input AB The X direction can be set between 140 mm or 148 mm if finisher installed and 432 mm T...

Page 1016: ...paper properties Up to 7 paper types can be registered Item Description Type Name Register any name The factory default names are User Type 1 to User Type 7 Fixed Paper Side Enable this setting when paper with a front and reverse side is used Disable Duplex Enable this setting when paper is loaded that cannot used for 2 sided printing Disable Staple Enable this setting when paper is used that cann...

Page 1017: ...Tap the job status display and cancel fax forwarding in the similar way as for a transmission job Forwarding is not possible if no faxes were received or a forwarding fax number is not programmed For an explanation of settings related to the fax function see FAX DATA RECEIVE FORWARD FAX FUNCTIONS To enable Reception Start the POP3 server settings must be configured See Application Settings in Sett...

Page 1018: ...OPERATION GUIDE FAX DATA RECEIVE FORWARD file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 029 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 55 PM Index Contents ...

Page 1019: ...n when the PCL printer driver is used When printing using the printer driver the printer driver settings take precedence over the printer condition settings Settings Item Setting Copies 1 999 sets Orientation Portrait Horizontal Default Paper Size A3W A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 2 5 216 mm x 340 mm 216 mm x 330 mm 8 1 2 x 13 216 mm x 343 mm 8 1 2 x 13 1 2 8 1 2 x 11 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 5 1 2 x...

Page 1020: ...Upper Left To Lower 5 Upper Right To Left 5 Upper Right To Lower 5 Fit To Page 6 Use Fit to Page Do not use Fit to Page Output Use Print per Unit Do not use Print per Unit Staple Position 1 None 1 Staple at Back 2 Staples 2 Staples Top Use Punch 7 Do not use Punch 7 Quick File Disabled Enabled When the finisher is installed This setting is used to adjust the line width of vector graphics Except fo...

Page 1021: ...11 3 03 55 PM Index Contents Paper sizes that can be used with this function are A3 B4 and A4 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 This function may not take effect with some print methods Can be selected when 2 Up is selected Can be selected when 4 Up 8 Up is selected Only effective when printing PDF JPEG and TIFF files When a punch module is installed 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 1022: ...l set used for printing Select from 35 items PCL Font Setting Select a font used for printing Internal Font Extended Font List of internal fonts when extended fonts are not installed PCL Line Feed Code This setting is used to select how the printer responds when a line feed command is received 0 CR CR LF LF FF FF 1 CR CR LF LF LF FF FF 2 CR CR LF CR LF FF CR FF 3 CR CR LF LF CR LF FF CR FF Wide A4...

Page 1023: ...g PostScript printing these settings determine whether or not an error notice is printed and whether or not the PostScript data is received in binary format Item Description Setting Print PS Error When a PS PostScript error occurs during PostScript printing this setting determines whether or not an error notice is printed Enabled Disabled Binary Processing Receive PostScript data in binary format ...

Page 1024: ...a custom folder A custom folder can be selected from the list to open an edit delete screen for the custom folder For information on the settings see Settings Delete the folder using the Delete key Settings Item Description Folder Name Enter a name maximum of 28 characters for the custom folder to be created A name cannot be stored if it is already being used for another folder Initial of Folder E...

Page 1025: ...OPERATION GUIDE DOCUMENT FILING CONTROL file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 031 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 57 PM Index Contents ...

Page 1026: ...ual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 032 htm 24 03 2011 3 03 58 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N USB DEVICE CHECK Index Contents SETTING MODE Check the current connection of USB devices to the machine The connection of a USB device that is not compatible with the machine will not appear ...

Page 1027: ...level 3 medium Exposure adjustment screen in base screen of fax Internet fax and network scanner modes Exposure adjustment screen for Scan to HDD in document filing mode Auto Clear Setting The time until Auto Clear activates can be set to any number of seconds from 10 to 240 in increments of 10 seconds If the machine is not used for the duration of time set here the auto clear function will clear ...

Page 1028: ... been stopped because the paper required for the job is not available in any of the trays This does not include cases where the paper ran out during the job Key Operation Setting This setting determines how long a key in the touch panel must be tapped until the key input is registered The time can be set from 0 to 2 seconds in increments of 0 5 seconds By lengthening the time setting key input can...

Page 1029: ...l Memory Device Set Numeric Keys in Ascending Order from Left Top Position Arranges numeric keys in the ascending order from the left top position MFP Display Pattern Setting Select a colour pattern in the touch panel from seven colour patterns A sample of the selected template can be reviewed Preview Setting Received Data Image Check Setting Select whether or not a preview of received faxes and I...

Page 1030: ...o allow remote operation of the machine using the specified PC Host Name or IP Address of PC Enter the host name or IP address of the PC to be connected to the machine Enter a maximum of 127 characters View Password Entry Screen When a specified PC is used to operate the machine remotely you can have a password entry screen appear on the machine on the PC or both Operation by User Who Has Password...

Page 1031: ...tion 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 033 02 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 00 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N SOFT KEYBOARD TEMPLATE SETTING Index Contents SETTING MODE Register a text that you frequently use when entering an address or domain name in advance Enter a maximum of 16 characters ...

Page 1032: ... displayed in the favourite screen in the base screen of each mode It can be configured in Setting mode Web version only It cannot be configured in the touch panel of the machine The following settings can be configured Item Description Customized Keys 1 40 Enter a name for the customized key maximum of 20 characters Item Select the function that you wish to assign to the key The functions that ca...

Page 1033: ... key storage screen appears The following settings can be configured Item Item Description Home keys 1 to 60 Set the scroll keys at the top of Home screen When a name is tapped the key storage screen appears Fixed keys 1 to 10 Set the scroll keys always displayed at the bottom of the Home screen When a name is tapped the key storage screen appears Template Select one of six patterns The key layout...

Page 1034: ...x 13 A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B5R 11 x17 8 1 2 x11 216 mm x 330 mm 8 1 2 x13 AB 3 A4 A4R A5 B4 8K 16K 16KR A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 11 x17 8 1 2 x11 216 mm x 330 mm 8 1 2 x13 8K 16K 16KR AB 4 216 mm x 340 mm 8 1 2 x 13 2 5 A3 A4 A4R A5 B5 B5R A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B5R 11 x17 8 1 2 x11 216 mm x 340 mm 8 1 2 x13 2 5 AB 5 216 mm x 343 mm 8 1 2 x 13 1 2 A3 A4 A4R A5 B5 B5R A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B5R 11 x17 8 1 2 x11 216 mm...

Page 1035: ...ly used this saves you from having to select the mode in another mode each time you need to use it Mixed Size Original Same Width Copy mode only Different Width Slow Scan Mode Blank Page Skip Excluding fax mode and Internet fax mode Disabling of Duplex This is used to disable 2 sided printing such as when the duplex module malfunctions Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette This setting is used to p...

Page 1036: ...not possible the use of colour mode will be temporarily blocked Black white printing will still be possible This function is only for use as an emergency measure Once this setting is enabled only a service technician can cancel the setting Promptly contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative listed in the Quick Start Guide to have a service technician cancel the settings and r...

Page 1037: ...nce difficulty with this setting do not change the port number Detect Standard in Auto Colour Mode When the colour mode is set to auto in copy mode the discrimination point for detecting whether originals are colour or black and white can be set to one of 5 levels When set to Closer to B W the originals are easier to recognize as black and white When set to Closer colour the originals are easier t...

Page 1038: ...610N REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT Index Contents SETTING MODE Various devices mounted on the machine can be set If the colours are out of place on the printed surface when colour printing is performed the print positions of the colours can be adjusted If you wish to lighten the selected colour tap the Auto Adjustment key to adjust the exposure A message appears when the key is tapped Tap the Execute ke...

Page 1039: ...gmenting data If a job is in progress a message will appear and optimization will not begin until the job is finished During optimization the following operations are not possible Access to Setting mode Web version and reception of print data Use of keys on the operation panel Turning off the power with the main power switch of the machine Auto Power Shut Off When optimization is completed the mac...

Page 1040: ...hange the default settings for copy mode The following settings can be changed Item Description Colour Mode Configure default colour mode settings Paper Tray Specify the paper tray that is selected by default Exposure Type Configure default exposure mode settings Copy Ratio Specify the copy ratio that is selected by default 2 Sided Copy Configure the 2 sided mode settings that are selected by defa...

Page 1041: ...tation Copy Setting When the original and paper are placed in different orientations this function automatically rotates the image 90 degrees to enable correct copying on the paper Enable the Rotation Copy setting to copy an A5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 size original on A5R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 R paper Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios Add two enlargement preset ratio values 101 to 400 and two reduction preset ratio...

Page 1042: ...used to set the default image shift width tab width for tab copying Specify a value from 0 mm 0 to 25 mm 1 in increments of 3 mm 1 8 Prohibition of Program Registration This is used to prohibit the deletion and changing of copy settings stored in job programs Disabling of Bypass Tray in Duplex Copy Disables the use of the bypass tray when making 2 sided copies The bypass tray is often used to feed...

Page 1043: ...he following conditions must be satisfied in order to scan at 600 x 400 dpi and attain the fastest speed The copy ratio must be set to 100 Do not select a special mode that will change the ratio Copy of Copy must not be enabled Do not copy in black and white with the Colour Start key B W Quick Scan from Document Glass The resolution for copying in black and white using the document glass can be ch...

Page 1044: ... the Factory Default Setting This returns the stored colour balance values to the factory default values all colour balance values are 0 for the 8 levels of each colour AUTO COLOUR CALIBRATION Performs automatic colour correction when the colour in colour copies is off The machine prints a test patch the test patch is scanned and the colour is automatically corrected After the Execute key is tappe...

Page 1045: ...OPERATION GUIDE COLOR ADJUSTMENTS file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 035 03 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 05 PM Index Contents ...

Page 1046: ...4 size paper is not loaded Print Density Level This lightens or darkens the print density of colour and black and white images The print density can be adjusted to five levels CMYK Exposure Adjustment Adjusts the density of cyan C magenta M Yellow Y and Black K The exposure of each colour can be adjusted to 17 levels Bypass Tray Settings Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray This is used to pr...

Page 1047: ...y the machine Multiple jobs that have not yet been analyzed appear in the spool queue When this function is disabled received print jobs are displayed in the job queue instead of being displayed in the spool queue However when an encrypted PDF job is printed the job appears in the spool queue Prohibit USB Memory Direct Print Disables the function for directly printing of a file in a USB memory dev...

Page 1048: ...eing transmitted to the printer correctly Example of a hexadecimal dump I O Timeout The I O timeout can be set to any number of seconds from 1 to 999 The I O timeout function temporarily breaks the connection if the set duration of time elapses without any data being received by the port After the connection is broken the port is set to auto selection or the next print job is begun Enable USB Port...

Page 1049: ...The following settings can be configured Auto Post Script PCL When the PS3 expansion kit is installed The settings are the same as those of USB Port Emulation Switching Unless printer errors occur frequently it is recommended that you use the factory default setting Auto Port Switching Method Selects when port switching takes place Switch at End of Job The port changes to auto selection when print...

Page 1050: ...te key is tapped and a test patch is printed a message appears prompting you to begin automatic calibration Place the test patch on the document glass as shown below so that the thin line at the edge of the page is to the left Lay copy paper about five sheets that is the same size as the test patch on top of the placed test patch gently close the automatic document feeder and tap the Execute key B...

Page 1051: ...lear Mode activates Default Display Settings Select any of the following 5 base screens that appear when you tap the Image Send key or when you tap the CA key on the Image Send Mode screen E mail Network Folder FTP Desktop Internet Fax Fax Data Entry Display all destination types regardless of display mode Displays all destinations regardless of the displayed mode when this setting is enabled Imag...

Page 1052: ...igured Text Printed Photo Text Photo Text Photo Printed Photo Map When the exposure is set to Auto a default original type cannot be selected Sharpness This is used to emphasize the outline of image and show it clearly for scanning a document in image send mode It can be set to any of 5 levels Contrast This is used to adjust the contrast of image for scanning a document in image send mode It can b...

Page 1053: ... Setting for Received Data Print is enabled enter the password 4 digit number These settings can only be configured when there is no received data in the machine memory excluding data in a confidential or relay broadcast memory box Default Verification Stamp This is used to enable or disable the default setting Enable this to always affix the verification stamp on the original that has already bee...

Page 1054: ...figure the setting for each of the following items Polling Memory Confidential Relay Broadcast Direct Entry Relay Broadcast Address Book Disable Destination Registration Using Global Address Search This disables address control from the global address search Configure the setting for each of the following items E mail Internet Fax Fax Select All Selects all items Clear Checked Clears all selection...

Page 1055: ...elections Disable PC I Fax Transmission This prohibits PC I Fax transmission Disable PC Fax Transmission This prohibits PC Fax transmission Own Number and Name Set Stores the Internet Fax or Fax sender information Sender Data Registration Use this to store the sender name for fax and Internet fax the sender fax number and the sender address for Internet fax The stored sender name and sender fax nu...

Page 1056: ...der name used in Own Name Select of another function Up to 18 sender names can be stored Add New Store a sender name A maximum of 20 characters can be stored After entering a sender name tap the Store key The lowest unused registration number from 01 to 18 will be automatically assigned to the sender name This number cannot be changed Sender Name List Displays a list of stored sender names When yo...

Page 1057: ...ximum of 64 characters If only the sender name is stored it will not be used as sender information Default Colour Mode Settings Select a default colour mode setting for both colour and black white in e mail address network folder FTP and Desktop Specify Common to scans unless E mail is specified Auto Mono2 Greyscale Full Colour Greyscale Mono 2 When scanning a black and white original with the col...

Page 1058: ...r file This setting can be used if Specified Pages per File is enabled When JPEG is selected for the file type Specified Pages per File cannot be selected Compression Mode at Broadcasting Selects the compression mode for broadcasting using Scan to E mail or Internet fax The compression mode set here is used for all destinations regardless of their individual compression mode settings B W MH G3 MMR...

Page 1059: ...s E mail precedes Bcc Setting Enable Bcc Enable this setting if you wish to use Bcc delivery Displays the Bcc key on the image send address book screen Display Bcc Address on the Job Status Screen Displays Bcc addresses on the job status screen and address list tab Disable scan function Specify this to disable remote PC scanning Default Address Setting Default Address Setting A default address can...

Page 1060: ...the machine and prints the fax When this function is disabled received Internet faxes are not printed until the Power button is switched On Compression Setting This is used to set the default compression mode for Internet fax transmission The following settings can be configured MH G3 MMR G4 Speaker Volume Setting Adjusts the volume of fax receive signals and communication error signals heard thro...

Page 1061: ...ion report For details see Original Print on Transaction Report Activity Report Print Select Setting Prints the Image Sending Activity Report stored in the machine memory periodically The Image Sending Activity Report can be set to print each time the number of transactions reaches 200 or at a specified time once a day only The settings can be simultaneously enabled If you only select the Print Da...

Page 1062: ...is setting is only effective when I Fax Reception Report On Off Setting is enabled Maximum Size of E mail Attachments To prevent the transmission of excessively large image files by Internet fax a file size limit can be set from 1 MB to 10 MB in increments of 1 MB If the total size of the image files created by scanning the original exceeds the limit the image files are discarded If you do not wis...

Page 1063: ... of Error Specify how many times the machine will recall when a communication error occurs During recalling you can set the number of recall attempts Any number from 0 to 15 can be selected Interval to Wait Between Recall Attempts min in Case of Error The interval between recall attempts can be set Any number of minutes from 1 to 15 can be selected Receive Settings Configures the settings for Inte...

Page 1064: ...11 size fax is received this setting reduces the fax to A4 size When this setting is enabled A4 size faxes are also reduced Receiving Date Time Print Enable this setting to have the date and time of reception printed Select Inside the Received Image or Outside the Received Image for the position where the date and time is printed When Inside the Received Image is selected the date and time of rece...

Page 1065: ...Reject Mail or Domain Name Setting Allows or refuses a reception from specified addresses domains Item Description Reject Reception Reception from the stored address domain is not allowed Allow Reception Reception from the stored address domain is allowed All Invalid Reception from any address and domain is allowed regardless of whether or not any addresses or domains have been stored Add New Adds...

Page 1066: ...Quick File Folder Select one of the following settings File Name User Name Date Administrator Authority Setting For files and user folders that have a password this setting allows the administrator password to be entered instead of the password when accessing the file or folder Also you can change the preset ratio if necessary Delete All Quick Files Deletes all files from the Quick File folder exc...

Page 1067: ...ect Manual set the exposure to one of 5 levels Default Original Image Type Select the original type beforehand to enable scanning at a resolution suitable for the original The following settings can be configured Text Printed Photo Text Photo Text Photo Printed Photo Map When the exposure is set to Auto a default original type cannot be selected Initial Resolution Settings One of the following res...

Page 1068: ...e erase and centre erase Card Shot Settings This is used to set the default original size for the card shot function Specify a value from 25 mm 1 to 216 mm 8 1 2 in increments of 3 mm 1 8 for both the X horizontal and Y vertical dimensions of the original Fit to Store Size Always displays the Fit to Store Size key on the card shot screen Save in External Memory Device Settings Default Colour Mode ...

Page 1069: ...es per file Default Original Image Type Select the original type beforehand to enable scanning at a resolution suitable for the original The following settings can be configured Text Printed Photo Text Photo Text Printed Photo Map When the exposure is set to Auto a default original type cannot be selected Initial Resolution Settings One of the following resolutions can be selected for the default ...

Page 1070: ... of a stored file can be allowed or prohibited by operation type and by the mode from which the file was stored The items that appear will vary depending on the functions that have been added to the machine Item Description Print For each mode select whether or not printing of stored files is allowed Scan Send For each mode select whether or not fax transmission of stored files is allowed Internet...

Page 1071: ...idential files are to be deleted 5 Enable the stored settings Item Description Schedule Select an automatic deletion cycle Every Day Auto deletion every day at the specified time Every Week Auto deletion at the specified time on the specified day of the week Every Month Auto deletion at the specified time on the specified day of the month Folders To select the folder separately select Folder Selec...

Page 1072: ...iling Security Common All Administrator Settings List Image Sending Activity Report The following Image Sending Activity Reports can each be separately printed Image Sending Activity Report Scan Image Sending Activity Report Internet Fax Image Sending Activity Report Fax Data Receive Forward List The following lists showing reception settings and forwarding settings can be printed Anti Junk Fax Nu...

Page 1073: ...are changed the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted To restart the machine see TURNING ON THE POWER in BEFORE USING THE MACHINE USB DRIVER SETTINGS When installing the external account module or application communication module set the driver of the USB device to be connected External Keyboard Select whether the internal or external driver for the external keyboard is used IC C...

Page 1074: ...ck the connection when a USB device is connected to the machine see USB DEVICE CHECK Job Priority Settings Set the playing speed of the animation in Sharp OSA applications The following settings can be configured Priority Printing Half Tone Priority Animation Play If the LCD Animation Playback or Balanced is selected the job or print process speed of the machine may drop Select Priority Printing t...

Page 1075: ...er or printing of a file on an FTP server in Setting mode Web version can be prohibited Operation Settings Cancel Auto Clear Timer Disables the Auto Clear mode Disabling of Job Priority Operation The job priority function can be disabled If disabled the Priority key is not shown on the job status screen Disabling of Bypass Printing Disables bypass printing printing other jobs ahead of a job that h...

Page 1076: ...malfunctions Disabling of Finisher This setting is used to prohibit the use of finisher or saddle finisher such as when it malfunctions Disabling of Offset Disables an offset Disabling of Stapler This setting is used to prohibit the use of staple such as when the staple of finisher or saddle finisher malfunctions Disabling of Punch This setting is used to prohibit the use of punch such as when the...

Page 1077: ...versing unit a misfeed or damage to the unit may result If special media for which 2 sided copying is prohibited is often used it is recommended that you enable this setting Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disables the Auto Paper Selection function When this setting is enabled automatic selection of paper that is the same size as the original on the document glass or in the automatic document fe...

Page 1078: ...ber order ascending descending in the address book and others If set the display is not sorted even when you tap the tab on the address book screen The currently selected display order will be the order that is used after the setting is selected Prohibit Fax Broadcasting Disables the facsimile broadcasting Settings to Disable Registration Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel Disabl...

Page 1079: ...se of the address book for functions in each mode Disable Registration of Memory Box Disables all types of memory box registration Configure the setting for each of the following items Polling Memory Confidential Relay Broadcast Direct Entry Relay Broadcast Address Book Select All Selects all items Clear Checked Clears all selections Disable Destination Registration Using Global Address Search Thi...

Page 1080: ...ms Clear Checked Clears all selections Disable Direct Entry Disables the direct entry of destination address and others Configure the setting for each of the following items E mail Network Folder Desktop Network Folder Internet Fax including Direct SMTP Fax Select All Selects all items Clear Checked Clears all selections Disable PC I Fax Transmission This prohibits PC I Fax transmission Disable PC...

Page 1081: ...y and the User Unknown key in the user selection screen The Enable Disable Settings control the same parameters as the enable disable settings in other settings The settings are linked together changing one setting changes the other Prohibition of Saving in External Memory Device Storing to external memory device is disabled SECURITY SETTINGS This setting is used to set the security enhancement fu...

Page 1082: ...he machine setting information in XML format and copies the information to another machine This function saves you the trouble of repeatedly configuring the same settings in multiple machines Export Exports data to a USB memory device Import Imports data that you have saved in the USB memory device by Export option into the machine You can export data only to MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N The followi...

Page 1083: ... book of this machine directly to another multi function peripheral This function can be enabled when a USB memory device is installed This function cannot be used while Setting mode is in use while a job is being executed or when there is a reserved job Contact your dealer or the nearest authorised service representative listed on the Quick Start Guide for advice on the machine for data importing...

Page 1084: ...r the product key of the PS3 expansion kit Internet Fax Expansion Kit Enter the product key of the Internet fax expansion kit E MAIL ALERT AND STATUS Enter the product key of e mail alert and status Application Integration Module Enter the product key of the application integration module Application Communication Module Enter the product key of the application communication module External Accoun...

Page 1085: ...OPERATION GUIDE PRODUCT KEY file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 044 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 14 PM Index Contents ...

Page 1086: ...t the current settings by selecting System Settings in Setting mode List Print Administrator When settings are changed the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted To restart the machine see TURNING ON THE POWER Store Current Configuration Stores the currently configured Setting mode in the machine memory The stored settings will be retained even if the Power button is turned off To...

Page 1087: ...ddress of secondary DNS server Domain Name Enter the domain name where the selected DNS server exists SMTP Settings Primary Server Enter the IP address or the host name of the primary SMTP server Source Address If data transmission has failed the undelivered e mail may be returned from the server Enter an e mail address a single address only to receive such undelivered mails Usually enter the e ma...

Page 1088: ...P server LDAP Settings Name Enter the address book name Default Address Setting Enters the search defaults to search for a specific area of the LDAP directory information tree Example o ABC ou NY cn Everyone Entries must be separated from each other by semicolons or commas LDAP Server Enter the IP address or host name of the LDAP server User Name Enter the account name for LDAP setting Password En...

Page 1089: ...nter the Kerberos realm Enable SSL If is set the SSL encryption communication is enabled Connection Test Tap the Execute button to test the connection to the LDAP server Public Folder NAS Settings Set each option to Prohibited if the storage is not used When settings are changed the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted To restart the machine see TURNING ON THE POWER ...

Page 1090: ...general network settings General Settings Print Status on Startup Select this option to print out the status information during startup NETWORK SETTINGS Device Name Enter a device name Domain Name Enter the domain name Comment Enter a comment Reset the NIC This returns all Network Settings to the factory default settings When settings are changed the changes will take effect after the machine is r...

Page 1091: ... DHCP BOOTP Use this setting to have the IP address obtained automatically using DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol When this setting is enabled it is not necessary to manually enter an IP address If DHCP BOOTP is used the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically If the IP address changes printing will not be possible If the machine is used on a TC...

Page 1092: ...ssigned to the machine may change automatically If the IP address changes printing will not be possible If the machine is used on a TCP IP network be sure to enable the Enable TCP IP below In an IPv6 environment the machine can use LPD or IPP protocol Ping Command Checks if the machine can communicate with the PC of the network Specify the IP address of the desired PC and tap the Execute key A mes...

Page 1093: ...ry mode File Server Name 1 8 Enter a file server name NDS Tree Enter the NDS tree name NDS Context Enter the NDS context RPRINTER Settings Print Server Name 1 8 Enter a print server name Job Timeout Enters a job timeout EtherTalk EtherTalk Settings EtherTalk To use the machine on an EtherTalk network this setting must be enabled Zone Name Enter a zone name Printer Name Enter the printer name NetBE...

Page 1094: ...COL SETTINGS file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 046 03 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 17 PM Index Contents restarted To restart the machine see TURNING ON THE POWER ...

Page 1095: ...rver Secondary Server Enter the IP address of secondary DNS server Timeout Enter a timeout The default setting is 20 seconds This time is used until the connection to the DNS server is established according to the standard specifications Domain Name Enter the domain name where the selected DNS server exists Dynamic DNS Updating Set this option to use the dynamic updating of DNS server Updating Int...

Page 1096: ...the e mail address of system administrator Enable SSL If the SSL is enabled the SMTP over TLS encryption communication can be used by STARTTLS command This requires the server to support the STARTTLS command To allow SSL communication set the Port Number to the same port number as the normal SMTP SMTP Authentication Carries out the SMTP server authentication If you use the Kerberos authentication ...

Page 1097: ...number To allow POP over TLS communication set the Port Number to the same port number as for the normal POP3 communication Connection Test Tap the Execute button to test the connection to the SMTP server SNMP SNMPv1 Settings SNMP v1 Settings Set this option to use the SNMPv1 settings Access Method Set an access method GET Community Enter the GET community name to fetch the device information usin...

Page 1098: ... port number of the Kerberos authentication server The default setting is port 88 Realm Enter the Kerberos realm SNTP SNTP Settings SNTP Set this option to use the SNTP protocol SNTP Server Enter the IP address or host name of the SNTP server Port Number Enter a port number The default setting is port 123 Timeout Enter a timeout The default setting is 5 seconds Synchronous Interval Enter an interv...

Page 1099: ...htm 24 03 2011 3 04 18 PM Index Contents mDNS Set this option to use the mDNS settings Service Name Enter a service name Domain Name Enter the domain name Priority Service Select a service you use with the priority When settings are changed the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted To restart the machine see TURNING ON THE POWER ...

Page 1100: ...n to use the banner The default setting is Invalid Raw Raw Print Settings Raw Print Set this option to use RAW printing The default setting is Valid Port Number Enter a port number The default setting is port 9100 Timeout Enter a timeout The default setting is 90 seconds Use Bidirectional To use bidirectional communication set to WSD WSD Settings WSD Print Set this option to use WSD printing Use M...

Page 1101: ...OPERATION GUIDE PRINT PORT SETTINGS file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 046 05 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 18 PM Index Contents ...

Page 1102: ...ABC ou NY cn Everyone Entries must be separated by semicolons or commas LDAP Server Enter the IP address or host name of the LDAP server Server Type Select the Default or Custom from the service type list The default setting is Default User ID Property Set the user ID property The default setting is uid LDAP Search Property Set the LDAP search property The default setting is cn E mail Address Sear...

Page 1103: ...setting is port 389 Timeout Enter a timeout The default setting is 5 seconds User Name Enter the account name for LDAP setting Password Enter the password To change the password set Change Password to Authentication Select the authentication server from the drop down list Bind Prefix Set the Bind prefix The default setting is uid Server Usage Set the server application Set the address book and use...

Page 1104: ...ING MODE The following explains the access settings to Setting mode Web version Number of Users who can log in at the Same Time Enter a number of users who can access Setting mode Web version simultaneously Auto Logout Time Enter a time to automatically log out when no communication continues with the machine When settings are changed the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted To ...

Page 1105: ...MX 3110N MX 3610N VIEW LOGIN USER Index Contents SETTING MODE The user or users who have logged in this machine are displayed Current Login Users The currently logged in users are displayed Log Out All Users The current login users are logged out When settings are changed the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted To restart the machine see TURNING ON THE POWER ...

Page 1106: ...MX 3110N MX 3610N PUBLIC FOLDER NAS SETTINGS Index Contents SETTING MODE The public and shared folders of the MFP can be accessed as network folders from a network PC Settings Item Description public If the Use of Storage is set to Allow you can create a document filing data in the public folder shared If the Use of Storage is set to Allow you can use the shared folder as a network folder ...

Page 1107: ...he proxy server is allowed Settings Item Description Proxy Server Address Enter the proxy server address User Name Enter a user name to access the proxy server Password Enter a password to allow access to the proxy server Port Number Enter the proxy server port number Address without using proxy Specify exception addresses for a proxy that is used in the Web browsing feature and Sharp OSA ver 4 0 ...

Page 1108: ...ete Preset Text When you tap a text on the list the edit screen appears for that text Tap the Delete key to delete the text Custom Watermark Add key Adds a new custom watermark List Lists the currently stored custom watermarks Store Custom Watermark When you tap the Add key the registration screen appears Up to 30 items can be stored For information on the settings see Settings Edit or Delete Cust...

Page 1109: ...tom stamps Store Custom Stamp When you tap the Add key the registration screen appears Up to 30 items can be stored For information on the settings see Settings Edit or Delete Custom Stamp When you tap a file name on the list the edit screen appears for that custom stamp Tap the Delete key to delete the custom stamp Settings Item Description File Name Enter a file name using a maximum of 30 charac...

Page 1110: ...ndex Contents SETTING MODE The subjects that can be set for E mail transmission are listed Add key Adds a new subject name List Lists the currently stored subject names Store Subject Name When you tap the Add key the registration screen appears Up to 30 items can be stored Edit or Delete Subject Name When you tap a subject name on the list the edit screen appears for that subject Tap the Delete ke...

Page 1111: ...X 3110N MX 3610N FILE NAME SETTINGS Index Contents SETTING MODE Add key Adds a new file name List Lists the currently stored file names Store File Name When you tap the Add key the registration screen appears Up to 30 items can be stored Edit or Delete File Name When you tap a file name on the list the edit screen appears for that file name Tap the Delete key to delete the file name ...

Page 1112: ...ETTING MODE The message body text that can be set for E mail transmission are listed Add key Adds a new message body List Lists the currently stored messages Store Message Body When you tap the Add key the registration screen appears A title and a message body can be set Up to 30 items can be stored Edit or Delete Message Body When you tap a title on the list the edit screen appears for that messa...

Page 1113: ...e Address and Reply Address are used File Naming Adds a character string of the checked box to the file name of the scanned image data When sending data to the same destination two or more times set the Unique Identifier to not to overwrite the previously sent data by the new one When sending data to a computer overseas using the Internet Fax function set the Sender Name to Default Subject Enter a...

Page 1114: ...n to the POP3 server User Name Enter the user name The special user account is required for Internet fax reception Password Enter the password To change the password select Change Password and enter the new password in the text box POP3 Communication Timeout Set a timeout for communication to the POP3 server Reception Check Interval Setting Enter an acknowledge cycle to the POP3 server Enable SSL ...

Page 1115: ... sender name and source address to be used for Internet fax communication The stored sender name and source address will be printed at the top of the received fax Sender Name Enter the default sender name Source Address Enter the default source address Direct SMTP Settings Port Number Receive Enter the receive port number for direct SMTP communication The default setting is port 25 Timeout Enter a...

Page 1116: ...le Name Enter a forward table name Receive Line Select Selects a data receive line Sender Number Address Setting Select the sender facsimile number or the Internet fax address Before you select a sender number or address store the destination number or address To forward all received data select Forward All Received Data Add Enters your selection Sender Number Address used on Forward Table Display...

Page 1117: ...multiple sender numbers separate them by a semicolon or a comma When you tap the Global Address Search key the global address search screen appears Delete Deletes the selected sender number or address Add to List Adds the entered sender number to the list Administration Settings Stores the administration settings to be used for inbound routing Item Description Inbound Routing Sets the inbound rout...

Page 1118: ...the menu Enter the destination number or address that you wish to store If you wish to forward all received data you need not store the sender number and address separately Store a forwarding table Tap the Inbound Routing Settings from the menu Tap the Add key on the displayed screen When the Table Registration screen appears store the forwarding table Enable the stored forwarding table Tap the In...

Page 1119: ...or e mail transfer can be forwarded to any destination Item Description Forward Send Data Set a destination to forward the send data Forward Received Data Set a destination to forward the received data E mail Network Folder FTP Desktop Select a forwarding type of the send or received image data When determined select the destination from the address book You can enter an e mail directly Format Sel...

Page 1120: ...tration screen appears Up to 10 items can be stored For information on the settings see Settings Edit or Delete Metadata Set When you tap a title on the list the edit screen appears for that metadata set Tap the Delete key to delete the metadata set Settings Item Description Metadata Set Name Enter a metadata name Metadata Delivery Destination Select a destination where you wish to send the image ...

Page 1121: ...alues for metadata selection in the input area Entries must be separated by semicolons or commas Each option can be comprised of up to 70 characters Initial entry by default Uses a default value as the first value of the entered metadata list Expand Metadata Automatically When the machine generates metadata automatically the metadataSetName userLoginId if user authentication is used pageSize and i...

Page 1122: ... 8 items can be stored For information on the settings see Settings Edit or Delete Standard Application When you tap an application name on the list the edit screen appears for that standard application Tap the Delete key to delete the standard application Settings Item Description Application Name Enter an application name Application UI Address Set an IP address of the application or a network n...

Page 1123: ...address Set Authentication Server Server 1 If the server is set the external authentication mode is selected Any access to the MFP is controlled by the application that you set on this page If set always enter the application name application UI address or Web service address of server 1 If not set the external totalling mode is selected Enable Image Job Log This item is displayed when you enter a...

Page 1124: ...ETTINGS Index Contents SETTING MODE The Fax or I Fax Receive functions can be set in the Sharp OSA applications Settings Item Description Transfer to Application The Fax or I Fax message reception can be controlled by Sharp OSA applications Application Name Enter the application name to receive Web Service Address Enter the Web service address Timeout Enter a timeout Use Proxy Server A network acc...

Page 1125: ...to be connected to the machine Some settings are made valid only when the machine is restarted In such a case a prompt appears to restart the machine Item Description External Keyboard Select whether the internal or external driver for the external keyboard is used USB Memory Select whether the internal or external device driver for the USB memory device driver is used Level of Encryption Select t...

Page 1126: ... for authentication to the POP3 server User Name Enter the user name The special user account is required for e mail printing Password Enter the password To change the password select Change Password and enter the new password in the text box Check Interval Enter the polling interval for the POP3 server The default setting is five minutes Enable SSL If set to the POP over SSL communication or the ...

Page 1127: ...ngs see Settings Edit or Delete FTP Server When you tap a title on the list the edit screen appears for that FTP server Tap the Delete key to delete the FTP server Settings Item Description Name Enter a name to be displayed on the machine operator panel FTP Server Enter the IP address or host name of the FTP server Directory Enter the destination directory of the FTP file server Enable User Authen...

Page 1128: ...OPERATION GUIDE SETTING FOR PRINT FROM THE MFP FTP file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 056 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 31 PM Index Contents ...

Page 1129: ...registration screen appears Up to 20 items can be stored For information on the settings see Settings Edit or Delete Standard Application When you tap a title on the list the edit screen appears for that network folder Tap the Delete key to delete the folder Settings Item Description Name Enter a name to be displayed on the machine operator panel Folder Path Enter a path to the network folder Enab...

Page 1130: ...OM PC Index Contents SETTING MODE If the print settings data is loaded from the client PC to the FTP server of the machine the print settings are stored in the machine automatically Item Description FTP Print Enable the FTP printing when data is moved to the FTP server of the machine Enabled by default Port Number Enter a port number The default setting is port 21 Use Banner Enable or disable a ba...

Page 1131: ...anual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 059 01 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 33 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N ECO SCAN SETTING Index Contents SETTING MODE A non print operation such as image sending and scan to HDD can be executed while the fusing unit is kept Off This can be set for each mode ...

Page 1132: ...el display can be turned Off in the Preheat mode Preheat mode cannot be disabled The Auto Power Off transition time is fixed The Auto Power Off transition time is fixed When this setting is enabled the Change transition time by time of day option is disabled If the Auto Power Off is disabled the time you have set here is disabled AS SOON AS THE REMOTE JOB IS FINISHED ENTER AUTO POWER SHUT OFF MODE...

Page 1133: ...d on job logs obtained during a certain time period If the machine does not have the 4 week job log information the machine enters the template2 Mode3 Energy Saving Priority1 between 8 00 and 18 00 hours Then after that it enters Mode4 Energy Saving Priority2 Manual You can set a pattern for each time band The machine already has the 3 pattern template The Energy Save pattern can be added to the O...

Page 1134: ...EMENT SETTINGS file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 059 02 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 34 PM Index Contents Sleep Mode Settings Low Power or Fast Wake Up can be selected ...

Page 1135: ...n Normal Mode Allows easy machine operation with reduced power consumption Eco Mode Minimizes the machine s power consumption Following the System Settings The separately power saving settings apply Setting values applied by each mode is as follows Energy Save Normal Mode Eco Mode Eco Scan On Sending Modes Only On All Modes Except Copy Auto Power Shut Off Timer Fixed Time Off Fixed Time On 1min As...

Page 1136: ...ns If the machine is running due to the current job execution or other reasons the machine is turned off only after the job has finished The machine cannot receive printer jobs The machine can receive output jobs such as received fax data outputs If the Time Specified Output of Received Data setting is enabled they are output next time the machine is turned on If the power management setting is al...

Page 1137: ...arate them by a semicolon or a comma Send Now When tapped the status message is sent to the destination of the e mail address list Send on Schedule 1 If checked as an E mail is sent periodically according to the preset schedule Send on Schedule 2 If checked as an E mail is sent periodically according to the preset schedule Scheduling Select a schedule to send E mails Advanced Settings Bi direction...

Page 1138: ...mber to the POP over SSL communication port number To allow POP over TLS communication set the Port Number to the same port number as for the normal POP3 communication Connection Test Tap the Execute button to test the connection to the POP3 server Alerts Message Selects the E mail Alert function settings The E mail Alert function can report a trouble of the machine to the administrator or dealer ...

Page 1139: ...36 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N JOB LOG Index Contents SETTING MODE Control Job Log Deletes log of a job executed on the machine Tap the Delete key to delete the job log You can save the job log by selecting the Job Log in Setting mode Web version View Job Log Views log of a job executed on the machine Select a view item and period and tap the Show key ...

Page 1140: ...s turned On again The user level authentication password is required to add edit or delete the destination When you log on enter users as the user name Then enter the user password that you have registered with this option The administrator level authentication password is required to select all settings and the same functions as those available with the user level password When you log on enter a...

Page 1141: ...oducts MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 065 02 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 37 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N PORT CONTROL Index Contents SETTING MODE Enables or disables main system ports and sets the port numbers ...

Page 1142: ...07 065 03 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 38 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N FILTER SETTING Index Contents SETTING MODE An access to the machine from the preset IP address or MAC address can be limited Enter the MAC address to be enabled However the machine cannot be accessed from the MAC address if it is contained in the disabled IP address range ...

Page 1143: ...ncryption can be set by the following protocols Server Port HTTPS Apply SSL encryption to HTTP communication IPP SSL Apply SSL encryption to IPP communication Redirect HTTP to HTTPS in Setting mode Web version Access When this setting is enabled all communication that attempts to access the machine by HTTP is redirected to HTTPS Client Port HTTPS Apply SSL encryption to HTTP communication FTPS App...

Page 1144: ...thentication for both wired and wireless networks Use IEEE802 1X authentication to allow only authenticated devices to use network and protect against network abuse by third parties You can enable or disable IEEE802 1X authentication with this setting The IEEE802 1X details can be set with Setting mode Web version Depending on the Web page settings connection to the machine may not be allowed or t...

Page 1145: ...ing is only used to enable or disable IPsec the detailed IPsec settings are configured with Setting mode Web version This setting is only used to enable or disable IPsec the detailed IPsec settings are configured with Setting mode Web version When enabling this settings take the following notes It may take some time to reflect on the machine settings and you cannot connect to the machine during th...

Page 1146: ...ure Font Size Select a font size Angle Select a character angle Font Style Select the standard or italic character settings Camouflage Pattern Set a camouflage pattern Print Method Select a character display pattern Character stand out The background stands out Print Contents Setting Item Description Standard Characters Allows you to select a preset character string The following character strings...

Page 1147: ...ion Printing Serial number account job ID login name user number number of copy control date and time Disable Direct Entry Directly enters the user name This setting is ignored if Pre set Text is enabled Contrast Set a character contrast The black magenta and cyan can be set in any of 9 levels Store Print Characters Stores the user created print characters Up to 30 characters can be stored ...

Page 1148: ...king information at the top or bottom of output pages when copy or print job is executed Item Description Print tracking information settings Set this option to print the tracking information Print Data The following information can be printed Serial number characters account job ID login name user number date and time Print Colour Select Select a print colour Print Position Set a print position o...

Page 1149: ...AL INFORMATION AND HDD INITIALIZATION Index Contents SETTING MODE When you dispose or turn over the machine you can delete all of personal information including the address book and data transmission logs simultaneously to assure your security If this function is executed a deletion completion notice is printed out and the machine is locked from being used again When you use this function consult ...

Page 1150: ...inistrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A System Settings Yes Yes F Code Memory Box Yes Yes Fax Data Receive Forward Fax Functions Yes Yes Fax Settings Yes Yes Receive Settings Auto Reception Yes Yes Multiple Set Print Disabled Yes Yes Staple 1 Disabled Yes Yes Forward Received Data Yes Yes Image Send Settings Fax Functions No Yes Fax Settings No Yes Fax Default Settings No Yes Dia...

Page 1151: ...Error Report Only No Yes Transaction Report Print Select Setting No Yes Single Sending Print Out Error Report Only No Yes Broadcasting Print Out All Report No Yes Receiving Do not Print No Yes Confidential Reception Print Out Notice Page No Yes Activity Report Print Select Setting No Yes Auto Print at Memory Full Disabled No Yes Print Daily at Designated Time Disabled No Yes ECM Enabled No Yes Dig...

Page 1152: ...Manual to Automatic Reception 2 Disabled No Yes Duplex Reception Setting Disabled No Yes Auto Receive Reduce Setting Enabled No Yes Print Style Setting Auto Size Select No Yes Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding No Yes Letter Size RX Reduce Print 2 Disabled No Yes Receiving Date Time Print Disabled No Yes A3 RX Reduce 2 Disabled No Yes Fax Output Settings Varies depending on the machine c...

Page 1153: ...hen you select a memory box from the list the edit screen appears for the box For information on the settings see Settings Tap the Delete key to delete the memory box Settings Item Description Items common to all types Box Type Select the type of box Polling Memory Store a memory box for F code polling memory The sub address and passcode that you store in the memory box are necessary for the other...

Page 1154: ...ber Items displayed when storing a relay broadcast memory box Recipients Select the end recipients of the relay broadcast Select the recipients from the address book Select the recipient from the address book Selects an address from the address book Destination Entry An address that is not stored in the address book can be directly entered Enter the address in the same way as when storing an addre...

Page 1155: ...t stapling is performed Only when a finisher is installed A binding style can be set with the Fax Output Settings Forward Received Data When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner received faxes can be forwarded to another previously stored fax machine If there is no forwarding data or if the destination is not registered no data is forwarded If Hold Setting for Receiv...

Page 1156: ...PERATION GUIDE FAX DATA RECEIVE FORWARD FAX FUNCTIONS file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 069 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 44 PM Index Contents ...

Page 1157: ... the Power button is Off but the main power switch is and a fax is received this function activates the machine and prints the fax When this function is disabled received faxes are not printed until the Power button is switched On Pause Time Setting Changes the length of pauses inserted in fax numbers If a hyphen is entered when dialling or storing a fax number a pause of 2 seconds is inserted It ...

Page 1158: ...d 9 Original Print on Transaction Report When a transaction report is printed this is used to print part of the first page of the transmitted original on the transaction report Select one of the settings below Print Out All Report Print Out Error Report Only Do not Print This setting will not be effective if the next Transaction Report Print Select Setting is set to Do not Print Transaction Report...

Page 1159: ...ly as needed For more information see LIST PRINT ADMINISTRATOR ECM Line conditions can sometimes distort a transmitted fax image When ECM Error Correction Mode is turned on pages that are distorted are automatically re transmitted If the other machine supports Super G3 ECM will function regardless of this setting Distinctive Ring Detection This Setting can only be activated in Canada Australia New...

Page 1160: ...ransmitting a fax as soon as the first page is scanned Transmission takes place at the same time as the remaining pages are being scanned If you disable this setting transmission will not begin until all pages have been scanned Note that this setting does not apply to manual transmission Printing Page Number at Receiver When the transmitted image is printed by the receiving machine the page number...

Page 1161: ...ween attempts United Kingdom France Germany Sweden Italy Spain Netherlands Saudi Arabia South Africa Hungary Czech Republic Slovakia Poland Greece Russia 1 to 10 default 2 any number of minutes from 1 to 15 default 3 Canada 1 to 14 default 2 Australia New Zealand Singapore Thailand Malaysia India Philippines 1 to 9 default 2 Hong Kong 1 to 3 default 2 Taiwan 1 to 15 default 2 any number of minutes...

Page 1162: ...d Greece Russia 1 to 5 default 1 any number of minutes from 1 to 15 default 1W Australia New Zealand Canada 1 attempt any number of minutes from 1 to 15 default 3 Singapore Thailand Malaysia India Philippines 1 to 9 default 2 any number of minutes from 1 to 15 default 1 Hong Kong 1 to 3 default 2 Taiwan 1 to 15 default 2 Indonesia 1 to 5 default 2 any number of minutes from 4 to 15 default 4 When ...

Page 1163: ...France When a fax is received in manual reception mode you have have the machine automatically switch to auto reception The number of rings on which switching to auto reception takes place can be set to any number from 1 to 9 Duplex Reception Setting This is used to have received faxes printed on both sides of the paper When this setting is enabled and a fax consisting of 2 or more pages is receiv...

Page 1164: ...a received fax the received fax can be forwarded to another fax machine This setting is used to program the fax number of the destination fax machine Only one forwarding fax number can be programmed maximum of 64 digits To insert a pause between digits of the number tap the key If you wish to specify an F code confidential memory box in the destination machine tap the key after entering the fax nu...

Page 1165: ...pled Paper Size When a finisher is installed select the paper used for printing of received faxes This setting can only be used when the Multiple Set Print and Staple checkboxes are selected in Fax Settings Up to 50 pages can be stapled When the paper is oriented horizontally up to 30 sheets can be stapled Allow Reject Number Setting Use this setting to specify whether reception from a stored numb...

Page 1166: ...ettings are for regular polling memory using the Public Box Polling Security When the memory polling function is used this setting determines whether any machine will be allowed to poll your machine or only machines that have been stored in your machine Add New When the Polling Security Setting is enabled use this setting to store or delete the fax numbers of the machines that are allowed to poll ...

Page 1167: ...can be set Settings Item Description Check Facility Code in HID Mode Checks the facility code of the HID card Facility Code Enter the facility code of a HID card When you tap the Store key the facility code is stored Import from Configuration file Enter the configuration file name and tap the Execute key and the card area settings will be read from the configuration file Card reading test When you...

Page 1168: ...1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 07 073 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 46 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N CARD TYPE READER SETTINGS Index Contents SETTING MODE The authentication of Felica HID and other IC cards can be set Settings Item Description Use IC Card for Authentication The authentication of Felica HID and other IC cards can be set ...

Page 1169: ...ectly entering URL addresses Disable Adding or Editing Favourites Prevents users from adding or editing favourites Disable Registering or Editing Home Page Prevents users from registering or editing an URL address of the home page Disable Printing from a Web Browser or PDF Viewer Prevents users from printing from a Web browser or a PDF viewer that is displayed in a Web browser Disable Viewing of H...

Page 1170: ...MX 3610N Index TROUBLESHOOTING CANCELING OPERATION AND RESETTING SETTINGS REMOVING MISFEEDS REMOVING STAPLE JAMS COPYING PRINTER FAX IMAGE SEND INTERNET FAX DOCUMENT FILING GENERAL PROBLEMS If you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual see TURNING ON THE POWER to restart the machine If you cannot find the item that you are looking for see GENERAL PROBLEMS ...

Page 1171: ...he misfeed will appear Follow the instructions As shown below marks blink to indicate the approximate locations of possible misfeeds Misfeed location The fusing unit is hot Take care not to burn yourself when removing a misfeed When removing misfed paper do not touch or damage the transfer belt Carefully pull the paper out without tearing it The misfeed may have occurred inside the machine Check c...

Page 1172: ...P_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 08 001 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 48 PM Index Contents causes below are possible Check again The misfeed was not correctly removed A torn piece of paper remains in the machine A cover or unit that was opened or moved to remove the misfeed was not returned to its original position ...

Page 1173: ...eeding area cover and remove the misfed originals Pull out the document feeder tray and remove the misfed paper Open the automatic document feeder Rotate the transfer roller in the direction of the arrow and remove the original If you require more information when reading the instructions in Look how jam is solved in the touch panel see the illustration below and then go to the appropriate illustr...

Page 1174: ...sing section inside the tray carefully and remove any misfed paper by pressing the lock claw in the handle section A with your finger to release the lock Rotate knob and remove the misfed paper After removing the misfeed open and close the automatic document feeder or the document feeding area cover or document feeder tray to clear the misfeed display from the touch panel 2 Paper misfeed in the pa...

Page 1175: ...ilt the fusing unit down toward you Rotate knob and remove the misfed paper Remove the misfed paper Open the paper reversing section cover and remove the misfed paper The fusing unit area is hot Take care not to burn yourself Do not touch any metal parts Unfused toner may remain on the paper that is removed Take care that it does not soil your hands or clothing 4 Paper misfeed in the exit tray uni...

Page 1176: ...er in the direction of the arrow to feed out the misfed paper and remove it Before pulling the tray out open the right side cover and check if there is a paper misfeed If you pull the tray out without checking you may tear misfed paper and make it more difficult to remove the pieces that remain in the machine 7 Paper misfeed in trays 1 to 4 side 6 Paper misfeed in the bypass tray 7 Paper misfeed i...

Page 1177: ...e front cover While pressing the lever over to the left slide the finisher to the left until it stops Rotate the knob in the direction indicated by the arrow and remove the misfed paper Make sure that there is no misfed paper in the machine Remove the misfed paper 10 Paper misfeed in the finisher 11 Paper misfeed in the output area 12 Paper misfeed in the saddle finisher top ...

Page 1178: ...3 04 49 PM Open the top cover and remove the misfed paper Open the front cover Turn the knob as shown in the illustration Open the top cover and remove the misfed paper While holding the tray release lever carefully slide the large capacity tray in the arrow direction until it stops When a punch module is installed 13 Paper misfeed in the large capacity tray ...

Page 1179: ...s 08 002 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 49 PM Open the front cover Move lever A to the right and remove the misfed paper Move lever B to the right and remove the misfed paper Remove the misfed paper While pulling the lever slide the saddle finisher to the left until it stops Remove the misfed paper 14 Paper misfeed in the saddle finisher bottom ...

Page 1180: ...OPERATION GUIDE PAPER MISFEED MAP file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 08 002 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 49 PM Index Contents ...

Page 1181: ...le pressing the lever over to the left slide the finisher to the left until it stops Gently slide the finisher until it stops Lower the staple case release lever and remove the staple case Pull the staple case out to the right Raise the lever at the front end of the staple case and remove the jammed staple Remove the leading staple if it is bent If bent staples remain a staple jam will occur again...

Page 1182: ...ontents 08 003 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 51 PM Index Contents Lower the lever at the front end of the staple case Replace the staple case Push the staple case in until it clicks into place Slide the finisher back to the right Gently slide the finisher back to the right until it locks into its original position Close the cover ...

Page 1183: ...ront cover While pulling the lever slide the saddle finisher to the left until it stops Lower the staple case release lever and remove the staple case Pull the staple case out to the right Raise the lever at the front end of the staple case and remove the jammed staple Remove the leading staple if it is bent If bent staples remain a staple jam will occur again Take care that a bent staple does not...

Page 1184: ...aple case Push the staple case in until it clicks into place Push the saddle finisher back and latch it to the machine Close the front cover Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly Open the side cover Saddle stitch unit Before starting this procedure remove all output from the output tray of the saddle finisher Do not replace removed output in the ou...

Page 1185: ...P_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 08 004 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 52 PM Remove the staple cartridge from the staple unit Lock the staple unit Push the staple unit up until you hear a click Press A down and pull up knob B Remove the jammed staples Take care that a bent staple does not hurt you Push down knob B ...

Page 1186: ...oducts MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 08 004 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 52 PM Index Contents Load new staple cartridges Remove the cover from each staple cartridge and then install the cartridge Close the side cover ...

Page 1187: ...switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Hav...

Page 1188: ...colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Are you scanning one of the following types of originals When Black White is not selected Are there colours or colouring in the paper Wh...

Page 1189: ...splay at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Did you select the paper size or copy ratio manually Copy using automatic paper selection and automatic ratio selection Are you copying using settings that do not ...

Page 1190: ...paper type setting of the selected tray specify a type of paper that cannot be used for 2 sided copying Check Tray Settings in the setting mode If the Disable Duplex checkbox is selected 2 sided copying using that tray will not be possible Change the paper type setting to a type that can be used for 2 sided printing Set System Settings Paper Tray Settings Tray Settings Disable Duplex to in Setting...

Page 1191: ...r switch to the position Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or...

Page 1192: ...ch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Is the image too light Select an appropriate exposure mode for the original being copied and adjust the exposure level manually Is the image too dark Has an appropriate exposure mode for the original type been selected Select one of the following modes depending ...

Page 1193: ...2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 08 006 01 htm 24 03 2011 3 04 56 PM Index Contents This mode is best for copying the light colour shading and fine text found on most maps Light original Use this mode for originals with light pencil writing ...

Page 1194: ...ER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Did you perform Registration Adjustment Ask your administrator to perform Registration Adjustment Setting ...

Page 1195: ... then turn the main power switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost P...

Page 1196: ...ds and then turn the main power switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be ...

Page 1197: ...rrectly to the machine Make sure that the cable is connected securely to the LAN connector or the USB port of your PC and that of the machine If you are connected to a network make sure that the LAN cable is securely connected to the hub as well SIDE AND BACK in OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Is the machine connected to the same network LAN etc as your PC The machine must be connected to the same ...

Page 1198: ...pplications at once or there is insufficient memory or hard drive space Restart your computer Is the machine specified correctly in the application that you are using for printing Check whether the machine s printer driver has been selected from the print window of the application If the machine s printer driver does not appear in the list of available printer drivers it may not be installed corre...

Page 1199: ...splay Read the printed page and take appropriate actions For example a Notice Page will be printed in the following situations The print job is too large to fit in memory A function that has been prohibited by the administrator is specified By factory default Notice Pages are not printed Have functions been disabled by the administrator Check with your administrator When user authentication is ena...

Page 1200: ...r right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Is the colour mode set to Color Select Auto or Color for the colour mode setting Windows The colour mode setting is configured on the Color tab of the printer driver Macintosh The ...

Page 1201: ... the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Does the paper type setting of the selected tray specify a type of paper that cannot be used for 2 sided printing Check Paper Tray Settings in the setting mode If the Disable Duplex checkbox is two sided printing using that tray will not be possible Change the paper type set...

Page 1202: ...hen turn the main power switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Poi...

Page 1203: ...ait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stor...

Page 1204: ...the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Are the printer driver settings appropriate for the print job Check the settings of the printer driver When selecting pri...

Page 1205: ...on After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Does the image particul...

Page 1206: ...orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Did you perform Registration Adjustment Ask your administrator to perform Reg...

Page 1207: ...dicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Was colour data printed in black and white Window...

Page 1208: ...nt to check Solution Does the paper size specified by the job match the size of paper loaded into the tray Make sure that the paper size setting matches the size of paper loaded into the tray Windows The setting is selected in the Paper Select tab of the printer driver If Fit To Paper Size is selected check the loaded paper and the paper size setting Macintosh The setting is selected in the Page S...

Page 1209: ...OPERATION GUIDE PART OF THE IMAGE IS CUT OFF file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 08 008 05 htm 24 03 2011 3 05 04 PM ...

Page 1210: ... can only be loaded in a fixed orientation Rotate the image 180 degrees before printing When the image size and paper size are the same but the orientations are different the orientation of the image is automatically rotated to match the paper However when the paper can only be loaded in a fixed orientation the image may be printed upside down In this event rotate the image 180 degrees before prin...

Page 1211: ...HE IMAGE IS UPSIDE DOWN file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 08 008 06 htm 24 03 2011 3 05 04 PM Index Contents selected in the Output Document Style menu ...

Page 1212: ...an unstable state Cancel printing restart your PC and the machine and try printing again If there is only a small amount of free space remaining in the memory or hard drive of your PC or if a large number of jobs have been spooled on the machine and only a small amount of free space remains text may be printed as garbled characters To cancel printing Windows Double click the printer icon that appe...

Page 1213: ...2A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 08 008 07 htm 24 03 2011 3 05 05 PM Index Contents lengthen the timeout setting of I O Timeout in the setting mode Setting mode Printer Settings Interface Settings I O Timeout If garbled characters are being still printed after the above measures are taken remove and then reinstall the printer driver ...

Page 1214: ...the telephone line connected securely Check the telephone line socket the wall socket and any extension adapters to make sure that all connections are secure SIDE AND BACK Is the correct dial mode set for your line Ask your administrator to verify that Dial Mode Setting is set correctly for the line you are using Select the telephone line type in Dial Mode Setting in the setting mode administrator...

Page 1215: ...ry is full Divide the originals into sets and fax each set separately or use direct transmission If the memory becomes full the transmission will be cancelled Does a message appear notifying you that the original size was not detected Place the original again If the original size is still not detected correctly specify the original size manually Does the job status screen completed jobs or a trans...

Page 1216: ...nt feeder again and re scan it If a folded original is placed in the automatic document feeder an error will occur and scanning will be cancelled when the actual original size is detected during scanning Are the sub address and passcode correct When using F code communication Check with the operator of the other machine to make sure that the sub address and passcode are correct Have functions been...

Page 1217: ...hanges from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Is the original placed face up or face down correctly Place the o...

Page 1218: ...s from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Has the rotation sending been set Enable Rotation Sending Setting befo...

Page 1219: ...ower switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solutio...

Page 1220: ... a message appear in the display instructing you to add toner or paper or to take some other actions Printing is not possible when this screen appears Restore printing capability as instructed by the message Does a password entry screen appear Enter the correct password using the numeric keys Hold Setting for Received Data Print is enabled If you do not know the password check with your administra...

Page 1221: ...ng Inbound Routing function enabled for a received fax If you need to print a received fax ask your administrator When the Inbound Routing function is enabled received faxes are automatically forwarded to a specified address If Print at Error is selected when Inbound Routing is enabled received faxes will only be printed when an error occurs Setting mode Application Settings Administration Setting...

Page 1222: ...ges from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Is little free memory remaining If any of the following applies prin...

Page 1223: ...itch to the position Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cau...

Page 1224: ...ackground colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Has the reception mode been set to Manual Reception in the setting mode Set the reception mode to Auto Reception When the rece...

Page 1225: ...s and then turn the main power switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be l...

Page 1226: ... position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Did you dial usi...

Page 1227: ...dicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Speaker Ringer Volume Line Monitor Fax Receive Complete Signal Fax Send C...

Page 1228: ...dicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Ringer Volume Line Monitor Fax Receive Complete Signal Fax Send Complete ...

Page 1229: ...he main power switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to chec...

Page 1230: ...ion If the key is an individual key is the key included in a group Remove the key from the group and then edit or delete the key If the key is included in multiple programs it must be removed from all programs Setting mode Address Book If the key is included in multiple group keys print the Group List in Sending Address List in the setting mode The list will show where the key is stored Setting mo...

Page 1231: ...key An individual or group one touch key that is stored as a relay destination cannot be edited or deleted Remove the key from the relay destinations of the F code relay broadcast transmission and then edit or delete the key Setting mode System Settings F Code Memory Box Have functions been disabled by the administrator Check with your administrator Some functions may have been disabled in the set...

Page 1232: ...ored for the destination and that the destination is correctly selected If delivery by e mail Scan to E mail is unsuccessful an error message such as Undelivered Message may be sent to the designated administrator s e mail address This information may help you determine the cause of the problem Does the image file exceed the e mail attachment limit set in the setting mode administrator Check with ...

Page 1233: ... not be possible in your PC environment Setting mode Security Settings IPsec Settings Did you place a long original on the document glass when it is scanned Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder A long original cannot be scanned from the document glass Did you place an original that is folded Following the instructions in the display unfold the original pl...

Page 1234: ...er switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution ...

Page 1235: ...ch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Have fu...

Page 1236: ...en the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Are you scanning one of the following types of originals When Black White is not selected Are there colours or colouri...

Page 1237: ...WER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Does the viewer program used by the recipient support the format of the received image data Use a softwar...

Page 1238: ...drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Is the resolution setting appropriate at the time of scanning Select resolution and data compression settings that are suited to the purpose of transmission To create image data that is balanced in terms of resolution and file size pay attention to the following points Resolution settings The default resolution set...

Page 1239: ...ur changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Is Default Address Setting enabled in the setting mode If you...

Page 1240: ...tion Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data bein...

Page 1241: ...lour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Is the original scan size setting smaller than the actual original size Set the scan size to the actual original size If you have intentio...

Page 1242: ...e moire effect take the following procedure When the original is printed matter vertical patterns moire may occur Tap the Exposure key in the base screen to open the exposure setting screen The Moiré Reduction checkbox appears in this screen Tap to select this checkbox to reduce the moire effect only in E mail FTP Desktop Network Folder and Scan to External Memory Device It may also be possible to...

Page 1243: ...011 3 05 21 PM Index Contents send the image to scanner and Internet fax destinations separately When a broadcast transmission is performed that includes both destinations for E mail FTP Desktop and Network Folder and Internet fax destinations that have TIFF S selected for the format the resolution will remain fixed at 200x200dpi even if a different resolution setting is selected ...

Page 1244: ...ower switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solutio...

Page 1245: ...or colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Are Internet fax addresses included in the transmissio...

Page 1246: ... to the position Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause t...

Page 1247: ...ive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Has the maximum number of keys been stored Adjust the number of stored keys Delete one touch keys and group keys that are not being used Have functions been disabled by the administrator Check with your administrator Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode administrator If the key is an individual k...

Page 1248: ...g the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Is the key included in a program key Remove the key from the program and then edit or delete the key If the key is included in multiple programs it must be removed from all programs Call Program Delete in the action panel for each mode If the key is included in multiple pro...

Page 1249: ...our changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Did you enable document filing in the printer driver Enable ...

Page 1250: ...urn the main power switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to...

Page 1251: ... main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Do the custom folders created with ...

Page 1252: ... the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Did you tap the Print and Delete the Data key to print a stored file Tap the Print and Save the Data key to print again If you print the file by tapping the Print and Delete the Data key the file is automatically deleted after being printed Th...

Page 1253: ...east 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or re...

Page 1254: ...the main power switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to che...

Page 1255: ...power switch to the position Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard driv...

Page 1256: ... switch to the position Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or ...

Page 1257: ...ain power switch to the position Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard ...

Page 1258: ...n press the POWER button When the background colour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost Point to check Solution Was the file name stored in the advanced transmission settings during a scan or Internet fa...

Page 1259: ...011 3 05 31 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N SPECIFIED MACHINE FUNCTIONS CANNOT BE USED Index Contents TROUBLESHOOTING Point to check Solution Have functions been disabled by the administrator Check with your administrator Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode When user authentication is enabled the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings ...

Page 1260: ...t be run Is the Power Save Mode button blinking Auto Power Shut Off mode has activated To return the machine to normal operation press the Power Save Mode button AUTO POWER SHUT OFF TIMER Is a cover open or a device separated from the machine Read the message and take appropriate actions A warning message will appear when a cover is open or a device is separated from the machine Did login fail thr...

Page 1261: ...lour of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is grey and press the Power button and then turn the main power switch to the position Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the position After the main power indicator colour changes from orange to green press the Power button If the message still appears after switching the Power button and the ...

Page 1262: ...LACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE Has a paper misfeed occurred Remove the misfeed as instructed by the message in the touch panel REMOVING MISFEEDS in TROUBLESHOOTING Is the output tray full Remove the output from the tray and resume printing When the output tray becomes full a detector activates and stops printing Is the waste toner box full Replace the waste toner box as instructed by the message in th...

Page 1263: ...ESHOOTING Point to check Solution Is the original curled or folded Straighten the original The correct original size cannot be detected if the original is curled or folded Did you place an original smaller than A5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 size Select the original size manually Original sizes smaller than A5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 cannot be detected When scanning a small original on the document glass it is convenient...

Page 1264: ...ts 08 019 05 htm 24 03 2011 3 05 33 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N THE DISPLAYED BYPASS TRAY PAPER SIZE IS NOT CORRECT Index Contents TROUBLESHOOTING Point to check Solution Is the extension guide pulled out Pull out the bypass tray extension guide When loading paper in the bypass tray be sure to pull out the extension to enable the paper size to be detected correctly ...

Page 1265: ...ay Make sure that the stack of paper in the tray is not higher than the indicator line Is the original a long original When using the automatic document feeder to scan a long original set the scan size to Long Size Note that long originals cannot be copied using the copy function Is the original on thin paper Use the document glass to scan the original If you need to use the automatic document fee...

Page 1266: ...ick Start Guide For paper that is prohibited or not recommended see APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES Has the paper in the tray absorbed moisture If you will not be using paper in a tray for a long time remove the paper from the tray and store it in a bag in a dark and dry location Are the bypass tray guides adjusted to the width of the paper Adjust the bypass tray guides to the width of the paper Is the byp...

Page 1267: ...ope contents 08 020 02 htm 24 03 2011 3 05 34 PM Index Contents Tray Registration Did you add paper to the bypass tray When adding paper remove any paper remaining in the bypass tray combine it with the paper to be added and reload as a single stack If paper is added without removing the remaining paper a misfeed may result ...

Page 1268: ... loaded correctly into the paper tray Set the guides to the size of the paper Make sure the height of the paper does not exceed the indicator line Are restrictions placed on the trays that can be used in each mode copy print fax Internet fax and document filing Check the settings in Paper Tray Settings and see if checkmarks appear in the checkboxes of each mode Feeding Approved Job Functions witho...

Page 1269: ...to check Solution Is too much paper loaded into the bypass tray Do not load more than the maximum number of sheets The maximum number of sheets varies depending on the paper type setting For more information see SPECIFICATIONS in Quick Start Guide Are the bypass tray guides adjusted to the width of the paper Adjust the bypass tray guides to the width of the paper Are the original guides adjusted t...

Page 1270: ...P_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 08 020 05 htm 24 03 2011 3 05 36 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOES NOT OPERATE Index Contents TROUBLESHOOTING Point to check Solution Have functions been disabled by the administrator Check with your administrator Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode ...

Page 1271: ...N LINES APPEAR IN THE SCANNED IMAGE Index Contents TROUBLESHOOTING Point to check Solution Are the scanning areas of the document glass or automatic document feeder dirty Clean the scanning areas of the document glass or automatic document feeder CLEANING OF THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Is the bypass feed roller dirty Clean the surface of the bypass feed roller CLEANING THE BYP...

Page 1272: ...ecommended paper Using paper that is for other models or special paper that is not supported may result in misfeeds creases or smudges SUPPLIES in Quick Start Guide Are you printing on pre punched paper Take care that the image does not overlap the punch holes If the printed image overlaps the punch holes smudges may appear on the reverse side of the paper following 1 sided printing or on both sid...

Page 1273: ...the paper type been set correctly Set the correct paper type in the tray settings Make sure that the following has not occurred Heavy paper is being used but a paper type other than heavy paper is selected in the tray settings The image may disappear if rubbed Paper other than heavy paper is being used but heavy paper is selected in the tray settings This may cause creases and misfeeds Setting mod...

Page 1274: ...tm 24 03 2011 3 05 39 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N PRINT QUALITY IS POOR Index Contents TROUBLESHOOTING Point to check Solution Is Toner Save Mode enabled Check with your administrator When Toner Save Mode is enabled in the setting mode printing takes place using less toner and thus the print result is lighter Setting mode Energy Save Toner Save Mode ...

Page 1275: ...BLESHOOTING Point to check Solution Has the correct paper size been set If you are using a non standard size be sure to specify the paper size If the size of paper loaded into a tray was changed be sure to check the paper size setting Setting mode Paper Tray Settings Tray Registration Was the original placed in the correct position If you are using the document glass be sure to place the original ...

Page 1276: ...t to check Solution Is the paper loaded with the print side facing in the correct direction Make sure that the print side of paper is facing in the correct direction Trays 1 to 4 Load the paper with the print side facing up Bypass tray and tray 5 Load the paper with the print side facing down When the paper type is Pre Printed or Letter Head load the paper in the opposite way Except when Disabling...

Page 1277: ...N A COVER OR INSERT IS NOT PRINTED ON THE SPECIFIED PAPER Index Contents TROUBLESHOOTING Point to check Solution Has the paper type been set correctly Set the correct paper type for the tray that contains the paper specified for the cover or insert If the paper type set for the cover or insert is not the same as the paper type set for the tray paper will be fed from a different tray Setting mode P...

Page 1278: ... Index Contents TROUBLESHOOTING Point to check Solution Is the USB device compatible with the machine Ask your dealer if the device is compatible with the machine USB devices that are not compatible with the machine cannot be used Is the connected USB device recognized correctly Use USB Device Check in the setting mode to check whether or not the device is recognized Setting mode System Settings U...

Page 1279: ...110N MX 3610N THE CONNECTED USB MEMORY DEVICE CANNOT BE USED Index Contents TROUBLESHOOTING Point to check Solution Is the format of the USB memory device FAT32 Check the file format of the USB memory device If the format of the USB memory device is other than FAT32 use your PC to change the format to FAT32 Are you using a USB memory device with a capacity of more than 32 GB Use a 32 GB or less US...

Page 1280: ... Solution Does a message appear indicating that you need to remove paper from the stapler compiler Remove all remaining paper from the stapler compiler Does the following message appear in the touch panel The finisher is in trouble xx xx Letters and numbers appear in xx xx Check the cable connection of the finisher Remove and then firmly reinsert the cable and restart the machine Have functions be...

Page 1281: ...r When copying select Same Width for Mixed Size Original in Other Are there more sheets than can be stapled at once For the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled see SPECIFICATIONS in Quick Start Guide Is a paper size that cannot be stapled included in the print job For the paper size that can be stapled see SPECIFICATIONS in Quick Start Guide Is the paper type setting of the tray selected ...

Page 1282: ...GUIDE STAPLING DOES NOT TAKE PLACE INCLUDING SADDLE STITCH file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 08 022 04 htm 24 03 2011 3 05 43 PM Index Contents ...

Page 1283: ...Width for Mixed Size Original in Other Is a paper size that cannot be punched included in the print job For the paper sizes that can be punched see SPECIFICATIONS in Quick Start Guide Is the tray selected in the printer driver set to a paper type that cannot be punched Check the paper type settings in the machine and select a tray that has paper that can be used for punching Click the Details butt...

Page 1284: ..._ex_ope contents 08 022 06 htm 24 03 2011 3 05 44 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N THE STAPLING POSITION OR PUNCH POSITION IS NOT CORRECT Index Contents TROUBLESHOOTING Point to check Solution Is the stapling position set correctly Check the stapling position in PREVIEW SCREEN Are the punching positions set correctly Check the punch position in PREVIEW SCREEN ...

Page 1285: ...le the Disabling of Duplex setting The paper folding function cannot be used when Disabling of Duplex is enabled in the setting mode Check with your administrator Setting mode Device Control Disabling of Duplex Are you using a paper type that has a specific front and reverse side The folding function cannot be used with pre printed paper letterhead paper or other paper that has specific front or r...

Page 1286: ...0Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 08 022 08 htm 24 03 2011 3 05 45 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N PRINTED OUTPUTS ARE MISALIGNED IN THE FINISHER OUTPUT TRAY Index Contents TROUBLESHOOTING Point to check Solution Is the printed output curled Curled output may be solved when the paper is loaded upside down into the tray ...

Page 1287: ...on 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 08 022 09 htm 24 03 2011 3 05 46 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N STAPLED OUTPUTS ARE MISALIGNED IN THE TRAY Index Contents TROUBLESHOOTING Point to check Solution Is the output curled Curled output may be solved when the paper is loaded upside down into the tray ...

Page 1288: ...A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 08 022 10 htm 24 03 2011 3 05 47 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N SHEETS OUTPUT TO THE DELIVERY TRAY OF THE FINISHER ARE SCATTERED Index Contents TROUBLESHOOTING Point to check Solution Have the output sheets got folded If the front and back side of the sheets in the paper feed tray have been reversed in some cases it can be improved ...

Page 1289: ...A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 08 022 11 htm 24 03 2011 3 05 47 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N THE STAPLED SHEETS ARE SCATTERED Index Contents TROUBLESHOOTING Point to check Solution Have the output sheets got folded If the front and back side of the sheets in the paper feed tray have been reversed in some cases it can be improved ...

Page 1290: ...on 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 08 023 01 htm 24 03 2011 3 05 48 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N PREVIEW IMAGES OR THUMBNAIL IMAGES DO NOT APPEAR Index Contents TROUBLESHOOTING Point to check Solution Are there a number of jobs waiting to be executed Wait until several of the jobs have been executed ...

Page 1291: ...nual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 08 023 02 htm 24 03 2011 3 05 49 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N THE TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY IS DIFFICULT TO VIEW Index Contents TROUBLESHOOTING Point to check Solution Is the brightness properly adjusted Tap the Brightness Adjustment key on the home screen to adjust the brightness ...

Page 1292: ...ERE LOGGED OUT WITHOUT LOGGING OUT YOURSELF Index Contents TROUBLESHOOTING Point to check Solution Did Auto Clear activate Log in again When user authentication is used the currently logged in user will be automatically logged out if Auto Clear activates If you are the administrator change the time setting of Auto Clear or disable Auto Clear in Auto Clear Setting Setting mode Operation Settings Jo...

Page 1293: ...N MX 3610N YOU FORGOT THE ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD Index Contents TROUBLESHOOTING Point to check Solution Was the administrator password changed from the factory default setting Contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative For the factory default administrator password see TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF THE MACHINE in Quick Start Guide After changing the password take special care to re...

Page 1294: ...M MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N CANCELING OPERATION AND RESETTING SETTINGS Index Contents TROUBLESHOOTING To clear and initialize all settings Tap the CA key To cancel printing or transmission Tap the Cancel Print or Cancel Transmission key To cancel job Remove the pending jobs in the Job Status screen STOPPING DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED To clear entered numeric values Tap the C key ...

Page 1295: ...IX HOW TO USE THE OPERATION GUIDE PC OPERATION GUIDE PC DOWNLOAD CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT WHEN REQUESTING MAINTENANCE SERVICES IF YOUR ADDRESS CHANGES MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SERVICE SYSTEM MINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF PERFORMANCE PARTS FOR REPAIR PURPOSES MINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF SUPPLIES We will retain supplies of this product for seven 7 years after it has been discontinued LICENCE INFORMATION ...

Page 1296: ...ATION GUIDE BUILT IN APPENDIX To see Operation Guide built in tap the Help icon on the home screen Download the Operation Guide PC from the machine OPERATION GUIDE PC DOWNLOAD Symbol of Setting mode for administrator The machine has a Setting mode for an administrator to register the default value etc of each function If it is necessary to adjust the Setting mode to use the machine usage instructi...

Page 1297: ...nline Help function This guide primarily explains screens and operation procedures in a Windows environment when you are using Windows Vista The screen may vary depending on the version of the operating system or application being used This guide covers explanations of screens and procedures in a Macintosh environment based on Mac OS X 10 4 in the case of Mac OS X The screen may vary depending on ...

Page 1298: ...es due to incorrect operation of the product and its options or other failures or for any damage that occurs due to use of the product All information in this guide is subject to change without notice The peripheral devices are generally optional however some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment This guide explains the MX 3110N with a stand 3x500 sheet paper drawer For s...

Page 1299: ...ine The Operation Guide PC cannot be downloaded unless the machine is connected to a network For the details please contact the network administrator The recommended Web browsers are Internet Explorer 6 or later Netscape Navigator 9 Firefox 3 6 or later Safari 4 1 or later The Setting mode Web version may not be displayed without user authorization depending on settings of the machine For password...

Page 1300: ...ION GUIDE OPERATION GUIDE PC DOWNLOAD file G Documents Products MX2610_3110_3610N Operation 20Manual MX3610OP_0122A1 mx3610_ex_ope contents 09 004 htm 24 03 2011 3 05 53 PM Index Contents downloaded in Step 4 ...

Page 1301: ...er In addition certain convenient functions have been picked up in order to explain their purposes as an example On the Index page of the Operation Guide PC explanations of modes and convenient functions can be selected from respective tabs Meanings of icons used in the Operation Guide PC Indicates an instruction that if not followed may result in death or serious injury Also indicates an instruct...

Page 1302: ...elected in the Setting mode and the Setting mode Web version For Setting mode and Setting mode Web version refer to the following item SETTING MODE Manual description Some screens and icons shown in this guide may vary from those of the machine For information on installing the drivers and software cited in this guide please refer to the Software Setup Guide For information on your operating syste...

Page 1303: ... from instances provided for by law SHARP is not responsible for failures occurring during the use of the product or its options or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options or other failures or for any damage that occurs due to use of the product All information in this guide is subject to change without notice The peripheral devices are generally optional however some mo...

Page 1304: ...read TROUBLESHOOTING at first Nevertheless if a particular problem persists stop using your machine Unplug the power cable from the machine and contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative and inform the following items An optional field service is also available Product name Digital full colour multifunction machine Model Any of MX 2610N MX 3110N or MX 3610N which is the type ...

Page 1305: ..._ex_ope contents 12 002 htm 24 03 2011 3 05 55 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N IF YOUR ADDRESS CHANGES Index Contents APPENDIX When the machine is transferred the internal toner cartridge needs to be taken out Please contact your dealer or authorised service representative in your area before you change your place of residence ...

Page 1306: ...pe contents 12 003 htm 24 03 2011 3 05 56 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N MAINTENANCE Index Contents APPENDIX When the maintenance execution time is approaching a message will appear on the touch panel When the message is displayed contact your dealer or authorised service representative in your area as soon as possible ...

Page 1307: ...tm 24 03 2011 3 05 56 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N MAINTENANCE SERVICE SYSTEM Index Contents APPENDIX We provide two types of optional maintenance services to maintain the performance and functions of this product the Counter Service System and the Spot Service System For service system details contact the dealer and select the most appropriate service ...

Page 1308: ...2 005 htm 24 03 2011 3 05 57 PM MX 2610N MX 3110N MX 3610N MINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF PERFORMANCE PARTS FOR REPAIR PURPOSES Index Contents APPENDIX In order to ensure our maintenance services we will retain performance parts for this product for seven 7 years after production is discontinued Performance parts refers to parts that are required to maintain the functions of this product ...

Page 1309: ...ls please contact Office of Technology Transfer Carnegie Mellon University 5000 Forbes Avenue Pittsburgh PA 15213 3890 412 268 4387 fax 412 268 7395 tech transfer andrew cmu edu 4 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by Computing Services at Carnegie Mellon University http www cmu edu computing CARNEGIE MELLON UNIV...

Page 1310: ... source code files are copyright MIT Cygnus Support OpenVision Oracle Sun Soft FundsXpress and others Project Athena Athena Athena MUSE Discuss Hesiod Kerberos Moira and Zephyr are trademarks of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology MIT No commercial use of these trademarks may be made without prior written permission of MIT Commercial use means use of a name in a product or other for profit m...

Page 1311: ...CT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Original SSLeay Licence Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights re...

Page 1312: ...nclude an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIA...

Search results

Summary of Contents for MX-2610N

Reviews:

Sharp MX-2610N, User Manual, Page: 98 / 1312

Search results

Summary of Contents for MX-2610N

Reviews: